ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT (EA) AND THE ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK
Public Disclosure Authorized PUNJAB EDUCATION SECTOR REFORMS PROGRAM-II (PESRP-II)
Public Disclosure Authorized
PROGRAM DIRECTOR PUNJAB EDUCATION SECTOR REFORMS PROGRAM (PESRP) SCHOOL EDUCATION DEPARTMENT GOVERNMENT OF THE PUNJAB
Tel: +92 42 923 2289~95 Fax: +92 42 923 2290 url: http://pesrp.punjab.gov.pk email: [email protected]
Public Disclosure Authorized
Revised and Updated for PERSP-II February 2012
Public Disclosure Authorized
DISCLAIMER This environmental and social assessment report of the activities of the Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program of the Government of the Punjab, which were considered to impact the environment, has been prepared in compliance to the Environmental laws of Pakistan and in conformity to the Operational Policy Guidelines of the World Bank. The report is Program specific and of limited liability and applicability only to the extent of the physical activities under the PESRP. All rights are reserved with the study proponent (the Program Director, PMIU, PESRP) and the environmental consultant (Environs, Lahore). No part of this report can be reproduced, copied, published, transcribed in any manner, or cited in a context different from the purpose for which it has been prepared, except with prior permission of the Program Director, PESRP.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This document presents the environmental and social assessment report of the various activities under the Second Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program (PESRP-II) – an initiative of Government of the Punjab for continuing holistic reforms in the education sector aimed at improving the overall condition of education and the sector’s service delivery. The report dilates upon the potential adverse environmental and social impacts of the Program and suggests appropriate guidelines in the form of an environmental and social management framework (ESMF) for avoiding or mitigating the significant impacts. Screening and assessment of the environmental impacts of developmental, constructional, and or infrastructural activities is a legal prerequisite under environmental laws of Pakistan. Applicability of the World Bank Safeguard Policies concerning environment and social sectors also extends to the Program for its being a Bank funded initiative.
Program Description The Punjab Education Sector Reform Program was launched in 2003 by Government of the Punjab (GoPb) for improving the plight of education in the province. The PESRP employs a holistic, sector-wide, and a program mode approach of developing well coordinated synergistic activities in a symbiotic environment, because the piecemeal project mode approach had not been successful in the past. Under the program mode framework, the Provincial Government enters into “Terms of Partnership” agreements with the District Governments for providing tied budgetary grants, each year. The PESRP is designed to address the issues of access, governance, and quality, primarily in the public sector education system. The progress indices show that the Program has been successful in achieving the majority of its objectives like increased enrollment rate, reduced dropouts, provision of missing facilities, gender balance, provision of free textbooks, and reduced teachers’ absenteeism.
To support the PERSP, the World Bank implemented the Punjab Education Sector Project (PESP) from 2009 to 2012. Construction of missing facilities in the schools was one of the subcomponents of the Project.
PESRP-II . PESRP comes to an end at the close of this fiscal year (FY2011/12). Building on the institutional, administrative, and program foundations laid by PESRP, the provincial government is presently developing its next medium-term multifaceted sectoral reform program for primary and secondary education, the Second Punjab Education Sector Reform Program (PESRP II), which aims to better orient and ratchet up efforts to address the remaining deficiencies in participation, attainment, and achievement outcomes. PESRP II will also support and enable the roadmap to yield real and sustainable gains in outcomes. To improve outcomes, the main challenge in public education is essentially to improve teacher quality and performance. The teacher is the main instrument for student learning in this context, so many of the sectoral initiatives can affect the child only through the teacher. Improved student learning, in turn, helps retain students in school and attract new children to school. Recognizing that the participation returns from learning gains may take time to materialize, PESRP II also includes initiatives that directly attempt to increase participation at different levels.
Much like the earlier phase of the Program, the Bank plans to launch the Second Punjab Education Sector Project (PESP-II), to support the PERSP-II. In line with the government’s priorities, the focus of PERSP-II is not on new infrastructure development, though some small scale civil works may be carried out in the Sector at large during the Program implementation period to construct the missing facilities or to rehabilitate/improve the existing school buildings. However none of such construction activities will be included in the PESRP II, supported by PESP-II. Similarly, PESRP II and PESP-II will not involve any land acquisition or involuntary resettlement.
Study Objectives The primary objective of the present study is to identify and address the significantly adverse environmental and social impacts associated with civil works, school operations, and provision of free textbooks to schoolchildren. Among these activities, civil works and provision of free text books are not currently included in the PERSP-II, though they can still be undertaken in the Sector at large.
Scope of the Study The scope of the study entails assessment of the environmental and social impacts of the Sector
ESMF – PERSP-II Page iii activities in the entire geographical extent of the province of Punjab. However, these impacts have been assessed in only a few districts of representative regional character chosen from different geographical regions of the province. The study also assesses impacts of the Program activities during various implementation stages, from planning and designing to construction and the post construction usage of the buildings. Examination of the adverse impacts relating to printing and distribution of free textbooks is also included in the study’s ambit. Formulation of an ESMF, which caters both environmental and social issues, also forms part of the study’s chartered scope.
Study Methodology The study relies both on primary and secondary data sources. However, greater reliance has been placed on primary sources, which include site visits and soliciting information from the key persons like construction contractors, school councils, parents, teachers, and officers of the district administration. Stakeholders ‟ consultations and focused group meetings have also been used as a primary source to solicit viewpoint and to know concerns of the stakeholders. A specially developed checklist has been used for collecting first hand information and for ascertaining disturbances to environmental parameters from Program implementation. A simplified impact assessment matrix has been used for characterization of the adverse impacts on selected parameters of the physical, biological, and social environments in the study area. Photographs, taken during field visits and surveys, have been used for explaining adverse impacts and for highlighting the areas of concern. The secondary sources include office archives of the Education Department, files and papers of the PESRP, websites of the World Bank, Government of the Punjab, and the PESRP, and the various other sources of information.
Significant Adverse Impacts The majority of the Program activities will be environmentally benign, though isolated small-scale constructions at the individual school sites may be carried out. These construction activities, being of small scale and of short duration, would hardly produce any impacts of notable significance. The majority of the impacts during construction would be highly localized and mostly temporary in nature. These would relate to water quality, air quality, noise, vibrations, debris / solid waste generation, wastewater production, consumption of raw materials, worksite safety, and inconvenience to public primarily from improper stockpiling of the materials in the immediate radius of influence of the individual sites. The impacts pertaining to school operation phase would relate to those emanating from educational / learning pursuits and cleanliness activities at the schools. These would include impacts from inadequate disposal and management of the toilet wastewater, and to some extent, unhygienic disposal of the solid waste. The significant impacts of the textbook printing would pertain to usage of chemicals, inks, and paper of non-farm origin during the process of printing. The impacts of the distributional activities would relate to improper storage and the road traffic hazards by the carriage vehicles.
Mitigation Measures The report provides mitigation measures for each type and stage of activity. The proposed design stage measures include provision of septic tank for toilet wastewater, convenient spatial placing of various structures and facilities, and provision of facilitation gadgets for special children. These construction stage measures include pre-emptive precautions by the construction contractor for avoiding the adverse impacts, for example, sheeting the stockpiled materials, limiting construction activities after school hours, and ensuring worksite safety. The mitigation measures relating to school operation include proper disposal of the solid waste, avoiding failure (stuck up) of the septic tanks, and the drinking water quality testing. The mitigation suggestions relating to textbook printing and distribution include selection of an environment friendly printing house, avoiding usage of toxic chemicals and inks, periodic fumigation of the warehouses, and educating the schoolchildren in avoiding indirect impacts e.g., not to place moist eatables on the printed papers.
The Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) The environmental and social management framework (ESMF) provides a mechanism for implementing the preventive and mitigatory measures in the form of environmental guidelines. The main objective of the ESMF is firstly to prevent, and where it is not possible, to attenuate the adverse impacts to an acceptable level by adopting suitable administrative and or technical options. The key components of the ESMF include environmental guidelines for the architect / design engineer, construction contractor, focal persons, and the proponent.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page iv
The ESMF also provides an institutional setup for implementing the guidelines by designating focal persons at provincial, district, and school level. These focal persons will ensure upward and downward coordination, removal of implementation bottlenecks, establishing a two-way flow of information, and maintaining a consolidated database. The District Monitoring Officer (DMO) will ensure compliance of the guidelines and internal compliance monitoring through his team of the Monitoring and Evaluation Assistants (MEAs). The ESMF also provides mechanisms for internal and external compliance monitoring to ensure regimental observance of the guidelines and ESMF at various tiers of responsibility. The MEAs, during their visits to schools in their respective beats, will also take note of the environmental compliances by the construction contractor and the school head, on a checklist proforma especially developed for the purpose. Similarly, the heads of schools will also report compliance status of the guidelines during both construction and operation phases.
External monitoring in the form of annual environmental audits has been proposed. This external monitoring will be outsourced to an environmental consultancy, which will review the ESMF process, identify any environmental issues on ground, and offer recommendations for keeping the Program compatible with changing conditions.
In order to ensure temporal sustainability and successful implementation, the ESMF will have a component of training and capacity building of the key personnel. One- to three-days training workshops will be held in each district and at the provincial level respectively, all during the Program’s currency. These workshops will be directed towards enhancing implementers ‟ understanding of the environmental and social issues of the Program. The workshops will focus on apprising and sensitizing the participants about importance of the environmental and social aspects of the Program, understanding implementation requirements of the ESMF, and managing the on-ground problems in a befitting manner both at macro- and micro-level. Whereas, district level workshops will focus mainly on implementation aspects, the provincial level workshops will relate to policy issues and troubleshooting strategies. Development of a training manual, selection of an environmental consultancy, and of resource persons will precede the workshops. It is envisaged that proper implementation of the ESMF would ensure achievement of the desired environmental performance of the Program.
ESMF Costs The ESMF costs will pertain mainly to trainings, capacity building activities and external monitoring. Fifteen workshops at Provincial Level and twenty- seven at Divisional Level will take place over the three years’ time period. Assuming that the WB’s funding is for three years, there will be three rounds of annual environmental audit and external monitoring, also for the awareness and capacity building activities. Thus, three years‘ combined cost under both heads will be around Pak Rupees 23 million . This will be reflected in Program’s budget.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page v
List of Acronyms
ADB Asian Development Bank C&W Communication and Works dB Decibel DMO District Monitoring Officer EA Environmental Assessment EC Environmental Coordinator ED Executive Director EDO Executive District Officer EFP Environmental Focal Person EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EIAR Environmental Impact Assessment Report EIAS Environmental Impact Assessment Statement EIS Environmental Impact Statement EM Environmental Modulator ESMF Environmental Management Framework EMIS Education Management Information System EPA Environmental Protection Agency EPD Environment Protection Department ES Environmental Study / Environmental Statement ESN Environmental Screening Note FGM Focused Group Meetings FMR Farm to Market Road GES Government Elementary School GGHS Government Girls High School GGPS Government Girls Primary School GHS Government High School GHSS Government Higher Secondary School GPS Government Primary School HRD Human Resource Development HRM Human Resource Management IBRD International Bank for Reconstruction and Development IEE Initial Environmental Examination IEER Initial Environmental Examination Report IEES Initial Environmental Examination Statement IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature IWT Indus Water Treaty JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency Km Kilometer MDGs Millennium Development Goals MEA Monitoring and Evaluation Assistant MoU Memorandum of Understanding MSW Municipal Solid Waste MTBF Medium Term Budgetary Framework NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards NLC National Logistic Corporation NOC No Objection Certificate NWFP North Western Frontier Province OP Operational Policy PCMA Post Completion Monitoring and Audit PCO PROGRAM Coordination Office PD PROGRAM Director PEPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Act PESRP Punjab Education Sector Reforms PROGRAM PMIU Project Monitoring and Implementation Unit PPA Post Project Auditing PSDP Public Sector Development PROGRAM SMIS School Management Information System SPM Suspended Particulate Matter
ESMF – PERSP-II Page vi
SW Solid Waste(s) TDS Total Dissolved Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids VOC Volatile Organic Compounds WB World Bank WHO World Health Organization WWF World Wildlife Fund
ESMF – PERSP-II Page vii
CONTENTS
Executive Summary ...... iii List of Acronyms ...... vi 1. INTRODUCTION ...... 1 1.1 Rationale and Objectives of the Study ...... 1 1.2 Study’s Extent and Scope ...... 1 1.3 Study Methodology ...... 1 1.4 The Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program (PESRP) ...... 2 2. LEGISLATIVE AND REGULATORY OVERVIEW ...... 3 2.1 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 ...... 3 2.2 The IEE/EIA Regulations, 2000 ...... 3 2.3 The Punjab Wildlife Act, 1974 ...... 3 2.4 Legislation relating to Cultural and Archaeological Heritage ...... 4 2.5 The World Bank Safeguard Policies ...... 4 3. Project Description ...... 7 3.1 PESRP’s Strategy and Approach ...... 7 3.2 Program Objectives ...... 7 3.3 Program Achievements ...... 7 3.4 PESP ...... 8 3.5 Description of PERSP-II and PESP-II ...... 8 3.5.1 Higher Level Objectives to Which the Project Contributes ...... 8 3.5.2 Project Development Objectives ...... 8 3.5.3 Project Components ...... 9 3.5.4 Institutional and Implementation Arrangements ...... 10 3.5.5 Results Monitoring and Evaluation ...... 11 3.5.6 Sustainability ...... 11 4. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIOECONOMIC PROFILE ...... 13 4.1 Geography ...... 13 4.2 Topography ...... 13 4.3 Geology ...... 13 4.4 Soil Morphology ...... 14 4.5 Seismology ...... 14 4.6 Surface Hydrology ...... 14 4.7 Groundwater ...... 14 4.8 Meteorology, Climate, and Air Quality ...... 15
ESMF – PERSP-II Page viii
4.9 Forests, Habitats, and Ecologically Sensitive Areas ...... 15 4.10 Demographic Profile ...... 16 4.11 Land Use / Agricultural Profile ...... 16 4.12 Healthcare Facilities ...... 16 4.13 Educational Facilities ...... 17 4.14 Infrastructure Profile ...... 17 4.15 Socioeconomic Profile ...... 17 4.16 Labor and Employment ...... 17 4.17 Culture, Religion, and Customs ...... 18 4.18 Gender Issues ...... 18 4.19 Poverty ...... 19 5. STAKEHOLDERS CONSULTATIONS AND FOCUSSED GROUP MEETINGS ...... 23 5.1 Rationale of Public Consultations ...... 23 5.2 Identification of Stakeholders and Mode of Consultations ...... 23 5.3 Objectives of the Stakeholders Consultations ...... 23 5.4 Stakeholders Consulted ...... 23 5.5 Issues Discussed ...... 24 5.6 Gist of the Outcome of the Public Consultations ...... 24 6. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL ASSESSMENT ...... 26 6.1 Impact Assessment Methodology and Mitigation Strategy ...... 26 6.2 Soil and Lands ...... 26 6.2.1 Impacts ...... 26 6.2.2 Mitigations ...... 26 6.3 Surface Water Quality ...... 27 6.3.1 Impacts ...... 27 6.3.2 Mitigations ...... 27 6.4 Groundwater Quality ...... 27 6.4.1 Impacts ...... 27 6.4.2 Mitigations ...... 27 6.5 Air Quality ...... 28 6.5.1 Impacts ...... 28 6.5.2 Mitigations ...... 28 6.6 Noise and Vibrations ...... 28 6.6.1 Impacts ...... 28 6.6.2 Mitigations ...... 28
ESMF – PERSP-II Page ix
6.7 Access, Easement, Health and Worksite Safety ...... 29 6.7.1 Impacts ...... 29 6.7.2 Mitigations ...... 29 7. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK ...... 31 7.1 Institutional Setup for ESMF Implementation ...... 31 7.2 Roles and Responsibilities of the Focal Persons ...... 32 7.3 The Environmental and Social Guidelines ...... 32 7.4 Internal Compliance Monitoring ...... 33 7.5 External Compliance Monitoring ...... 33 7.6 Trainings and Capacity Building ...... 33 7.7 ESMF Costs ...... 34
Annexes
Annex 1: Photographs Annex 2: List of Schools Surveyed Annex 3: List of the Persons Interviewed Annex 4: Wild Birds and Animals Protected under the Punjab Wildlife Act, 1974 Annex 5: Sites Protected under the Antiquities Act, 1975 Annex 6: Sites Protected under the Punjab Special Premises Ordinance, 1985 Annex 7: Notified Ecologically Protected Areas in Punjab Annex 8: Environment, Health, and Safety Guidelines
List of Tables and Figures
Table 2.1: Summary of the Bank’s OPs and their applicability to PESRP ...... 4 Table 2.2: WB Operational Policies and their relationship to PESRP Activities ...... 4 Table 4.1: Groundwater Quality of Rawalpindi District ...... 19 Table 4.2: Groundwater Quality of Sheikhupura District ...... 19 Table 4.3: Groundwater Quality of Bahawalpur District ...... 20 Table 4.4: Ambient Air Quality Data of Lahore (1998-2002) ...... 21 Table 4.5: Number of Public Sector Healthcare Facilities and Bed Strength in Punjab ...... 21 Table 4.6: Health Indicator Status in Punjab ...... 21
Table 6.1: Simplified Environmental and Social Impact Matrix ...... 30
ESMF – PERSP-II Page x
Table 7.1: Organizations and Focal Persons for ESMF Implementation ...... 31 Table 7.2: Environmental Focal Persons and their Areas of Responsibility ...... 35 Table 7.3: Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Guidelines ...... 36 Table 7.4: Tentative Framework of the Training Program...... 42 Table 7.5: Tentative ESMF Implementation Costs (for Three Years) ...... 43
Figure 4.1: Map of Punjab Province ...... 22
ESMF – PERSP-II Page xi
1. INTRODUCTION
This environmental and social assessment study report evaluates the adverse environmental and social impacts of the Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program (PESRP) and provides an environmental and social management framework (ESMF) for avoiding, and where not possible, mitigating the significant impacts. The present document is meant for PERSP-II, and has been prepared after making some minor revisions in the original document. The PERSP-II is quite similar to the earlier phase of the Program in its overall scope with a slightly different focus.
1.1 Rationale and Objectives of the Study The primary objective of the study is to address the significantly adverse environmental and social impacts of the PESRP-II activities. Whereas, most activities under the Program are environmentally benign, a few Program components, particularly those relating to constructional activities at the school sites, educational / learning activities during school operations, and provision of free textbooks to schoolchildren, are considered to have negative bearing on the environment. That is why the Program Monitoring and Implementation Unit (PMIU) commissioned this study for ascertaining magnitude and extent of Program’s adverse impacts during construction, operation and textbook printing / distribution and addressing them by outlining preventive and corrective measures, in compliance to environmental laws of the country and in conformity with the Safeguard / Operational Policies (OP) of the World Bank (WB).
1.2 Study’s Extent and Scope The study comprises (i) description of the existing environmental settings or baseline profile of the Program’s area of activity - which is the entire province of Punjab, (ii) assessment of the likely disturbances to the environmental parameters from the Program activities, and (iii) preparing an ESMF for avoiding and mitigating the predicted adverse impacts on the physical, biological, and socio-cultural environment. The study covers all aspects and all stages of the Program activities, particularly those relating to constructions, school operations, and provision of free textbooks to over 1.1 million schoolchildren. The study, of course, is limited in its extent and scope to the terms of reference of the proponent 1 1.3 Study Methodology The study has been conducted in accordance with impact assessment guidelines, rules, and regulations of the Government of Pakistan and against Safeguard Policies of the World Bank. The format of the report, to the extent possible, is in consonance to prevailing international practices in the field of environmental assessment.
The study has relied on both primary and secondary data and information sources. However, relatively greater reliance has been placed on primary sources, which included site visits / surveys, soliciting information from the key persons like construction contractors, school councils, parents, teachers, functionaries of the district administration, and the NGOs. Focused group meetings and stakeholders ‟ consultations have been used as information tools for soliciting viewpoints of the key stakeholders, end-beneficiaries and others concerned with Program implementation. Photographs taken during field visits have also been used as the firsthand source of information to signify and highlight various environmental impacts during construction and operation (see Annex-1). The secondary sources included office documents at PMIU and the Punjab Education Department, webpage and publications of the World Bank, and consultations with the functionaries involved in the Program in any way. Impact characterization methodologies, such as checklists and matrices, have been used for identifying, screening, scoping, assessing, and analyzing the predictable interactions of the Program activities with environmental parameters during both construction and the lifelong school operations. The study has reviewed the Program activities from planning to school operation in terms of their short-, medium-, and long-term environmental impressions as well reversibility
1 The ToR are given in the bid document and the contract signed between proponent and consultant
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 1 characteristics of the impacts.
The districts of Chakwal, Rajanpur, Sheikhupura, Sahiwal, and Okara were selected as prototypes of the three major landform regions of the province, the upper-, the central-, and the lower-Punjab, for ascertaining the baseline environmental profile and evaluating the environmental and social impacts of the Program all across the province. Results of these districts have been extrapolated for rest of the province. Lists of the schools surveyed and the stakeholders / persons interviewed during the study are appended as Annex-2 and Annex-3 respectively.
1.4 The Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program (PESRP) The Punjab Education Sector Reforms Program (PESRP) was launched in 2003 by the Government of Punjab (GoPb) for improving condition of the education sector in the province. According to a situation analysis report of that year, 46.5 percent of the total school age children (5-16 years) were out of schools; primary completion rate was less than 45 percent; and basic facilities (like classrooms, boundary wall, toilets, electricity, and drinking water etc.) were largely missing in public schools. Female enrolment was only 43.8 percent of the overall public sector enrolment 2
To support the PERSP, the World Bank implemented the Punjab Education Sector Project (PESP) from 2009 to 2012. Construction of missing facilities in the schools was one of the subcomponents of the Project.
PERSP II PESRP comes to an end at the close of this fiscal year (FY2011/12). Building on the institutional, administrative, and program foundations laid by PESRP, the provincial government is presently developing its next medium-term multifaceted sectoral reform program for primary and secondary education, the Second Punjab Education Sector Reform Program (PESRP II), which aims to better orient and ratchet up efforts to address the remaining deficiencies in participation, attainment, and achievement outcomes. PESRP II will also support and enable the Roadmap to yield real and sustainable gains in outcomes. To improve outcomes, the main challenge in public education is essentially to improve teacher quality and performance. The teacher is the main instrument for student learning in this context, so many of the sectoral initiatives can affect the child only through the teacher. Improved student learning, in turn, helps retain students in school and attract new children to school. Recognizing that the participation returns from learning gains may take time to materialize, PESRP II also includes initiatives that directly attempt to increase participation at different levels.
Much like the earlier phase of the Program, the Bank plans to launch PESP-II, to support the PERSP-II. The focus of the PERSP-II is not on new infrastructure development, though some small scale civil works may be carried out in the sector at large during the Program implementation period to construct the missing facilities or to rehabilitate/improve the existing school buildings. However none of such construction activities will be included in the PESP-II. Similarly, no land acquisition will be carried out as part of the PESP-II.
2 A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab, 1997-2007, Education Department, GoPb, March 2008
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 2
2. LEGISLATIVE AND REGULATORY OVERVIEW
This section discusses pertinent aspects of the environmental legal framework of Pakistan concerning environmental protection, environmental impact assessment, wildlife and biodiversity, and cultural / archaeological heritage. Relevance of the WB Safeguard Policies to the Program activities has also been reviewed in this section.
2.1 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (PEPA), 1997 is the main environmental law and provides a framework for the management of environmental issues in the country. The envisaged objective of the Act is to provide for the protection, conservation, rehabilitation, and improvement of the environment for the prevention and control of pollution and promotion of sustainable development 3. The Act establishes the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA) as the principal organ of the state for implementing various procedural and substantive provisions of the Act 4. The EPA is empowered to take cognizance of violations and contraventions of the Act, establish the charge, and prosecute the accused before the Environmental Tribunal, which stand established one for each province under the Act. Besides, Pak-EPA can also frame and notify rules and regulations under the Act. The provisions of PEPA override other laws having environmental provisions. Under Section 12 of the Act, no developmental project can be undertaken unless an initial environmental examination (IEE) or an environmental impact assessment (EIA) has been conducted and approval received from either the federal or the respective provincial EPA. Failure to conduct IEE or EIA is an offence punishable with fine, or imprisonment, or both under Section 17 of the Act. The present environmental and social impact assessment of the PESRP has been carried out in consonance with the broad principles of the Act.
2.2 The IEE/EIA Regulations, 2000 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Review of IEE/EIA) Regulations, 2000 enlist the projects requiring an initial environmental examination (IEE) or an environmental impact assessment (EIA) under Schedules I and II, respectively. The Regulations detail procedures concerning issuance of environmental approvals, inspection of premises, and holding of public hearings / consultations. The Regulations also prescribe detailed procedures for filing IEE/EIA for review by the EPA, time limits for completing the review, review fees, and the conditions under which environmental approvals may be granted. The Regulations also authorize the Government to specify environmentally sensitive areas for which an EIA must be filed for any type of project.
2.3 The Punjab Wildlife Act, 1974 The Punjab Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation, and Management) Act, 1974 caters to protection of wildlife resources in the province 5. Besides ensuring an environment conducive for their rearing and propagation, the Act also regulates hunting, poaching, possession, and trade in birds and animals. The Act prescribes penalties for its contraventions. Government can notify and amend lists of protected ecosystems, national parks, wildlife sanctuaries, safari parks, and game reserves. The updated lists of the protected and special areas can be obtained from the National Council for Conservation or alternatively from the Forest and Wildlife Department, Government of Punjab. Annex-4 presents a list of the wildlife species protected under the Act.
3 Preamble to PEPA, 1997 4 Complete text of the PEPA is available at www.epa.gov.pk 5 Full text available at http://punjablaws.gov.pk/laws/290.html (accessed on 13.01.2009)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 3
2.4 Legislation relating to Cultural and Archaeological Heritage
The Antiquities Act, 1975, which is a federal law, provides for protection of cultural resources. Antiquities have been defined as ancient products of human activity, historical sites, sites of archaeological or cultural interest, and national monuments. The Act prohibits new constructions in proximity of the protected antiquities.
The Punjab Special Premises (Preservation) Ordinance, 1985 provides a legal framework for preservation of premises of historical, cultural, archaeological, and architectural value in the province. The Ordinance specifically prohibits implementation of developmental schemes or new constructions within a radius of two hundred feet from notified special premises.
Out of 387 officially notified sites under the Antiquities Act, 149 are in Punjab ( Annex-5 presents a list of notified sites in Punjab province). The number of protected sites notified under the Punjab Special Premises Ordinance is 246 (see Annex-6). Updated lists are available from the office of the Director General, Archaeology Department. Both laws will be applicable to PESRP and the notified areas / sites will constitute negative areas for undertaking construction activities under the Program.
2.5 The World Bank Safeguard Policies The ESMF has also been analyzed against the World Bank Safeguard / Operational Policies, i.e., OP 4.01 (environmental assessment), OP 4.04 (natural habitat), OP 4.36 (forestry), OP 4.09 (pest management), OP 4.11 (cultural property), OP 4.10 (indigenous people), OP 4.12 (involuntary resettlement), OP 4.37 (safety of dams), OP 7.50 (projects in international waters), and OP 7.60 (projects in disputed areas). Tables 2.1 and 2.2 present a summary of applicability of the WB Operational Policies to the PESRP.
Table 2.1: Summary of the Bank’s OPs and their applicability to PESRP
WB Operational Policy Applicability Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01) Triggered Natural Habitats (OP 4.04) Not Triggered Forests (OP 4.36) Not Triggered Pest Management (OP 4.09) Not Triggered Physical Cultural Resources (OP 4.11) Not Triggered Indigenous Peoples (OP 4.10) Not Triggered Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12) Not Triggered Safety of Dams (OP 4.37) Not Triggered Projects on International Waterways (OP 7.5) Not Triggered Projects in Disputed Areas (OP 7.60) Not Triggered
Table 2.2: WB Operational Policies and their relationship to PESRP Activities
Subject Description OP 4.01 Environmental This OP requires environmental assessment (EA) of the Assessment projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable. This OP also categorizes the projects on the basis of type, location, sensitivity, scale of the project, and the nature and magnitude of their potential environmental impacts. On the basis of the above parameters, the PSERP has been classified as Category-B, and the present ESMF has
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 4
been developed in response to this OP. OP 4.04 Natural Habitat The conservation of natural habitats, like other measures that protect and enhance the environment, is essential for long-term sustainable development. Through this OP, the WB therefore supports the protection, maintenance, and rehabilitation of natural habitats and their functions. The program includes limited amount of construction work related to expansion of existing school buildings, provision of missing facilities in the existing schools and construction of buildings for the existing shelter-less schools. None of these activities will affect any of the natural habitats. Therefore, the OP is not triggered. Furthermore, construction activities under the Program will not be carried out in the areas listed in Annex-4. OP 4.36 Forestry The objective of this Safeguard Policy is to assist the WB’s borrowers to harness the potential of forests to reduce poverty in a sustainable manner, integrate forests effectively into sustainable economic development, and protect the vital local and global environmental services and values of forests. As mentioned above, the physical works during the Program will be carried out at the existing facilities, which are in settled areas. Hence, no forest area is likely to be affected, and therefore, this OP is not triggered. Furthermore, construction activities under the Program will not be carried out in the areas listed in Annex-4. OP 4.09 Pest Management Through this OP, the WB supports a strategy that promotes use of biological or environmental control methods and reduces reliance on synthetic chemical pesticides. This OP is not applicable since the Program does not involve any activities relating to agriculture, use of pesticides, fertilizer or other chemical inputs. OP 4.11 Cultural Property The World Bank’s general policy regarding cultural properties is to assist in their preservation, and to seek to avoid their elimination. The PESRP involves civil works at the existing school locations, which are located in settled areas. Hence no cultural property is likely to be affected which may trigger this OP. However, the ESMF includes guidelines, should any such property is discovered during Program activities. Construction activities under the Program will not be carried out in the areas listed in both Annex-5 and Annex-6. OP 4.10 Indigenous People This OP defines the process to be followed if the Program affects the indigenous people (i.e., people having the following characteristics: self-identification as members of a distinct indigenous cultural group and recognition of this identity by others; collective attachment to geographically distinct habitats or ancestral territories in the project area and to the natural resources in these habitats and territories; customary cultural, economic, social, or political institutions that are separate from those of the dominant society and culture; and an indigenous language, often different from the official language of the country or region). Since the Program involves construction works at the existing school facilities/premises, it is unlikely to affect any
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 5
indigenous communities, which may exist in the province. Hence, this OP is unlikely to be triggered. OP 4.12 Involuntary This policy includes safeguards to address and mitigate the Resettlement impoverishment risks (dislocation, asset loss, income loss, and others) associated with the involuntary resettlement. Most of the construction as part of the Program would be carried out within the existing school premises. Furthermore, the Bank’s funds will not be used for any construction activities. Hence, this OP is not triggered. OP 4.37 Safety of Dams The Policy seeks to ensure that appropriate measures are taken and sufficient resources provided for the safety of dams the WB finances. This OP is not applicable since program does not involve any work relating to dam construction. OP 7.50 Projects in This OP defines the procedure to be followed for projects International Water the WB finances that are located on any water body that forms a boundary between, or flows through two or more states. This OP is not applicable since the program does not involve any works on waterways. OP 7.60 Projects in disputed Projects in disputed areas may raise a number of delicate areas problems affecting relations not only between the Bank and its member countries, but also between the borrower and one or more neighboring countries. In order not to prejudice the position of either the Bank or the countries concerned, any dispute over an area in which a proposed project is located is dea lt with at the earliest possible stage. This OP is not applicable, as no disputed areas exist in the province of Punjab.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 6
3. Project Description
This chapter presents the description of the PERSP and PERSP-II, including their strategy and approach, objectives, and various activities. 3.1 PESRP’s Strategy and Approach The PESRP is based on a holistic, sector-wide, and program mode approach 6 of developing well coordinated synergistic activities in a symbiotic environment, because the piecemeal project mode approach had not been successful in the past. The WB and the international development partners also endorsed this strategy 7. Under the program mode framework, the Provincial Government enters into “Terms of Partnership” agreements with the District Governments for providing tied budgetary grants 8, each year. 3.2 Program Objectives The PESRP is designed to address the issues of access, governance, and quality primarily in the public sector education. The Program is based on three major pillars: (i) public finance reforms to increase public spending for education and to ensure fiscal sustainability, (ii) reforms for strengthening devolution and improving the fiduciary environment, and (iii) reforms to improve access, quality and sector governance. Reform pillar-1, relates to allocation of sufficient public finances to meet sectoral needs, pillar-2 aims to facilitate transfer of resources to district governments for improving service delivery and enhancing capacity for monitoring financial flows, and pillar-3 focuses on improving the lot of education in the province 9. 3.3 Program Achievements The PESRP has been instrumental in improving access, quality, and governance in the public sector education system. At the time of initiation of the Program in 2003, the province was registering a low net primary enrollment rate only of 45 percent, which was not compatible with the roadmap of the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) 10 Since its beginning, the Program’s implementation has reckoned uphill trend in the key educational indicators. Resultantly, the net- as well as gross-enrollments for both sexes has increased up to 24 percent 11 . Provision of stipends to girls in the districts with less than 40 percent literacy rate has brought in up to 60 percent increase in enrollment 12 . This has facilitated to narrow down the gender disparity, as the proportion of school girls has gone up from 43 percent in 2003-04 to 46 percent in 2007 13 . The data generated on vital parameters and other progress indicators by the specially designed monitoring mechanism, throughout the province, has helped in making informed decisions over issues concerning recruitment, up gradation of schools, and absenteeism 14 . Some of the key successes of the 15 Program, since its initiation, are as under :
Gross enrollments (Katchi 16 to Matric 17 ) increased by 2.4 million (from 8.8 million in 2003-04 to 11.2 million students in 2007-08), equal to an increase of 24 percent. Net primary enrollments went up from 45 percent in 2002-03 to 62 percent in 2007-08. Proportion of girls’ enrolment in public schools (Grade 1-12), has risen from 43 percent in
6 A program mode approach looks at all input factors affecting a particular sector 7 A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab, 1997-2007, Education Department, GoPb, March 2008 8 Contingent to mutually agreed performance targets and achievements 9 A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab, 1997-2007, Education Department, GoPb, March 2008 10 National Education Census, District Reports – Punjab, Ministry of Education, Islamabad, 2007 11 A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab, 1997-2007, Education Department, Government of the Punjab, 12 PMIU, SMIS Data, 2007 13 Ibid 14 Third Party Validation Report, PESRP, 2007. 15 A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab, 1997-2007, Education Department, Government of the Punjab, 2008 16 The word Katchi in public schools is equivalent kindergarten and or preparatory to admission classes 17 Matric is equal to 10 years of schooling
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 7
2003-04 to 46 percent in 2007. More than 30,000 schools have been provided with missing facilities, such as toilets, boundary walls, and additional classrooms Free textbooks are provided annually to over 11.2 million students from primary to matric (Grade 1-10) Every year, approximately 380,000 schoolgirls receive cash stipends through quarterly disbursements. Effective monitoring system has helped in addressing chronic issue of teachers’ absenteeism to a great extent
3.4 PESP As stated in Chapter 1, the Bank implemented PESP to support PERSP from 2009 to 20011/12. The Project was structured around two components: (i) Component 1 - Program Financing: This component accounted for the large part of the total financing provided by the Bank and DPs. This component included support for the four pillars of PESRP that together helped contribute to the project development objectives; and (ii) Component 2 – Technical Assistance to provide support to strengthen existing capacities for implementation and monitoring of the sector program 3.5 Description of PERSP-II and PESP-II The focus of the new program would be on ‘soft’ interventions such as strengthening the existing school system and service delivery, rather than the infrastructure development. Some small scale civil works may be carried out in the sector at large during the Program implementation period to construct the missing facilities or to rehabilitate/improve the school buildings however the Bank’s funds will not be used for such works and hence will not be included in PESP-II. Similarly, PESP-II will not include any land acquisition or involuntary resettlement.
3.5.1 Higher Level Objectives to Which the Project Contributes PESRP II seeks to increase child school participation, student attainment, and student achievement in the province. PESP II supports the same objectives. The project objectives are also consistent with the objectives of the FY2010–13 Country Partnership Strategy (CPS). The CPS seeks to support Pakistan in addressing some of the major institutional, policy, and financing constraints on its capacity to achieve and sustain high economic growth rates, to manage conflict, and to improve the social indicators and capacity of its population. PESP II directly contributes to implementing the strategy’s fourth pillar of improving human development and social protection, by supporting the provincial government’s reform program which seeks to improve the above stated objectives, via strengthening systems and capacity and improving sector governance and accountability for improved service delivery performance.
3.5.2 Project Development Objectives The project development objective of PESP II is to support the government of Punjab’s efforts to increase child school participation at multiple levels and student achievement under the second phase of its sector reform program, PESRP II.
The participation and attainment aims will be measured by the NER at three levels of schooling (primary: grades 1–5; middle: grades 6–8; and matriculate: grades 9–10) using published official statistics from Pakistan's Social and Living Standards Measurement (PSLM) survey, a large-scale, representative household sample survey conducted by the Federal Bureau of Statistics (FBS), Pakistan’s official statistical organization, which serves as the main data source of the government to measure progress towards the 2015 Millennium Development Goals. According to official documentation (PC-1), FBS plans to conduct PSLM surveys annually for at least the next three years (ending 2014/15), which overlaps with the project period. The PSLM survey has been a longstanding data collection activity of the FBS, and no major issues in survey design and implementation have been reported.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 8
The PDO-level result indicator on student achievement will be measured using annual student assessments designed and administered independently and supported by the proposed project's technical assistance allocation. The assessments will be administered to grade-4 and grade-5 students in a reasonably-sized, representative sample of government schools and publicly-supported low-cost private schools in the province. The baseline assessment is expected to be conducted in the upcoming academic year, 2012–13. Follow-up assessments will be conducted annually through the life of the project.
Project beneficiaries : Project beneficiaries will comprise of all students in government schools and low-cost private schools that are covered by one or more of the initiatives in PESRP II. Information on beneficiaries (gender-wise) will be obtained from the Annual School Census (ASC) which collects information from all government schools annually and other initiative-specific administrative data gathered by PMIU. Information on beneficiaries (gender-wise) in low-cost private schools covered under PESRP II will be obtained from administrative data gathered by PEF. Both PMIU and PEF have had well-functioning administrative data systems under PESRP, and can quickly introduce arrangements to yield any additional data required for accurately and regularly measuring beneficiary counts.
3.5.3 Project Components The proposed project is a US$350 million Specific Investment Credit which will support the design and implementation of PESRP II, over the period FY2012/13–FY2014/15. The project comprises of two components: (1) a results-based component—Component 1—which would finance PESRP II, amounting to US$340 million (97% of the total Credit) and (2) a Technical Assistance (TA) component—Component 2—which would support essential capacity-building initiatives related to PESRP II, amounting to US$10 million (3% of the total Credit).
Under PESRP II, the government plans to take the next evolutionary step and zero in on improving service delivery performance at the school level in order to realize both meaningful and continuing gains in the outcomes of interest. This objective necessarily implies focusing on improving teacher quality and performance given that, in this context in particular, teacher quality and performance are virtually synonymous with school quality and performance. The available evidence clearly suggests serious shortcomings in teacher quality and performance. For example, government school teacher salaries are determined mainly by individual credentials (experience, training, and education), and the student-learning returns to these credentials are limited under the current institutional environment. Furthermore, importantly, government school teacher salaries appear to be largely unrelated to the levels of teacher absence, teacher knowledge, and student achievement. While teachers in government schools tend to be better credentialed and obtain significantly higher salaries than teachers in low-cost private schools, private schools tend to significantly outperform government schools.
From the perspective of public finances, improving teacher quality and performance implies taking measures to increase the efficiency and effectiveness of teacher salaries (which constitute 93% of total recurrent expenditures), as well as taking measures to increase the adequacy, efficiency, and effectiveness of other expenditures formulated to be consistent with the same underlying motivation.
Thus, under PESRP II, teacher quality and performance are expected to be promoted directly and indirectly through a coherent mix of initiatives related to (1) institutional arrangements and functions, (2) resources and support, and (3) monitoring and accountability. The initiatives include:
(a) Formulating and fixing salary (teaching posts) and non salary budgets at the school level, in line with formula that relate the school budget to student enrollment, basic school operational and classroom needs, and appropriate teaching staff levels and types.
(b) Decentralizing administrative and financial management powers to schools (or, where not immediately feasible, to school-proximate levels) for managing school-specific budgets and resources;
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 9
(c) strengthening school councils, their authority to hold schools accountable for performance, and their capacity to respond to emerging school needs;
(d) strengthening objective, transparent, and merit-based recruitment of teachers and introducing a system with a legal framework that ties recruitment, induction, and career advancement to certification and licensing based on objective, merit-based criteria;
(e) strengthening the system of field-based advisory support to teachers at the school and targeting the support at achievement-poor schools;
(f) ensuring the regular collection of credible information on school, teacher, and student performance (e.g., teacher absence, teacher on-task, student achievement) and feeding this information back into the system, to schools, and to a broad range of stakeholders to effect improvements;
(g) starting with teachers in achievement-poor schools and districts, tying teacher compensation more closely to school performance as measured in terms of improvements in student achievement; and
These efforts are designed to directly promote greater school quality, and, through these improvements, retain students in schools and attract new children to school. To more directly promote gains in participation and attainment, initiatives additionally include:
(a) providing tuition-replacement vouchers to children from disadvantaged households in poor urban areas to access low-cost private schools subject to a rigorous quality assurance system and
(b) attendance-tied cash transfers to promote secondary schooling for rural girls in participation-poor districts.
Taken as a whole, the initiatives are formulated to yield returns in the short term in terms of participation, attainment and achievement gains, but also promote well-performing, robust, sustainable institutions and administrative systems that would generate returns over the medium to long term (i.e., PESRP II attempts to achieve an appropriate balance between its short-term "target-reaching" and longer-term "trajectory-changing" objectives). 3.5.4 Institutional and Implementation Arrangements Institutional and implementation arrangements for PESRP II will primarily be identical to the arrangements in place for PESRP. The provincial Planning and Development Board will continue to head the Provincial Program Steering Committee (PSC) for PESRP II, with participation of, among others, Finance and Education/PMIU and its sub departments. PSC will provide overall strategic guidance and enabling support to PESRP II, and serve as a forum for high-level decision making and an interface with the political leadership.
SED/PMIU will be the main implementing agency for PESRP II, with the support of other sub departments. With respect to the project specifically, SED/PMIU will be responsible for (1) coordinating support from and actively communicating with the Bank and other development partners, (2) reporting on monitoring indicators and DLIs, EEPs, and TA on a timely basis, and (3) ensuring that Bank fiduciary and safeguard regulations and requirements are followed. Under PESRP II, PMIU is to be strengthened and refocused to perform its reform implementation and monitoring and evaluation support roles effectively
SED/PMIU will share program implementation and monitoring responsibilities (to differing degrees depending on the subprogram) with the district education administrations which have primary responsibility for public education service delivery and have staff at the district, tehsil, and markaz levels. In addition, school councils have been set up in government schools as a formal mechanism for community and parental engagement in supporting and monitoring government school operations and performance.
The higher levels of the institutional arrangements for program implementation have a relatively
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 10 strong track record of performance. Implementation weaknesses mainly exist with district education administrations and schools, including with school councils. Under PESRP II, the proposed program activities and actions aim to improve the capability, capacity, and performance of district education administrations, schools, and school councils. 3.5.5 Results Monitoring and Evaluation There are three major general monitoring systems under the provincial government that yield information on additional indicators. These systems are the (1) Annual School Census (ASC) conducted by SED/PMIU, (2) school inspections conducted by the Chief Minister's Monitoring Force (a unit which is independent of SED), and (3) student achievement tests conducted by the Punjab Examination Commission (PEC), a sub-department of SED. The ASC is administered annually and captures information in a standardized questionnaire on basic characteristics of schools and teachers and enrollment counts by grade and gender in all government schools. School inspections are carried out monthly and capture information in a standardized questionnaire on the administration of key activities and subprograms and, importantly, on teacher and student presence, in all government schools. Written student achievement tests are administered annually and capture test score data on multiple subjects from grade-5 and grade-8 students. Coverage of government schools in these tests is virtually 100%.
The provincial government has administered the ASC, school inspections, and PEC tests since 1992, 2005, and 2006, respectively. Issues however remain with respect to coverage, regularity, reliability, use, and dissemination of the data. Under PESRP II, the government expects to take specific steps to assess data issues and address them. PESP II supports these actions using DLIs and TA.
PESRP II subprograms will also have their own dedicated monitoring systems, which would provide more detailed information for assessing subprogram implementation progress and performance.18 These dedicated monitoring systems will serve as the source of information on subprogram implementation progress and performance monitoring indicators, including selected relevant Core Indicators, as well as DLIs. In addition, implementation progress and performance of selected subprograms will be assessed through independent validations, and process and impact evaluations. Many of these studies are to be supported by TA. The independent validation studies will also serve as the basis for assessing the achievement of selected DLIs. 3.5.6 Sustainability The likelihood of sustained implementation of PESRP II through and beyond the project implementation period is mainly promoted by four factors. First, the priority and attention given by the political and bureaucratic leadership to public education and addressing the challenges in the sector have been boosted by the recent adoption of the Roadmap. The heightened level of attention bodes well for the introduction and implementation of a well-designed and strongly-backed reform program which underpins the aspirations in the Roadmap.
Second, the government has led the design of PESRP II, with advisory and technical support from the Bank and other development partners. At various stages during the design process, substantive consultations were held with relevant stakeholders, comprising of sub-department officials, district government officials (including district education management), government school teachers, and present and potential beneficiaries (parents and students). The ownership and consensus-building at the design stage are likely to aid in staying on course during program implementation.
Third, during program implementation, the Bank and other development partners intend to support the government in the development and implementation of a system that effectively communicates the reform agenda to and receive feedback from stakeholders, thereby, facilitating broad ownership for sustaining reforms. Such an initiative, of the nature envisaged, has not been undertaken previously.
Fourth, the government is focused primarily on improving service delivery and education outcomes by increasing the efficiency and effectiveness of sector expenditures (where the general view is that
18 The general monitoring systems will capture some identical pieces of information to these dedicated systems, allowing the general monitoring systems to serve as validation tools.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 11 there is considerable slack), and given a tight fiscal situation (which is expected to remain for the foreseeable future) and several legitimate competing demands on scarce public finances. This decision is viewed as sound from both a technical and sustainability standpoint.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 12
4. BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIOECONOMIC PROFILE
This section provides a quick overview of the baseline environmental and social profile of the Program’s geophysical extent i.e., the entire province of Punjab. A map showing geophysical features of the Punjab is placed at the end of this section. 4.1 Geography The province of Punjab having 205,345 sq. km area and a population of 8.90 million 19 is bound on the north by Kashmir, on the east by international border with India, on the south by Sindh province, and on the west by the provinces of Balochistan and Khyber Pakhtunkhwa. The physical coordinates are 29 o.30 ‟N to 31 o.44 ‟N and 73 o.55 ‟E to 76 o.50 ‟E. 4.2 Topography The province of Punjab is predominantly a fertile region along the river valleys. However, sparse deserts can be found in southern part of the province. Owing to its geographical disposition, the province exhibits wide variations of physical, ecological, socio-cultural, and environmental features down from north to south and across from east to west 20 . Topographically, Punjab can be divided into following five landforms 21 :
Upper hilly region Potohar plateau Central plain lands (Doab 22 ) Desert like plains Cholistan and Thal deserts
The upper hilly region is a southward continuation of the Himalaya foothills of Kashmir. High rainfall, coniferous trees, and a cold weather characterize the region. Murree, with an altitude of 2,300 meter 23 , is a popular hill station and a summer resort. The Potohar Plateau, which also includes the Salt Range, is a land of undulating terrain. It lies in between rivers Indus and Jhelum. Besides a number of important archaeological sites, the region is distinguished by diverse wildlife. The central part of the province comprises low-lying floodplains along the rivers. This geographical relief has facilitated large-scale cultivation, development of an extensive irrigation network, construction of roads, railways, and other infrastructure. The general trend of gradient in plains is from north to south and from west to east. The desert like plains present a transition zones between floodplains and the deserts of Cholistan and Thal. Development of surface irrigation, to some extent, has transformed their morphology into irrigable tracts. Thal and Cholistan exhibit true desert features. Cholistan, locally known as Rohi, spans over an area of 16,000 km². It continues into Sindh province under the name “Thar” and into India as “Rajhistan” 24 .
4.3 Geology Approximately 70 percent land area of the province comprises floodplains of Indus Basin. Geologically, lands in the floodplains are lightly mantled with alluvial deposits transported from the Himalaya foothills. The underlying bedrock is composed of Precambrian metamorphic and tertiary consolidated rocks. The overlying alluvium consists of Pleistocene to recent unconsolidated deposits of sand, clay and silt. The formation age of the alluvium also dates from Pleistocene to recent, the
19 Punjab Development Statistics, Government of Punjab, as on 31.12.2007 20 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Protection Department, GoPb, Final Report, 21 Ibid 22 Doab in local language is an area between two rivers 23 Informatory Brochure on Tourism Development Corporation of Punjab on Murree Hills 24 Geography of Punjab, Sang-e-Meel Publication, Lahore, 2007
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 13 latter being predominant near the riverbanks and the former around the central part of the plains 25 . 4.4 Soil Morphology The texture, morphology, and moisture holding capacities of the soils in the province vary from region to region. The surface crust soils are composed of alluvial deposits consisting of silt, clay, sand, and loam. Clay and silt formations occur in discontinuous layers with limited lateral extent. Their thickness is generally less than three meters 26 . Due to rich surface irrigation in the central Punjab, the fertile soils of the floodplains give a good per unit yield 27 .
4.5 Seismology According to the seismic mapping of Pakistan, most parts of the province lie in zone “2A” of the Earthquake Zones Classification of the Uniform Building Code (UBC – 1997) of the United States. This zone is associated with unknown geologic conditions and the earthquake damage is “moderate”. However, earthquakes of magnitude up to five on the Richter scale, which generate ground acceleration up to 0.1g, have been reported for this zone 28 .
4.6 Surface Hydrology The major surface water resources in the province are rivers, canals drawn from the rivers, and some wetlands 29 . The major rivers are Indus and its tributaries (Jehlum, Chenab, Ravi, Sutlej, and Bias). Under the Indus Water Treaty (IWT) 30 , waters of the three eastern rivers (Ravi, Sutlej, and Bias) have been appropriated to India and of the western rivers (Indus, Jehlum, and Chenab) to Pakistan. However, to meet irrigation needs of the command areas of the eastern rivers, waters from the western rivers have been diverted into the eastern rivers through the link canals. The link canals are conduits for water transfer only and are not used for irrigation. However, they help in groundwater recharge. There are 12 such link canals. Structurally, the surface irrigation system comprises major canals, minor canals, branch canals, distributaries, and watercourses upto farm gate 31 .
4.7 Groundwater Availability and quality of groundwater, the depth of water table, and the aquifer recharge rates considerably differ from area to area depending on a number of variables such as amount of precipitation, proximity to surface water channels, and other meteorological factors 32 . About 79 percent area of the province has fresh groundwater 33 . High fluoride content is found in groundwater of the Salt Range 34 . Water table varies from as low as 1 meter in the waterlogged areas to as deep as 90 meters in desert areas 35 . The groundwater is drawn through hand pumps, tubewells, springs, and public water supply schemes. Tables 4.1 to 4.3 present typical groundwater quality of a few selected districts of the province i.e., Rawalpindi (upper Punjab), Sheikhupura (central Punjab), and Bahawalpur (lower Punjab) 36 .
25 Geological Survey of Pakistan < www.gsp.com.pk >, accessed on 07.01. 26 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Department, Punjab, 2008 27 Ibid 28 Ibid 29 Ibid 30 Full text available at official website of Government of Pakistan 31 Office Papers, Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab, 2008 32 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Department, Punjab, 2008 33 Water Quality Status in Pakistan, Pakistan Council of Research in Water Resources, Islamabad, 2003 34 Ibid 35 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Department, Punjab, 2008 36 Subsoil Water Quality Monitoring in 14 Districts of the Punjab, Environment Protection Department, Government of the Punjab, 2003
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 14
4.8 Meteorology, Climate, and Air Quality The general pattern of climate in the upper Punjab is characterized by a relatively higher rainfall (approx. 1000 mm compared to province’s average of 351 mm/annum) 37 , high humidity, low temperatures, and heavy monsoon precipitation. Southern Punjab has a hot and dry climate with low rainfall 38 . Summers are hot with moderate humidity, whilst winters exhibit extreme cold. Spring and autumn seasons are the most pleasant parts of the year. Mean winter temperature (December/January) in the plains and the desert areas range between 8.5°C and 12.5°C. The mean summer temperature remains around 35°C to 39°C with spikes crossing 42°C. The mean of the maximum temperature ranges between 29-30°C and mean of the minimum from 15-16°C 39 . Approximately 50 percent of the average annual rainfall occurs during monsoon in the months of July and August 40 . The past climatic records indicate that rain rich years occurred at a cycle of 15-20 years with intervening dry period 41 .
A joint air quality study of Lahore, Rawalpindi, and Islamabad by the Pak-EPA and the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA), showed that the average suspended particulate matter (SPM) in the study districts was 6.4 times higher than WHO Guideline Values. The levels of sulphur dioxide, carbon monoxide, and oxides of nitrogen also exceeded the acceptable standards in some areas, but the average levels were below the Guideline Values 42 . Another similar study of Gujranwala and Faisalabad also revealed higher concentrations of SPM in the ambient air 43 . However, barring congested urban centers, air quality in rest of the province generally conforms to WHO Guideline Values 44 . A typical urban ambient air quality profile is as depicted in Table 4.4 .45
4.9 Forests, Habitats, and Ecologically Sensitive Areas The forest resources of the province include Coniferous Forests, Scrub Forests, Riverine Bela Forests, Irrigated Plantations, Linear Plantations, and Rangelands 46 .
The existing natural habitat of the province is largely a modified habitat owing to human interventions. Construction of an extensive irrigation network during early 20 th century paved the way for transformation of the Tropical Thorn Forests into agricultural lands. This has led to a changed landscape and loss of wildlife. Nine habitat types have been identified in the province, of which deserts, sub-tropical deciduous, and wetlands are of concern with regard to threat to wildlife 47 . The major habitats along with their geographical areas are as under (Source: Forest Department, Punjab ):
• Coniferous Forests Murree, Kahuta (District Rawalpindi) • Tropical Deciduous Forests Margalla Hills, Mountain Foothills (District Jhelum) • Dry Subtropical Forests Potohar Region, Salt Range (Districts Chakwal, Khushab, Mianwali, Jhelum, Rawalpindi, and DG Khan) • Tropical Thorn Forests Indus Floodplains • Tropical Thorn Forests (Sandy) Cholistan, Thal (Districts Bahawalpur, Rahimyar Khan, Layyah, and Rajanpur) • Irrigated Forest Plantations Modified habitat carved out of Tropical Thorn Forests
37 Punjab Development Statistics, Bureau of Statistics, GoPb, 2007 38 Meteorological Profile of Punjab, Pakistan Meteorology Department, Lahore, 2008 (soft copy) 39 Ibid 40 Ibid 41 Ibid 42 3-Cities Investigation of Air and Water Quality (Lahore, Rawalpindi, Islamabad), JICA/Pak-EPA, 2001 43 2-Cities Investigation of Air and Water Quality (Gujranwala and Faisalabad), JICA/Pak-EPA,2003 44 Air Quality Monitoring in Six Districts of Punjab using Physico-Chemical Techniques, Environment Protection Department, Government of the Punjab, 2005 45 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Department, Punjab, 2008 46 Brief on Punjab Forest Department, Punjab Forestry Research Institute, Faisalabad, 2006 47 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment protection Department, Government of the Punjab, Final Report, 2008
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 15
• Rivers, Wetlands, and Waterlogged Areas throughout the Punjab • Farmlands / Agricultural Areas Throughout the Punjab • Urban parks and open areas in urban centers
In order to preserve the natural habitat, Government has notified 63 ecologically protected areas 48 comprising wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, and the game reserves 51 as listed in Annex-7 .
4.10 Demographic Profile
Punjab is a thickly populated province and has average population density of 358 persons / km 2. The population of the province constitutes 55.6 percent of country’s total population. The population of the province, which was 73.6 million in the 1998 Census, is now crossing 90 million 49 . The average population growth rate is 2.48 percent per annum 50 . With the existing growth rate, the population is expected to double by 2025. Urban population has increased from 31 percent in 1998 to about 36 percent in 2007. Overall sex ratio is 107 males per 100 females. Lahore is the most populated district of the province with population density of 3,566 persons / km 2. Children below fifteen years of age constitute approximately 40 percent of province’s population 51 .
4.11 Land Use / Agricultural Profile Agriculture is the predominant economic activity of 64 percent rural population of the province. About 50 percent of total labor force in the province is employed in agriculture. More than 70 percent cropped area of the Indus Basin is located in Punjab. The principal sources of irrigation are the surface channels supplemented by tubewells. Rainfall accounts only for a small proportion of the irrigation sources. Sericulture, horticulture, and aviculture are gaining popularity. Investments in honeybee- sheep-, goat-, fish-, poultry-, and dairy-farming are also increasing. The major seasonal crops include wheat, rice, maize, sugarcane, and vegetables. Other agricultural products include fodder, fresh vegetables, and lattice 52 . The reported agricultural area of the province is 17.62 million hectares, out of which 71 percent is cultivated and the remaining is uncultivated 53 .
The land use in the Punjab has been exhibiting change from agricultural to residential and built-up structures. Whereas, land use in the urban centers is predominantly of fixed and permanent structures, it is of mixed disposition in the suburbs and along outer rim of the cities, where agricultural lands interpose with new constructions, inhabitations, and farmhouses 54 .
4.12 Healthcare Facilities Punjab has a reasonable network of healthcare services in the public sector ranging from primary to tertiary and even up to specialized healthcare facilities. There is good number of tertiary level healthcare hospitals (teaching) in the province. The Province has 308 hospitals and 1333 dispensaries. Table 4.5 presents status of healthcare facilities in the Punjab. There are more than 59 thousand registered doctors, 45 thousand nurses, 9 thousand lady health visitors, 7 thousand midwives, and 5 hundred dais 55 . The mortality rates in the province are generally higher than the accepted international standards and the health indicators present a dismal status as shown in Table 4.6. On the lines of the PESRP, Government of the Punjab is also implementing a reform program in the health sector - the “Punjab Health Sector Reforms Program” - for improving and upgrading healthcare facilities in the province 56 .
48 WWF Pakistan
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 16
Generally, the awareness amongst the masses about health and personal hygiene is very low. According to the MICS 57 , only 41 percent households use soap to wash their hands before eating and only 55 percent wash their hands adequately after attending toilet. Only 52 percent households are aware of the need for iodized salt.
4.13 Educational Facilities The educational facilities in the province range from primary level masjid-maktab 58 schools up to universities and certain specialized institutions. There is a separate stream of technical and vocational institutions as well as teachers ‟ training colleges. Educational facilities for the disabled children are provided by a separate Department of Special Education 59 . The province has 52,000 primary schools, 7,000 middle schools, 5,000 high schools, and 672 intermediate and degree colleges. More than 25 universities, both in the public and the private sector, are catering for higher education and research 60 . Public sector enrolments at primary level are 5.85 million, at middle level 2.1 million, at high school level 0.85 million, and at college level 0.66 million. The percentage share of Punjab’s enrolments to country’s total enrolments is 27.4 percent for primary, 45.3 percent for middle, 44.9 percent for high, and 65.5 percent for college and the higher grades. Literacy rate in the province has recorded steady uphill trend from 27.4 in 1951 to 55.2 in 2005-06. The combined literacy rate in urban areas is 70.2 with male literacy rate at 78 and female literacy rate at 66. The literacy rate in rural areas is 59 for males and 35 for females 61 .
4.14 Infrastructure Profile There are wide variations in the availability of infrastructure facilities in the urban and rural areas as well as in different regions of the province. Whereas, availability and condition of roads in the cities is 62 fair, it is deplorable in rural areas . As a part of its developmental agenda, the Government is focusing attention on the construction of farm-to-market roads (FMR) in the province and building of infrastructure under the Annual Development Program (ADP) and the Public Sector Development Programs (PSDP). Construction of the roads under various programs has substantially improved agricultural marketing and timely transportation of the farm produce to markets. 4.15 Socioeconomic Profile Punjab is the hub of economic activities in the country. Opportunities exist in business, economic, trade, social, educational, and other business activities. A large section of the population is absorbed in services sector, in the army, and in the civil service 63 . Many are working abroad as expatriates. However, still the majority are absorbed in the agricultural sector. The mean income level of the city residents is higher than their rural counterparts 64 . There are more than 3.5 million registered vehicles in the province, which number is increasing with every passing day 65 . Communication system in the form of regular landlines and mobile telephony is one of the fast growing areas of economy 66 .
4.16 Labor and Employment Country’s labor force is estimated as 43 million, out of which nearly 55.9% is in the Punjab. About 70 percent of Punjab’s labor force is in rural areas and 30 percent in urban areas 67 . Migration of people
57 Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey (MICS), Planning and Development Board, GoPb, 2003 58 Mosque is called “Masjid” in Urdu Language. Maktab is Urdu equivalent of school 59 62 Punjab Development Statistics, Bureau of Statistics, Government of the Punjab, 2007 60 Ibid 61 Ibid 62 Ibid 63 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment protection Department, GoPb, Final Report, 2008 64 Punjab Development Statistics, Bureau of Statistics, Government of the Punjab, 2007 65 Office Papers, Excise and Taxation Department, Government of the Punjab, Lahore 66 Punjab Development Statistics, Bureau of Statistics, Government of the Punjab, 2007 67 Pakistan Economic Survey, Government of Pakistan, Islamabad, 2007
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 17 from rural to urban areas for employment opportunities and better socioeconomic conditions is an unending phenomenon in the province. Growth of urban centers (e.g., development of Lahore as a metropolis), and establishment of industrial estates / enterprises have all contributed towards increased employment opportunities in the province. The number of employed people has doubled in during 1972 to 2002. However, the number of unemployed people has recorded eightfold increase during the same period, mainly because of high population growth rate 68 . Investments in social sectors such as education, health, housing, water and sanitation, agriculture, transport, infrastructure, and communications, etc. have not kept pace with rapidly growing population 69 . The province of Punjab has over 18,000 large and medium industrial units, 59,126 small factories, and 90,995 cottage units, absorbing a total labor force of 62,000 persons 70
4.17 Culture, Religion, and Customs The province of Punjab is rich with magnificent cultural heritage of ancient times and of early Islamic period, reflected through specimens of art, craft, literature, and architect. Bhangra and Luddi are two popular dances. The population predominantly consists of Muslims. Punjabi is the native language and spoken widely, particularly in rural areas. However, other languages like Hindkoh, Balochi, Potohari, and Saraiki are also spoken in certain areas.
People generally respect chadar and chardewari , i.e. they do not mingle with womenfolk publically and stay away from others houses and respectfully wait to be called in or the residents to come out from their houses. A reasonable proportion of womenfolk observe the purdah etiquette, i.e. they remain secluded from outsiders. However, women do participate in almost all sort of social, cultural, economic, educational, and service activities 71 .
Joint family system is generally prevalent in the province, especially in rural area. However, nucleus or small family is fast emerging in metropolis and urban centers because of the socio economic compulsions and attitudinal shifts in the youth.
4.18 Gender Issues Women in Pakistan are among the poorest and the most vulnerable sections of the society. Women’s access and control over productive resources is limited, which ranks Pakistan amongst the highest in the world for maternal and infant mortality rates. Vulnerability of women to discriminatory treatment varies across classes, region, and the urban / rural populations. The 2007 Human Development Report ranks Pakistan at 135 out of 177 countries in terms of human development index and at 107 out of 140 in the gender related index 72 . The dependency and vulnerability rates are estimated to be around 47 percent. However, the actual dependency is believed to be much higher than the official figures because approximately 69 percent population consists of women, children, and the aged who all can be classified as vulnerable. Another reason of dependency is low participation of women in economic activities. Presently, women comprise less than 5 percent of the public sector employees in the province. Those who are employed have limited horizontal mobility and are limited to social sector departments like education and health. Representation of women at the decision making level is only 3 percent 73 .
The Government’s major initiative of empowering the women is the Gender Reform Action Program (GRAP), which is designed to trigger actions that will result in gender mainstreaming. GRAP focuses primarily on institutional change to achieve gender equity 74 .
68 Medium Term Budgetary Framework (2005-10), Planning Commission, Government of Pakistan, Islamabad, 69 Ibid 70 Punjab Industrial Directory, Directorate of Industries, GoPb, 2006 71 Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment protection Department, GoPb, Final Report, 72 Ibid 73 Ibid 74 Ibid
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 18
4.19 Poverty Incidence of poverty in the province is estimated at 32 percent (36 percent urban and 26 percent rural), which is quite high 75 . Despite government’s interventions, poverty is increasing with passage of time. In case of urban areas, poverty is more evident in slums and katchi abadis 76 . The southern Punjab has higher prevalence of poverty compared to central and upper Punjab. The main causes of poverty are traditional agricultural practices, fragmented landholdings, non-availability of safe drinking water and sanitation facilities, low literacy rate, inadequate institutional arrangements for addressing social sector problems, and lack of access to social justice system.
Table 4.1: Groundwater Quality of Rawalpindi District
Parameter Unit WHO Limits Results 1. pH -- 7.0 – 8.5 7.2 2. Odor -- Unobjectionable Odorless 3. Color TCU 5 – 50 Clear 4. Taste -- Unobjectionable Tasteless 5. Turbidity NTU 5 -25 6.2 6. TDS mg/l 500 – 1500 334 7. TSS mg/l -- 8 8. Calcium mg/l -- 41 9. Magnesium mg/l -- 30
10. Hardness (CaCO 3) mg/l 222 11. Chloride mg/l 75 – 200 41 12. Sulphate mg/l 50 – 150 61 13. Nitrate mg/l 500 0.6 14. Fluoride mg/l 1.5 0.25 15. Arsenic mg/l 0.01 0 16. Lead mg/l 10 5.5 17. Total Coliform 0/100 ml -- (Source: Subsoil Water Quality Monitoring Report of the EPA, Punjab )
Table 4.2: Groundwater Quality of Sheikhupura District
Parameter Unit WHO Limits Results 1. pH -- 7.0 – 8.5 7.7 2. Odor -- Unobjectionable Odorless 3. Color TCU 5 – 50 Clear 4. Taste -- Unobjectionable Tasteless 5. Turbidity NTU 5 -25 5
75 Punjab Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper, Planning and Development Board, GoPb, 76 An unplanned housing squatter
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 19
Parameter Unit WHO Limits Results 6. TDS mg/l 500 – 1500 935 7. TSS mg/l -- 9 8. Calcium mg/l -- 73 9. Magnesium mg/l -- 64
10. Hardness (CaCO 3) mg/l 442 11. Chloride mg/l 75 – 200 172 12. Sulphate mg/l 50 – 250 183 13. Nitrate mg/l 500 20 14. Fluoride mg/l 1.5 0.4 15. Arsenic mg/l 0.01 0.003 16. Lead mg/l 10 7 17. Total Coliform 0/100 ml -- (Source: Subsoil Water Quality Monitoring Report of the EPA, Punjab )
Table 4.3: Groundwater Quality of Bahawalpur District
Parameter Unit WHO Limits Results 1. pH -- 7.0 – 8.5 7.5 2. Odor -- Unobjectionable Odorless 3. Color TCU 5 – 50 Clear 4. Taste -- Unobjectionable Tasteless 5. Turbidity NTU 5 -25 5 6. TDS mg/l 500 – 1500 935 7. TSS mg/l -- 9 8. Calcium mg/l -- 73 9. Magnesium mg/l -- 64
10. Hardness (CaCO 3) mg/l 442.5 11. Chloride mg/l 75 – 200 173 12. Sulphate mg/l 50 – 150 183 13. Nitrate mg/l 500 21 14. Fluoride mg/l 1.5 0.4 15. Arsenic mg/l 0.01 0.01 16. Lead mg/l 10 7 17. Total Coliform 0/100 ml -- (Source: Subsoil Water Quality Monitoring Report of the EPA, Punjab )
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 20
Table 4.4: Ambient Air Quality Data of Lahore (1998-2002)
Location Ozone SO 2 CO NO 2 NO x PM 10 Noise Humi (ppb) (ppb) (ppm) (ppb) (ppb) (ug/m 3) (dB) -dity Shadman Chowk 14 16 4 102 353 72-81 25 (commercial area) Shalimar Road 18 6 1 15 20 780 -- -- (residential) Upper Mall 11 2 0.9 18.2 28 312 -- 51 (Residential) Chowk Yateem 7 47 4 111 176 509 82 57 Khana (busy road intersection) WHO Guideline 120 125 200 Values (ug/m 3) CO Carbon Monoxide dB decibel NO x Oxides of Nitrogen NO 2 Nitrogen dioxide ppb parts per billion ppm parts per million PM 10 particulate matter of size less than 10 micrometer 3 SO 2 Sulfur dioxide ug/m microgram per cubic meter (Source: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Data of the EPA, Punjab )
Table 4.5: Number of Public Sector Healthcare Facilities and Bed Strength in Punjab
Facility Number Number of Beds Hospitals 308 34,612 Dispensaries 1,333 1,333 Rural Health Centers (RHC) 295 5,900 Basic Health Units (BHU) 2,456 4,912 T.B. Clinics 41 72 Sub Health Centers (SHC) 454 -- Maternity and Child Health Centers (MCHC) 492 -- (Source: Punjab Development Statistics, 2007 )
Table 4.6: Health Indicator Status in Punjab
Health Indicator Level per thousand Child Mortality (under 5 years) 20 Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) (under 2 years) 115 Infant Mortality Rate (under 1 month) 64 Neonatal Mortality Rate (under 1 week) 73 Maternal Mortality Rate (MMR) 68 Crude Birth Rate (CBR) 40 percent Crude Death Rate (CDR) 12.5 percent (Source: Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, 2008)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 21
Figure 4.1: Map of Punjab Province (Source: Wikipedia)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 22
5. STAKEHOLDERS CONSULTATIONS AND FOCUSSED GROUP MEETINGS
This section is about the stakeholder consultations and the focused group meetings that were held during the study with the objective of understanding public perception about the PESRP, its successes and failures, and learn about bottlenecks in its implementation. Public consultations were also used as a firsthand information source regarding end beneficiaries ‟ expectations from the Program and the social concerns of importance.
5.1 Rationale of Public Consultations Consultation with the stakeholders and the interest groups, having stakes and concerns in an activity, PESRP in this study, is a tool for managing a two-way communication between the sponsors, interest groups, and the beneficiaries. The public consultations during the study were held to know concerns of various actors, beneficiaries and the affectees of the Program activities. It is expected that the information obtained from these consultations and meetings will improve decision-making and build public’s confidence into the Program by actively involving the individuals, groups, organizations, donors, and the governmental agencies that have a stake or interest in the Program. Learning and soliciting views of the stakeholders and other groups is expected to increases Program’s long term viability and a sense of ownership in the Program activities by the interests groups and the beneficiaries. These consultations also helped a lot in formulating Program’s ESMF.
5.2 Identification of Stakeholders and Mode of Consultations In order to identify different stakeholders and to ascertain their perceptions and views over the Program, series of meetings were held in the survey districts with the government functionaries, District Monitoring Teams, School Councils, and Heads of the schools. Apart from one to one discussion, specific concerns relating to environmental and social issues were discussed with those attending the meetings by asking them direct and indirect questions. Informal discussions were also used as an additional information input tool for the requisite information (See Fig. 33). The Environs Team carried out public consultations, stakeholder consultations, and the focused group meetings at the majority of the school sites that were surveyed during the study.
5.3 Objectives of the Stakeholders Consultations The objective of the public consultations and focused group meetings was to learn about those aspects of the environmental and social impacts of the Program that may have remained unearthed during environmental assessment study. Thus, the stakeholders ‟ consultations and public meetings have played a vital role in analyzing environmental and social effects of the Program activities and in ensuring successful implementation of the Program. Under environmental law of the country, public involvement is an essential feature of an environmental assessment, simply because it leads to a better and more acceptable decision-making.
5.4 Stakeholders Consulted The stakeholders and the interest groups that were consulted during the study belonged to the different categories listed below
PESRP functionaries / Proponent Government Functionaries / Education and Environment Donor Agency / World Bank’s Environmental Experts
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 23
District Government Functionaries District Monitoring Teams District Teams of the NLC / Construction Contractor School Councils Heads of the respective school Parents of the schoolchildren Schoolchildren Local NGOs Neighboring residents Local public representatives 5.5 Issues Discussed Some of the issued that were discussed in the focused group meetings and the stakeholder consultations included the following:
The overall objectives of the Program; Expectations of the stakeholders and the interest groups from the Program implementation; Benefits and gains of the Program activities Strategies to achieve gender parity in access to education and effectiveness of motivational stipends for girls Concerns, issues, and views over the Program activities; Likely adverse impacts of the Program on the various components of the environment i.e., physical, biological, and social components; Importance of the likely impacts as viewed by the stakeholders and the interest groups; Possible mitigation measures; and Any particular personal concerns or issues Steps needed to improve outreach of the Program and recommendations for making it successful in realizing its objectives modalities to activate and make School Councils for achieving desired goals Troubleshooting and dispute resolution mechanisms
5.6 Gist of the Outcome of the Public Consultations A summary of the outcome of the public / stakeholders ‟ consultations is presented below.
The majority of the persons and the functionaries, who were consulted appreciated the PESRP and regarded it as a beneficial activity; The majority of the persons consulted and interviewed expressed satisfaction over the extent and scope of the Program activities. However, some were of the view that the facilities being provided are inadequate and not commensurate to actual requirements; The majority of the persons interviewed criticized slow pace of construction activities; Many of the persons criticized the quality of construction work and the quality of the material used for construction;
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 24
Many Heads of Schools expressed concerns over scattered demolition wastes and non removal of construction debris by the construction contractor; Some of the people expressed concerns over syllabus and quality of education; Some of the persons showed concerns over inadequate arrangements for water supply and wastewater drainage; A large number of Heads of schools expressed resentment for having not been involved in the planning and decision making stages, wherein they could have offered more workable and better options; The members of the school councils regarded the Program as beneficial and stated that the Program has been a success in increasing enrolment of the children; Some of the parents expressed concern over the long distance for reaching to schools by their children, particularly girls. Some of the parents expressed concern over safety of their children while travelling to schools located at long distance from their village Some of the parents expressed their unwillingness to send their daughters / girls to a school located in another / neighboring village owing to apprehensions over safety during travelling Some Heads of the schools informed that despite pointing defects in the construction quality, no corrective measures were taken by the contractor By and large, the majority of the individuals that were consulted considered rated the PESRP as a remarkable and outstanding public service Program.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 25
6. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL ASSESSMENT
This section relates to impacts of the Sector activities on physical, biological, and social environment and measures for their mitigations. The likely adverse impacts on various important environmental parameters have been discussed with respect to school design / siting, construction, operation, and printing / distribution textbooks. Necessary mitigation measures for avoiding or rectifying the impacts follow the discussion on impact characterization.
6.1 Impact Assessment Methodology and Mitigation Strategy A simplified Impact Assessment Matrix (Table 6.1) has been used for identification, screening, and characterization of the likely impacts on the physical, biological, and social aspects against a numerical scale from -2 to 0 to +2. The impact mitigation revolves around the following strategy:
Firstly, avoiding the impacts by adopting environmentally compatible school design, construction practices, oversight during operation, and selecting environment friendly materials for textbook printing, as have been given in the environmental and social guidelines; and Secondly, rectifying the impacts by adopting the suggested corrective measures as contained in the guidelines.
Adoption of the mitigation strategy will ensure long-term environmental and social sustainability of the Program. The discussion following hereafter relates only to the significantly adverse impacts in respect of the selected environmental parameters. 6.2 Soil and Lands 6.2.1 Impacts Improper siting of schools and the buildings ‟ design can lead to loss of useful agricultural lands, cutting of trees, and soil and land contamination.
The likely adverse impacts during construction will be associated with excavations, diggings, and tree cutting, particularly in hilly areas. These operations can destabilize the land and may lead to soil erosion and land sliding.
Disposal of the toilet wastewater directly onto adjacent lands, during school operation, can contaminate the land and degrade its quality. Besides being a source of environmental nuisance, stagnation of the wastewater, particularly that applied to land around the school buildings (See Fig. 27), would have serious environmental and health concerns because these wastewater ponds can act as breeding places for disease vectors, source of foul smells, and an aesthetic blight (See Fig. 5 and 6). 6.2.2 Mitigations Select an appropriate site and design the building that will entail no or minimal disturbance to soils and land. Avoid tree cutting and removal of vegetative soil cover during construction. Adopt a sequential or batched excavation technique. Under this technique, only a part of the total area / reach to be excavated, is first dug and backfilled after constructing the requisite structures, followed by the next section and so on. This will ensure prevention of soil erosion / destabilization. Confine the digging only to the specified areas, as per the engineering drawings.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 26
As soon as the construction phase is complete, or near completion, take up generous tree plantation at and around the site. Secure a connection of the toilet wastewater to the local sewerage system. Else, ensure provision and proper functioning of the septic tank. 6.3 Surface Water Quality 6.3.1 Impacts If the design incorporates provision of secure disposal of wastewater, there will be no adverse impacts worth significance.
Direct drawl of large quantities of water from, and drainage / disposal of wastewater during construction operations into, a nearby water body can pollute waters of such a source.
Direct discharge of toilet wastewater into a surface water source, without treatment, during operation phase can deteriorate recipient body’s water quality.
Disposal of the chemical- and ink-laden wastewater from the printing press directly into a receiving water body or indirectly through the local sewerage system can pollute surface water quality. 6.3.2 Mitigations The school design must incorporate wastewater treatment and disposal arrangements. Avoid direct drawl of water from a surface source. Use only minimum essential quantities of water to avoid generation of large quantities of wastewater during construction. Dispose of the construction wastewater through a soaking pit of appropriate capacity, which should be leveled back after completion of construction. Construct septic tanks of appropriate capacities for disposal of toilet wastewater during school operation Select an ISO certified press for printing of textbooks, which does not use toxic chemicals and environmentally harmful inks / paper. Else, local municipal authorities be asked to ensure treatment of wastewater before its discharge into receiving system. 6.4 Groundwater Quality 6.4.1 Impacts Generally, the construction activities, school operations, and printing / distribution of textbooks do not pose significant probability of groundwater contamination. The groundwater quality would be affected only if wastewater succeeds in reaching the groundwater aquifer by some route. The most plausible route will be the hand pump borehole (See Fig. 28). Because of natural soil filtration mechanism, the probability of groundwater contamination from percolation of stagnated wastewater down the earth’s layers is rare.
If the design does not provide separate supply lines for the drinking water and the water for toilets, then the combined supply line can pose higher risks of cross contamination of the drinking water (See Fig. 32). Locating the hand pumps close to toilets will increase vulnerability of contamination (See Fig. 13, 14, 28).
Stagnation of the spilled water around the base of the hand pump can lead to its downward movement along the borehole and therefore likelihood of groundwater contamination, especially during school operation (See Fig. 28).
6.4.2 Mitigations The design should provide separate supply lines for drinking and toilet usage. Any existing system of such a type be stopped forthwith and replaced.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 27
The hand pump borehole should be well secured and sealed off from the exterior by grouting with cement mortar. The slope of the floor platform be outward from the hand pump base. Provide for immediate drain of the spilled water from a hand pump base. Ensure regular laboratory testing of the groundwater / drinking water at the schools for timely detection of contamination. 6.5 Air Quality 6.5.1 Impacts Construction activities can temporarily deteriorate the ambient air quality from localized dust blowing and suspension of fine particulates in the environment. Blowing of dust and prolonged suspension of fine particulates in the ambient environment is a phenomenon associated with movement of vehicles, land excavations, structures ‟ demolition, and onsite stacking of materials. Once in the air, the larger sized particles, under influence of gravity, tend to settle down in the immediate vicinity of the source. The suspended particulate matter (SPM) of the size smaller than 10 micrometer (PM 10 ) tends to remain suspended in the environment for much longer and persistent time and is an environmental hazard. The objectionable impacts of settling of the suspended dust would be its dry deposition on vegetations, glass windows, motor vehicles, buildings, and other exposed surfaces. Exhausts from fossil fuel burning in the construction machinery will also deteriorate local air quality.
Similarly, exhausts from generators at printing press, during electricity shutdown / failure, can also have impacts on air quality in the vicinity. Usage of carriage vehicles for transporting the printed textbooks will also have similar impacts on air quality. Blowing of drag dust from vehicular movement will be another adverse air quality impact associated with distribution / transportation of books. 6.5.2 Mitigations Avoid / control dust blowing from potential sources by shielding them from the exterior. Avoid dust / particulate blowing from stockpiled materials either by sheeting them or by sprinkling them with light shower of water. Select and install only an environment compliant generator. Use only good quality oil, petroleum products, additives, and spares in machinery, generator, and vehicles. Avoid operating the machinery during school hours. Bound the drivers to follow and observe traffic rules and road safety instructions 6.6 Noise and Vibrations 6.6.1 Impacts Generation of noise and vibrations would be of relevance only to construction activities and printing / distribution of textbooks. Noise levels higher than a threshold can produce psychological and social impacts of distracted attention, irritation, and short-temperedness. However, owing to non-cumulative property of sound and vibrations, the impacts are reversible and of significance only during continuation of the noisy activities.
Usage of machinery and steel fabrication activities during construction, particularly during school hours and at nighttime, can produce undesirable noise.
Printing, binding and paper cutting machines at the printing press can also produce noise and vibrations which may be annoying for residents and neighbors.
Movement of vehicles and blowing of pressure horns will be another source of noise and vibrations. 6.6.2 Mitigations Avoid noisy activities and those producing vibrations preferably during school hours. Avoid such activities at nighttimes for avoiding disturbance to the community.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 28
Tune up and maintain the equipment and machinery, and carry out oiling of the noise producing parts of a machine / vehicle. 6.7 Access, Easement, Health and Worksite Safety 6.7.1 Impacts The environmental and social impacts pertaining to rights of access, easement, health and wellbeing, and worksite safety would relate to design, construction, operation, and printing / distribution of textbooks.
Improper and poor design can lead to construction of congested structures with poor ventilation, sunlight, and access, which in turn can produce behavioral and health impacts.
Improper stockpiling of construction materials, scattered demolition wastes, and placement of debris / materials on nearby open spaces and streets can result in blocking of routes and inconvenience for passersby, neighbors, and residents.
Haphazardly placed materials and debris presents higher risks of personal injury and inconvenience to schoolchildren and the staff (See Fig. 20-24, 27).
Non-observance of worksite safety instructions and non-usage of safety gadgets during construction operations can increase vulnerability to adverse health and personal safety impacts.
Choking of sewer line, dysfunction of septic tanks, contamination of drinking water or its source, using the printed papers for placing eatables (particularly of wetting consistency) are all fraught with their consequential health and safety impacts during school operation. 6.7.2 Mitigations The adverse impacts or hazards relating to access, easement, health, and worksite safety can be avoided by taking appropriate preventive steps / measures, such as: Design the buildings as environmentally compatible structures in accordance with the prescribed building code paying due attention to aspects of natural lighting, ventilation, and easement aspects. Design the buildings according to required capacity and in accordance with needs of special children. Avoid haphazard stockpiling of the materials. Allocate a separate place or corner in the premises for storing the materials and the demolition debris. Avoid worksite hazards and accidents by wearing protective clothing / gadgets and by observing standard procedures of carrying out an activity. Watch for drinking water availability and quality, proper working of the septic tank, and disinfection of the water source all during school operation. Educate and aware the schoolchildren not to use the printed papers as receptacles for eatables. Avoid using petroleum based inks and toxic chemicals for textbooks printing Store the printed books in a properly ventilated warehouse. Regularly fumigate the warehouse for preventing growth of termites and worms.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 29
Table 6.1: Simplified Environmental and Social Impact Matrix
Environmental Physi cal Biologi Social and Socioeconomic Components cal
PROGRAM Activities Soil Erosion Soil / Contamination WaterQualitySurface QualityGroundwater Quality Air VegetationNatural Wildlife andAccess Easement Noise and Vibrations Agriculture/ Farming Grazing Livestock Safety and Hazards Public infrastructure Aesthetic Value Eco-systemWetlands Wellbeing and Health Learning Education / Issues Gender Employment / Income Community Empowerment of Land Price Community Participation Archaeological Heritage IssuesCultural Impact on indigenous people Design of missing facilities N -2 -1 0 N N -2 N N N -1 0 -1 N -1 -1 -1 +1 N +1 0 N -1 N
Construction Activities -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 -2 -2 0 0 -2 -1 0 N -1 -1 0 +2 +1 N +1 0 0 N
School Operation -1 -2 -2 0 N N 0 0 N N 0 N N N N +2 +1 +1 +1 N +1 N 0 N
Printing of Textbooks N N N 0 N N N -1 N N -1 N N N -1 +2 N +2 N N N N N N
Distribution of Textbooks N N N -1 N N N -1 N N -1 N N N -1 +2 N +2 N N +1 N N N
Key: -2=High Negative Impact -1=Low Negative Impact 0=insignificant/Negligible impact +1=Low Positive Impact +2=High Positive Impact N=No Impact
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 30
7. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK
This section describes the environmental and social management framework and the environmental guidelines for avoiding and or preventing the adverse environmental and social impacts of the Program activities. Institutional setup for implementing the ESMF, roles and responsibilities of the focal persons, monitoring mechanisms, and training and capacity building programs have also been detailed in this section.
7.1 Institutional Setup for ESMF Implementation Table 7.1 outlines the institutional setup for timely appreciation, identification, reporting of the environmental issues relating to the Program and for taking necessary preventive or corrective measures at various levels of responsibility under the ESMF:
Table 7.1: Organizations and Focal Persons for ESMF Implementation
Organization Focal Person Ro le Jurisdiction Program Monitoring Deputy Director (Planning), Environmental Coordinator Entire and Implementation PMIU (EC) Province Unit (PMIU) Project Officer – Responsible for Entire Environment (Consultant) implementing various Province activities required for safeguard compliance. Office of the District District Monitoring Officer District Environmental Respective Monitoring Officer (DMO) through Monitoring Focal Person (EFP) District and Evaluation Assistants (MEAs)
School Council Head Teacher Environmental Modulator Respective (EM) School
The Deputy Director (Planning), PMIU, Lahore has been designated as the environmental coordinator (EC) at the provincial level for an oversight over the Program activities throughout Punjab. The EC will liaise with GoPb, the WB, and other provincial level organizations and will translate the policy decisions into actionable programs.
The Project Officer- Environment, PMIU, based in Lahore, will be responsible for facilitation of implementation of various activities required for safeguard compliance. The Project Officer- Environment will design and conduct trainings and other capacity building activities for the whole province at Divisional and Provincial Level. Will generate reports and stream line the process to facilitate the timely implementation of the activities.
The DMO will be the designated environmental focal person at district level. He will maintain upward and downward linkages with the PMIU and the field staff respectively for ensuring smooth implementation of the Program and timely appreciation of the environmental and social issues coming in the wake of implementation of the Program. Coordination with other line departments in the district and troubleshooting will also fall in his chartered responsibilities.
The Head Teacher or the School Incharge, designated as environmental modulator, will be responsible for ensuring compliance of the ESMF by the construction contractor during construction activities. He / she will also be the focal person for implementing the ESMF during school operation phase.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 31
All focal persons will maintain close liaison and fast track communication with each other for promptly addressing any issue or problem.
In PESP- I, it was proposed to have short term environment consultant on board which was suppose to facilitate the PMIU to conduct capacity building activities and review of ESMF implementation, However, during the implementation of PESP-I the PMIU management felt that there is a need of long term consultant to facilitate the project as the through this position many areas of the project can be streamlined.
In PESP-II, the Project Officer – Environment is added into the institutional set up of PMIU as a long term consultancy position that will facilitate the project to keep a track and streamline the timely implementation of project. The Project Officer will be responsible to design sustainable activities with the liaison of all the stakeholders and develop time to time reports to view the progress of the project.
Also, it has been viewed that although there were clearly defined responsibilities and roles to be performed by the DMOs, MEAs and Schools Heads but it is seen that in PESP-I implementation there were shortcomings to facilitate and communicate the district personnel to perform their roles and responsibilities. In PESP –II the project anticipate the better institutional strengthening specifically at district and divisional level.
The activities will be designed to implement ESMF in PESP-II by keeping In view the well defined role and responsibilities and participation of districts personnel, school administration and school children to institutionalize the process to improve environment.
The PMIU aims to engage Environmental Focal Persons (DMOs) in district level activities to facilitate implementation of ESMF at school level. The DMOs will be directly observed and directed by the Program Director for these activities.
In addition, the DMOs will manage monthly monitoring of environment activities to be done by MEAs and share the monthly report on the update of ESMF implementation with respect to their concerned district.
7.2 Roles and Responsibilities of the Focal Persons Table 7.2 describes the areas of responsibilities of the designated focal persons. It is important that the responsibility of each focal person be clearly defined. Despite that, there might be some grey areas of overlapping responsibilities falling within the purview of more than one organization / focal person. In such a case, the higher authority or the organization may delegate its functions to the lower tier and retain the overseeing role for itself. The decision made by the higher-level authority will thence take precedence over that of the subordinate.
7.3 The Environmental and Social Guidelines Table 7.3 details the environmental and social guidelines relating to design, construction, and school operation stages as well as to printing and distribution of textbooks. These guidelines are the preventive and corrective actions that will be taken by various persons involved in planning, designing, and implementing the Program. The primary objective of the guidelines is to avoid or lessen the likely damage to environment. The guidelines have been developed to ensure that the identified adverse impacts relating to various environmental parameters are properly addressed either by adopting a preventive or a mitigation strategy. The guidelines also indicate the persons and the agencies for their implementation and thereby ensuring attenuation of the adverse impacts to an acceptable level by adopting suitable administrative and or technical options.
Additional guidelines on environment, health and safety (EHS) are provided in Annex 8 .
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 32
7.4 Internal Compliance Monitoring Compliance to environmental and social guidelines will be effected through an internal compliance monitoring mechanism comprising two parallel channels, as described below.
1. The Head Teacher or the School Incharge, being the designated “Environmental Modulator” will ensure observance of the ESMF guidelines by the construction contractor all during the construction phase. He / she will also be responsible for implementing the ESMF and complying with the guidelines during school operation phase. He / she will send monthly compliance reports to the EFP / DMO.
2. The MEAs of the respective districts will make routine as well as surprise visits of the schools in their operational areas, both during construction and school operation phases. The will submit their monitoring reports on the same proforma.
The EFP / DMO office will process, rearrange, tabulate, and analyze the monitoring reports and will forward the consolidated report of the district to the central database at PMIU in Lahore for further processing and usage for decision-making. The PMIU may seek advice of the environmental consultant, if so required, on any issue or non-conformity surfaced up from these monitoring activities.
7.5 External Compliance Monitoring Environmental monitoring in general term is the systematic collection of data through a series of repetitive measurements. External monitoring is a job of specialized nature and be conducted by a third party (an environmental firm / consultancy). It is, therefore, recommended that the proponent (PD, PESRP) hire the services of a professional environmental consultancy for carrying out this essential and important task. There is a good spectrum of categories and techniques of conducting environmental monitoring. However, the proponent may restrict to the compliance monitoring options only with underlying objective to review the ESMF implementation process, identifying any on ground environmental issues of concern, and forwarding the proposals / mechanisms for addressing them. The primary purpose of the external monitoring will be to see that both construction and the operation phase activities have been undertaken in line with the mitigation strategy of the ESMF. Since, the PESRP is an ongoing continuous program (unlike a project, which has a definitive completion stage), there cannot be a post completion evaluation. It is therefore recommended that external monitoring be undertaken as a regular annual feature.
7.6 Trainings and Capacity Building Table 7.4 presents a tentative framework and a suggested schedule of trainings and capacity building programs. The prime objective of the trainings is to ensure long-term sustenance of the PESRP activities and to keep the Program coordinators, implementers, and the monitoring staff abreast of the emerging issues, troubleshooting strategies, and modern techniques of environmental management and social conflict resolution. The social conflict can best be addressed by bringing the stakeholders on board through persistent motivation and training. The training will also correlate with means of empowering the community, enhancing decision-making capacity of the School Councils, and taking advantage from resources of the NGOs for social conflict resolution.
It is recommended to hold five one-day training workshops at the provincial level each year. Fifteen such workshops will be held during three years of the Program. The district / divisional level officers involved in PESRP implementation will primarily attend these workshops. These workshops will focus on issues of practical nature, environmental as well as social issues, confronted during implementation of the ESMF. Besides, these will also focus on sensitizing the participants about environmental and social stakes of the Program, managing the on-ground problems, and strategizing implementation of the ESMF guidelines. Similarly, nine one- day workshop will be held at the Divisional level every year, in total twenty-seven workshops during three years of the Program will be held. The key players involved in Program’s policy and field implementation will
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 33 attend these workshops, which will focus primarily on policy issues and the troubleshooting mechanisms. The Project Officer – Environment will be responsible to hold these trainings at both Provincial & Divisional Level.
A capacity building activity proposed to create awareness involving DMOs and MEAs will be held on annual basis which will target 51,680 primary and middle schools in the districts of the Punjab in the tree years of the Program, these trainings will basically be held with the help of TOT (Training of Trainer) Approach. The DMOs will be trained at provincial level with the help of illustrative manuals and further each DMO will train their respective team of MEAs which will then approach the School heads and create awareness with the help of the developed manuals. The DMOs and MEAs will be given acknowledgement on the basis of their performance each year for the respective activity.
It is proposed that each year a different manual will be designed to create awareness which covers environment and school management, emergency preparedness plan and gender sensitivity activities. The trainings and awareness activities will be conducted each year which will help the institutional strengthening of the project as maximum stakeholders will be involved for the activity.
It is also proposed that an Environment Monitor can be defined in each school, which will be one of the students. The Environment Monitor will be given a token of acknowledgement from the Program Director – PMIU on their effective role towards improved environment.
The Environmental Focal Persons (DMOs) will conduct awareness activities at district level involving school administration and students and other stakeholders at district level. These activities will include Celebrating Environment Day, conduction of district level exhibitions of student work as outcome of regular environment activities at school level, arrangement of presentations for students with the help of audio visual aids.
Incentive based activities will also be designed under the project to involve the stakeholders and develop their ownership towards the project.
Development of Training Manual In order to make the training efforts meaningful, the PMIU, in consultation with the environmental consultant, will develop comprehensive “Training Manuals” for the participants. Two separate manuals for the Provincial and Divisional workshops will be developed. The training manuals will contain outline of the Program, training methodology, glossary of terms, methodologies for avoiding and correcting environmental and social impacts, tips on observing the guidelines, problem solutions with examples, excerpts of the relevant literature / legislations, and linkages to further sources of information and guidelines. The environmental consultancy will be responsible to review and update the training manuals on annual basis.
Findings of Third Party Validation- PESP-I
PMIU will incorporate and address the findings of Third Party Validation of PESP-I in PESP–II project. It is anticipated that the TPV will produce fruitful results for better implementation and facilitation of the project and will help the project to overcome the weak areas in institutional arrangement, facilitation of project at District, Provincial and Divisional Level and to engage the main stakeholders in a more effective way. 7.7 ESMF Costs The ESMF implementation involves two broad categories of costs:
(a) Training and capacity building costs; and (b) External monitoring costs
The estimated cost of ESMF implementation for duration of three years is about Pak Rupees 23 million. The detailed budget is explained in Table 7.5 .
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 34
Table 7.2: Environmental Focal Persons and their Areas of Responsibility
Focal Person / Areas of Environmental Responsibility Organization Environmental Coordinate the pre-design-, planning-, and funding-stages of the PROGRAM Coordinator Incorporating ESMF Guidelines into contract agreement (EC) / PMIU Coordinate capacity building and training activities Act as an arbiter or dispute resolution in case of difference on an issue Project Officer Call for compliance reports from districts and update the provincial database. – Environment Facilitate the Implementation of ESMF at entire province. Conduct Provincial and Divisional Trainings Designing of Manuals and Modules for Capacity Building and Awareness Activities. Facilitation of Monitoring Process.
District Ensure effective compliance of the ESMF at district level Environmental Receive environmental compliance reports from schools and forward them to Focal Person EC (EFP) / DMO Compile the monitoring checklists filled up by the MEAs and forward tabulated data to PMIU Dispute resolution authority for the district Coordinate district level capacity building and training activities Monitoring and Carryout periodic and surprise inspection of the school in his beat Evaluation Fill up the prescribed environmental compliance and monitoring proformas / Assistants checklists and report non-compliance / any deviation (MEAs) / DMO Submit the filled up proformas to the EFP/DMO Pass on instructions of the EFP/DMO to the School Incharge and the construction contractor Environmental Ensure that construction stage guidelines are complied with by the contractor Modulator / and report deviations to EFP School Liaise between the contractor and the local community Department Safe removal / reuse of demolition debris Forward filled up monitoring proformas / checklists to the EFP during both construction and school operation Implement the ESMF guidelines relating to school operation e.g., ensure proper working of the septic tank, fill up and forward operation stage proformas to DMO Arrange awareness programs and activities at the school such as essay competitions, painting competitions, and formulation of an environmental club or group of the schoolchildren Construction Follow and observe the construction stage guidelines Contractor Comply with instructions and directions given by the EFP/DMO and the School Head
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 35
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Table 7.3: ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING GUIDELINES
A) Design and Planning Stage
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Design Aspects: Design Engineer / (1) Building’s Design and Layout should: Architect (a) not infringe easement rights of the neighbours (b) have architectural features in conformity to general landscape of the area (c) cater for required capacity of approximately 5-6 m 3 space per child PMIU (d) be in consonance with local climatic, environmental, and meteorological conditions (e) prefer local construction materials Dy. DEO / Head (f) incorporate proper ventilation and provision of sunshine, air movement, and maximum usage of the Teacher Concerned daylight
(g) cater for requirements of special children (children with disabilities), e.g., provision of wheelchair-ramp, side rails along stairs, and studded floors for blinds, where needed (h) incorporate toilet facilities separate for boys and girls (j) make provision for drainage of the spilled water away from hand pump borehole by providing a concrete platform (k) provide for floor platform of the hand pump with a slope so that water does not stay (l) provide safe access by having culverts on watercourses or ditches on school route (m) provide for internal footpaths and or pavements to ensure all weather access (n) provide hand washing arrangement outside lavatories and display instructions for washing hands after attending toilet (o) provide for toilet wastewater's outlet connection to the nearest sewer / wastewater-draining channel. It should not open to the ground outside (see Fig. 13 and 14). If public sewer system not available, a septic tank of adequate capacity be included in the design (p) be in accordance with the applicable building code (q) provide for availability of safe drinking water at convenient locations in the premises
(2) The Architectural Layout should not:
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 36
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
(a) place toilets close to the classroom block (b) place the toilets at such a location wherein the general wind direction is from toilets towards classrooms (c) place toilets near to drinking water source (d) allow hanging electricity wiring (prefer concealed wiring) (e) place electricity switches and panels within reach of toddlers
(3) Do not install electricity poles in the middle of playground or school compound
(4) No high voltage electric lines be passing over the school premises (see Fig. 1)
B) Construction Stage
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Air Quality Concerns Construction Contractor (1) Carryout dust and emission producing activities (Operating machinery, loading/offloading materials) preferably after school hours to minimize exposure to schoolchildren (2) Keep machinery and vehicles adequately tuned up and well serviced School Incharge (3) Use only new and unadulterated fuels and lubricants. Do not use spent oil (4) Avoid operating machinery and equipment in windy conditions (5) Cover loose materials (e.g., sand, soil) with canvas/plastic sheets while stacked onsite or transporting on a vehicle. If sheeting is not possible, then lightly sprinkle the surface with water (6) Instruct the vehicle drivers to lower down the speed on earthen and narrow rural roads and road bends to reduce blowing of drag dust (7) Obscure and isolate the active construction zone by vertical shields / blinds
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 37
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Water and Wastewater Construction contractor (1) Do not draw water from a shared community water source without consent of the community (2) Dispose of the wastewater by draining into the nearby drain or through a soaking pit (3) Avoid throwing liquids/chemicals/paints into nearby water bodies or on land (4) Avoid washing machinery, vehicles, construction implements in nearby surface waters (5) Wastewater pipeline from toilets and lavatories be buried and well secured into the ground to avoid its damage by vehicles, animals, and miscreants (6) Provide containment structures or water diverting barriers in front of low lying rooms
Noise Pollution Construction Contractor (1) Operate noise producing construction machinery preferably after school hours (2) Avoid operating construction machinery at night time (3) Carryout fabrication and loading /unloading activities preferably after school hours School Incharge
Public Utilities Construction Contractor (1) Carryout excavations / diggings after referring the local utilities layout map (2) Devise a standard operating procedure for dealing with accidental damage to utilities along with an immediate restoration plan (3) Relocation of any public utility or facility be carried out well ahead of start of construction
Cultural and Archaeological Heritage Design Engineer (1) Avoid wastewater drainage to a nearby cultural and heritage site, if any (2) Avoid dumping of waste materials near to such sites or even at places which are objected to by the community (3) discovery of a site of historical, cultural, or archaeological importance be reported to concerned authority / Construction Contractor archaeology department (Refer to Annex-5 and Annex-6 for finding a nearby notified historical site)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 38
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Social Environment / Worksite Safety Construction contractor (1) Make working staff aware of risks of personal injuries and the ways of avoiding (e.g., wearing helmets, dust masks, earmuffs, safety goggles, gloves, etc.) (2) Keep a first-aid box handy at the construction site (3) The Site supervisor should know the standard operating procedures (4) Keep schoolchildren off the active construction spots (5) Use indicative signage and warning boards (6) Stockpile the waste materials at a single spot preferably on one side the premises (see Fig. 1,8,9,18,20-24,26) (7) Reuse the demolition waste, debris, and excess soil for filling depressions and for making pavements etc. (8) Do not leave the excavated foundations unfilled for long periods (9) Pay wages according to Government’s notified minimum wage rates (10) Pay same wages to women as to men for equal hours of work (11) Avoid child labour (12) Keep fire fighting arrangements ready at the site (13) Do not allow cigarette smoking and lighting of fire near work places and near inflammable materials (14) Store the ignitable and inflammable materials separately and at a safe place away from any source fire
Ecological Environment and Habitat (1) Avoid undertaking construction activities in notified ecologically sensitive and protected areas listed in Annex-7 (2) Avoid disturbance or damage to protected wildlife as listed in Annex-4
C) Operation Stage
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Water and Wastewater School Incharge (1) Install water storage tank of at least 4 hours supply, based on consumption pattern/needs (2) Carryout periodic cleaning and disinfection of storage tank, at least after every 6 months
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 39
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
(3) Use Health Department’s recommended disinfectants only (4) Carryout regular and periodic laboratory testing of groundwater/drinking water quality (5) Install water filters, if required on the basis laboratory testing (6) Prefer source disinfection, wherever feasible (7) ensure proper working of the septic tank (8) Ensure regular cleaning and removal of grit from the drainage line (9) Display instructions at prominent places, particularly near the lavatories and water points, requesting the schoolchildren not to throw any solid article and paper into the wastewater drains or closets (10) Prevent flow of wastewater towards drinking water source (hand pump) in case of damage or leakage of the effluent pipeline (11) Keep an emergency plan handy for dealing with an emergency
Air Quality, Aesthetics, and Landscape School Incharge (1) Sweep the floors after light sprinkling with water (2) Carryout soaked cloth mopping of the furniture and other articles (3) Liaise with the Forest Department for obtaining and planting trees and vegetative cover during each plantation season. Protect saplings by observing the recommended watering schedule and trimming (4) Keep the fire fighting arrangements handy (5) Periodically check for adequacy of the fire fighting arrangements (6) Educate and make schoolchildren aware of dealing with emergency (7) Keep the stove, heater, and or other similar articles out of reach of children (8) Avoid open burning of solid waste in the school (9) Do not store any ignitable or inflammable material in the school (10) Display telephone numbers of the local rescue agency at prominent places
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 40
Environmental and Social Management Framework
D. Printing and Distribution of Textbooks
Environmental Guidelines Responsibility
Printing and Distribution of Textbooks PMIU (1) Prefer: (a) an ISO 14000 / 14001:2004 certified printing press (b) recycled paper over virgin paper Punjab Textbook Board (c) at least 50 percent printing on recycled paper (d) paper made from farmed trees and renewable forests over the paper manufactured from natural forests (e) paper manufactured by an ISO 14000 certified company (f) paper which is easy to reuse/recycle
(2) Ensure that the printer does not use: (a) petroleum based inks (b) that comes off on hands (spoils hands)
(3) Do not store textbooks at a damp and dark place that may lead to growth of termite and worms (4) Avoid adverse environmental impacts by regularly fumigating the warehouses against termites and worms (5) Provide adequate ventilation of the warehouses (6) Educate the schoolchildren in avoiding to use printed paper for using as plates for placing eatables, particularly oily, wet, and semisolid consistency; and never chew any printed paper
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 41
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Table 7.4: Tentative Framework of the Training Program
Module Contents Location Frequency Participation Divisional Environmental and social In each Nine District Trainings sensitivity and issues of Division Trainings Government developmental activities each Year departments Management of dealing with the environmental issues and Flood/ Program’s mitigation strategies implementation, Implementation Earthquake monitoring, requirements of the ESMF Prone budgeting, and Documentation procedures Districts key Understanding and stakeholders addressing the social issues in communities DMOs/MEAs Gender Sensitization Head Teachers
Contractor
Provincial At the PMIU Five Annual Key Trainings Environment and risk (Provincial Trainings Stakeholders of management Level) Program’s Environmental best implementation practices and monitoring Environmental parameter monitoring and reporting Gender disparities and strategies for empowering women
Disaster Preparedness
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 42
Environmental and Social Management Framework
Table 7.5: Tentative ESMF Implementation Costs (for Three Years)
Activity Items QTY Cost (million Rs.) Provincial Stationary 15 Trainings in 1.50 Trainings (Writing Pads, Three Years (5 Chart Papers, Trainings Markers, Pens, Annually) Printing, Folders) Refreshments 750 Participants 0.5 (50 participants in each training) Transportation 0.5 Cost Logistics 0.5 (Generator, Multimedia, etc) Divisional Stationary 27 Trainings in 0.5 Trainings (Writing Pads, Three Years (9 Chart Papers, Trainings Markers, Pens, Annually) Photocopy of Material, Folders) Refreshment 1350 Participants 0.7 (50 participants in each training) Transportation 0.5 Cost Logistics 0.5 (Generator, Multimedia, etc) Tree Plantation Plants for Middle 50,000 plants in 0.5 & Primary 51, 680 schools Schools Environment Awareness Manual/ Brochure 15.0 Campaign Manual Publishing + Campaign Development + Student / Teacher Incentive + Environment Monitor Incentive Third Party 3 (one each year) 2.0 Validation Total 22.7
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 43
References
REFERENCES
1. A Report on Educational Scenario of Punjab 1997-2007, Education Department, Government of the Punjab, 2008 2. Biodiversity Action Plan for Pakistan, Government of Pakistan, IUCN I& WWF, 2000 3. Brief on Punjab Forest Department (PFD), Punjab Forestry Research Institute, Faisalabad, 2006 4. Brief Introduction to the Punjab Health Sector Reforms PROGRAM, PROGRAM Monitoring and Implementation Unit (PMIU), Government of the Punjab, 2008 5. Economic Survey of Pakistan, Planning Commission, Government of Pakistan, Islamabad 2007-08 6. Environmental Assessment Guidelines of the Asian Development Bank, Environment Division, Office of Environment and Social Development, 2003 7. Environmental Assessment in Practice, D. Owen Harrop, and J. Ashley Nixon, 1999 8. Environmental Encyclopaedia (2 nd Edition), William P Cunningham, and Terence H Cooper 9. Environmental Guidelines for Selected Infrastructure Projects, Office of the Environment, Asian Development Bank, 1993 10. Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines, Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Housing & Works (Environment & Urban Affairs Division 1986 11. Forestry Statistics of Pakistan, Pakistan Forest Institute, Peshawar, 2004 12. Geography of Punjab, Dr. Muhammad Nawaz, Sang e Meel Publications, Lahore, 2006 13. Guidance for Implementing the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Process, Central Environmental Authority, Ministry of Forestry & Environment, Government of Sri Lanka 14. Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment - Principles & Procedures, Process, Practice and Prospects, John Glasson, 1997 15. Management of Air Pollution in Punjab, Environmental Protection Department Laboratories, Government of Punjab 16. Medium Term Budgetary Framework (MTBF), Planning and Development Department, Government of the Punjab, 2008-2010 17. Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey (MICS), Planning and Development Board, Government of the Punjab, 2003 18. National Education Census, District Reports – Punjab, Ministry of Education, Government of Pakistan, Islamabad, 2007 19. National Environmental Conservation strategy, Government of Pakistan, 1992 20. Pakistan Environmental Assessment Procedures, Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency, Islamabad, 1997 21. Pakistan Environmental Laws & their compliance, Dr. Shoaib Qadir & Athar Rafiq Dogar, Lahore Law Times Publications 2003 22. Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 23. Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency, Review of IEE / EIA Regulations 2000 24. Pakistan Standards – Drinking Water (2 nd Revision), Pakistan Standards & Quality Control Authority 25. Pakistan Strategic Country Environmental Assessment, South Asia Environment and Social unit, the World Bank, 2006 26. Papers, Notes, and Handouts provided by the Environmentalists of the World Bank Office, Islamabad
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 44
References
27. Policy & Procedure for the Filing, Review, & Approval of Environmental Assessment Guidelines 1997 28. Punjab Development Statistics 2007, Bureau of Statistics, Government of Punjab 29. Punjab Industrial Directory, Directorate of Industries, Industries Department, Government of the Punjab, 2006 30. Punjab Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper, Planning and Development Board, GoPb, 2003 31. Punjab Sustainable Development Strategy, Environment Protection Department, Government of the Punjab, Final Report, 2008 32. Statistical Pocket Book of the Punjab 2007, Bureau of Statistics, Government of Punjab 33. Subsoil Water Quality Monitoring in 14 Districts of the Punjab, Provincial Task Force on Subsoil Water, Environment Protection Department, Government of Punjab, 2003 34. Third Party Validation Report, PESRP, PMIU, 2007 35. Various Documents and Files of the Punjab Education Sector Reforms PROGRAM, Lahore 36. Water Quality Status in Pakistan, Pakistan Council of Research in Water Resources, Ministry of Science & Technology, Government of Pakistan, Islamabad 2003 37. Websites of the World Bank, Asian Development Bank, Planning Commission, Government of Pakistan, Government of the Punjab, District Government, and the Punjab Education Sector Reforms PROGRAM 38. World Bank – Environmental Guidelines, Environment Department, World Bank 1988 39. World Bank Operational Policy 4.01, Environment Department, World Bank
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 45
References
Annex-1 Photographs of the Schools Surveyed during the Study
Fig.1 Haphazardly scattered construction and the high-tension wires passing over the school compound
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 46
References
Fig.2 a poorly designed toilet block and disorderly placed debris
Fig.3 A poorly accessible school site
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 47
References
Fig.4 A watercourse intercepting the access to school without a safe crossing over
Fig.5 Littering of debris along inside of the boundary wall. The hand pump water may be unsafe due to wastewater ponding outside
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 48
References
Fig.6 Ponding of wastewater along outer side of the boundary wall. The toilet water also drains into the pond
Fig.7 An inadequately accessible school
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 49
References
Fig.8 Disorderly and scattered construction material
Fig.9 Sand and bricks scattered throughout the school compound
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 50
References
Fig.10 Children sitting on bare ground without any mats etc.
Fig.11 Bricks stacked in orderly manner in the back lane
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 51
References
Fig.12 Good-looking toilets with surroundings cleared of debris
Fig.13 An open wasteline prone to damage by wandering animals
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 52
References
Fig.14 Toilet waste opening direct onto the ground
Fig.15 Selected site appears to have sodic characteristics
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 53
References
Fig.16 A brick lined footpath provides an all weather access
Fig.17 structure dismantled but ground surface not restored
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 54
References
Fig.18 Debris stacked in the centre of the school ground
Fig.19 A soil-surfaced road is not an all weather access to school
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 55
References
Fig.20 an under construction portion with littered debris
Fig.21 Scattered debris impeding access to the toilets
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 56
References
Fig.22 Another view of the scattered demolition material
Fig.23 Construction waste lying un-cleared on the ground
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 57
References
Fig.24 A view of un-cleared construction-demolition materials
Fig.25 Patchwork objected to by the School’s Headmaster
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 58
References
Fig.26 Sand not removed even after completion of construction
Fig.27 An uncovered wastewater pit in the centre of playground
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 59
References
Fig.28 Waste lying near the handpump and stagnated spill water
Fig.29 Separate toilets for Girls and Boys. Stairs grill missing
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 60
References
Fig.30 Incomplete boundary wall with openings for animal entry
Fig.31 Rainfall has rendered access to the school difficult
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 61
References
Fig.32 Drinking water tap sharing water source with toilets
Fig.33 Public Consultation with School Council and Notables
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 62
References
Annex-2 List of Schools Surveyed during the Study
A) District Rajanpur Sr. No. School Name 1. GPS Sher Jan No. 2, Rojhan 2. GPS Shamsabad, Rojhan 3. GGPS Pir Bakhsh Lanjwani, Rojhan 4. GPS Basti Gadi, Rojhan 5. GPS Madh Machi, Rajanpur 6. GPS Chah Hassanwala, Rajanpur 7. GGPS Basti Soheen, Rajanpur 8. Govt. Middle School, Jampur 9. GGPS Rindwala, Jampur 10. GPS Rindwala, Jampur 11. GGPS Hameedwala, Jampur 12. GPS Hameedwala, Jampur
B) District Chakwal Sr. No. School Name 1. GES Bhagwal, Chakwal 2. GES Munday, Chakwal 3. GGPS Haral, Choa Saidan Shah 4. GHS Shahpur Syedan, Chakwal 5. GPS Chak Jharrey, Chakwal 6. GPS Chanwal, Chakwal 7. GGPS Haral, Chakwal 8. GPS Sara, Chakwal
C) District Sheikhupura Sr. No. School Name 1. GGPS Qila Maseeta, Muridke 2. GPS Qila Bhattianwala, Muridke 3. GGES Daoke, Muridke 4. GHSS for Boys, Muridke 5. GES No. 2 for Boys, Muridke 6. GHS Kharian Wala, Sheikhupura
7. GHSS Comprehensive, Sheikhupura
D) District Okara Sr. No. School Name 1. GGPS Chak 55/2-L, Okara 2. GGES Siddique Nagar, Okara
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 63
References
C) District Sahiwal Sr. No. School Name 1. GPS Chak 54/4-R, Sahiwal 2. GPS Chak 54/5-L, Sahiwal 3. GHSS Chak 56/5-L, Qadirabad, Sahiwal
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 64
References
Annex-3
List of the Persons Interviewed during the Study
Sr. Name or Designation
1. Dr. Javaid Afzal,
Environment Specialist,
The World Bank, Islamabad
2. Mr. Muhammad Omar Khalid,
Environment Specialist,
The World Bank, Islamabad
3. The Secretary,
Government of the Punjab,
School Education Department
4. The Secretary,
Government of the Punjab,
Environment Protection Department
5. The PROGRAM Director,
Punjab Education Sector Reforms PROGRAM,
PMIU, Lahore
6. The Deputy PROGRAM Director,
Punjab Education Sector Reforms PROGRAM,
7. The District Coordination Officer, Jehlum
8. The District Coordination Officer, Sheikhupura
9. The EDO (F&P), Dera Ghazi Khan
10. The EDO (Education), Sahiwal
11. The EDO (Education), Sheikhupura
12. The EDO (Education), Rajanpur
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 65
References
13. The EDO (Education), Chakwal
14. The District Monitoring Officer, Sheikhupura
15. The District Monitoring Officer, Rajanpur
16. The District Monitoring Officer, Chakwal
17. The District Monitoring Officer, Sahiwal
18. The District Monitoring Officer, Okara
19. The Deputy District Education Officer, Muridke
20. The Deputy District Education Officer, Okara
21. The Deputy District Education Officer, Sahiwal
22. The Deputy District Education Officer, Rajanpur
23. Incharge, NLC Sub Office, Rajanpur
24. Incharge, NLC Sub Office, Chakwal
25. Director (Legal & Enforcement),
Environment Protection Department,
Government of the Punjab, Lahore
26. Deputy Director (Environmental Impact Assessment),
Environment Protection Agency,
Government of the Punjab, Lahore
27. Monitoring and Evaluation officers of districts Rajanpur, Chakwal, Sheikhupura, Sahiwal, and Okara
28. Heads of all the Schools visited during the course of the study
29. Chairpersons and Members,
School Councils of districts Rajanpur, Chakwal, Sheikhupura, Sahiwal, and Okara
30. Parents of the schoolchildren
31. Schoolchildren studying and present in the schools at the time of visiting the schools
32. Local NGOs
33. Neighbouring residents
34. Local public representatives
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 66
References
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 67
References
Annex-4
Wild Birds and Animals Protected under the Punjab Wildlife Act, 1974
A. BIRDS
1. Following species of Ducks:
1) Lesser Whistling Teal, Dendrocygna Javanica. 2) Greater Whistling Teal, Dendrocygna bicolor. 3) Common Shelduck, Tadorna tadorna. 4) Marbled Teal, Anas angustirostra. 5) Baikal Teal, Anas formosa. 6) Falcated Teal, Anas falcata. 7) Golden Eyed Duck, Bucephala clangula. 8) Long Tailed Duck, Clangula hyemalis. 9) Smew, Mergue albellus. 10) Nukhta or Comb Duck, Sarkindiornis melanotos. 11) Goosander, Mergus merganser. 12) Red Breasted Merganser, Mergus serrator. 13) Spotbilled Duck, Anas pocilorhyncha. 14) White Headed or Stiff tailed Duck, Oxyura leucocephala.
2. All Swans of the genus cygnus including Mute Swans, whooper and Bewicks swans
3. Grey Leg Geese, Anser anser
4. Artic crane.
5. All Pelicans of the genus pelecanus including rosy, Dalmation and Spotted billed pelicans
6. All Egrets, Herons, Night Herons and Bitterns of the family of Ardeidae including Purple and Grey herons, Little Chestnut and Common Bitterns, Cattle Egrets, Large Egrets
7. All Storks of the family Ciconidae including painted, Black Necked, White and Black and White Necked Storks
8. All Ibises and Spoonbills including the Glossy Ibis, White Ibis and Spoonbill
9. All Flamingoes of the genus phoenicopterus
10. All Hill Pheasants including the Kalij, Kekiass-Cheer, Impeyan and Western Horned Tragopan.
11. Button Quail, Trunix tanki.
12. Little Bustard Quail, Turning sylvatica
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 68
References
13. Following species of Plovers, Stone-Curlews Waders, Water Birds and Gallinules:
1) Water Rail, Rallus aquatious. 2) White Breasted Waterhen, Amaurornis phoenicurus. 3) Water Cock, Gallicrex cinerea. 4) Pheasant Tailed Jacana, Hydrophasianus chirurgus. 5) Sociable Lapwing, Vanellus gregariues 6) Green plover or Peewit, Vanellus vanellus. 7) Yellow-wattled Lapwing, Vanellus malabaricus. 8) Solitary Snipe, Capella solitaria. 9) Painted Snipe, Rostratula benghalensis. 10) Wood Cock, Scolopox rusticola. 11) Avocet, Recurvirostra, avosetta. 12) Great Stone Plover, Esacus magnirostris. 13) Cream coloured courser, Cursorius cursor.
14 Following species of Sandgrouse, Bustards and Doves:
1) Large pintail Sandgrouses, Ptercocles alchata. 2) Great Indian Bustard, Choriotis nigricepes. 3) Little Bustard, Otis tetrax. 4) Indian Sangrouse, Pterocles exustus. 5) Close Barred or painted, Sandgrouse Pterocle indicus. 6) Red turtle Dove, Streptopelia tranquebarica. 7) Spotted Dove, Streptopelia chinensis. 8) Wedge Tailed Green pigeon, Trerion sphenura, 9) Ruff, Reaf, Jukkari (wood cock) Scolopax Rusticola
15. Following birds of prey:
1) Eagles, Vultures, Kites. 2) Common Starling and Rosy Starling
B. MAMMALS
1. The Black Bear–Selenarctos thibetanus.
2. Leopard or panther–Pantherx pardus.
3. Leopard Cat–Folis benghalsnsis.
4. Desert Cat–Felis libyca.
5. Caracal–Felis caracal.
6. Himalayan Palm Civet–Paguma larvata.
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 69
References
7. Small Indian Civet–Viverricula Indica.
8. Yellow-Throated Marten–Martes Flavigula.
9. Ratel or Honey Badger–Mellivora capensis.
10. Smooth Coated Otter–Lutra prespicillata.
11. Striped Hyaena–Hyaena hyaena.
12. Rhesus Monkey–Macaca mulatta.
13. Hill Fox–Vulpes Vulpes griffithi.
14. Barking Deer–Muntiacus muntjac.
15. Hog Deer–Axisporcinus.
16. Chittal or Spotted Deer–Axis Axis.
17. Chinkara Gazelle–Gazella Gazella.
18. Black Buck–Antelope cervicapra.
19. Goral–Naemorhedus goral.
20. Indus Dolphin–Platanista indi
21. All monitor Lizards of the Genus Varanus and Spiny tailed lizards of the Genus Uromastyx.
22. All Snakes of the family colubridac containing non-poisonous and beneficial rattle Snakes and the Genus Python
23. All Crocodiles including Mugger, Crocodilus palustris and the fish Eating Crocodile, Gavialis gangeticus
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 70
References
Annex-5
Sites Protected under the Antiquities Act, 1975
Attock District
1. Lala Rukh’s Tomb Hassan Abdal, Attock 2. Begum ki sarai (on left bank of Indus near Attock Fort), Attock 3. Saidan Baoli, Htti, Attock 4. Hakim’s Tomb, Hassan Abdal, Attock 5. Chitti Baoli, Pindi Suleman Makhan, Attock 6. Attock Fort, Attock 7. Attock Tomb on GT Road near Ziarat Hazrat baba Sahib Attock 8. Behram ki Baradari, Attock 9. Tope & Monastery (Buddhist Remains). Hassan Abdal. Attock 10. Kallar (Temple) Sassi da Kallara. Village Shah Muhammad Wali, Talagang, Attock 11. Site at Garhi, Village Malk Wala. Hassan Abdal, Attock 12. Inderkot Masjid, Inderkot Fathe Jang. Attock. 13. Buddhist Site (Behari colony) Hassan Abdal, Attock
Bahawalpur District
14. Tomb of Abu Hanifa, Uchh Sharif, Bahawalpur 15. Tomb of Bibi Jawidi, Uchh Sharif, Bahawalpur 16. Tomb of Nuria, Uchh Sharif, Bahwalpur 17. Tomb of Bhawal Halee, Uchh Sharif, Bahawalpur 18. Tomb of Musa Pak Shaheed, Uchh Sharif, Bahawalpur
Dera Ghazi Khan District
19. Ghazi Khan’s Tomb, Mohalla Zamindaran, Village Chirotta, DG Khan 20. Ther Dallu Roy, Dajal, Dera Ghazi Khan
Faisalabad District
21. Wangar Wala Tibba, Chak No. 742, Tehsil Toba Tek Singh, Fasialabad
Gujranwala District
22. Baradari in Sheranwala Garden, Gujranwalo City
Gujrat District
23. Akbari Baoli in Fort Gujrat City 24. Bahar Wali Baoli, Kharian Town, Gujrat 25. Tomb of Sheikh Ali Beg, locally calld Hanjeera, Village Hailan, Tehsil Phalia, District
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 71
References
Gujrat
Jhang District
26. Shahi Masjid, Chiniot, Jhang 27. Tomb of Shah Burhan, Chiniot / Jhang
Jehlum District
28. Rohtas Fort, 5 miles from Dina Railway Station, Jehlum 29. Ruined Temple with Gateway, Melot Jehlum 30. Raja Man Singh’s Haveli Rohtas, Jehlum 31. Hill measuring 25 ft long & 190 ft broad, Murti in Tehsil PD Khan, Jehlum 32. Two Ancient Temples, Bhagan Wala, 11 miles from Haranpur Railway Station, Jehlum 33. Ruins of Nandana Fort, Bhagwan Wala, Jehlum 34. Sardar Hari Singh’s Haveli, Katas Jehlum 35. Ruined Buddhist Stupa Area Katas, PD Khan, Jehlum 36. Satgarha Temple Village Katas, Tehsil PD Khan, Jehlum
Khanewal District
37. Tomb of Khalid Walid, Village Kabirwala, Khanewal
Lahore District
38. Tomb of Ali Mardan Khan & Gateway, Lahore 39. Buddo’s Tomb, Lahore 40. Saruwala Maqbara, Lahore 41. Huzuri Bagh Baradari, Lahore 42. Dai Anga’s Tomb, Lahore 43. Shalamar Garden, including Baradari, Gateway, Kiosks, Pavilions, Well, Naqqar Khana, Asmani Well and Garden, Lahore 44. Old Fort, Lahore 45. Buddho ka Awa, Lahore 46. One Kos Minar, Lahore 47. Roshnai Gate, Lahore 48. Mirza Kamran’s Baradari, Lahore 49. Tomb of Dr. Muhammad Iqbal, Lahore 50. Tomb of Dr. Muhammad Iqbal, 34-A, McLeod Road, Lahore 51. Chauburji, Mozang, Lahore 52. Gulabi Bagh Gateway, Begumpura, Lahore 53. Qutabuddin Aibak’s Tomb, Anarkali Street, Lahore 54. Tiled Gateway & Two Bastions, Nawankot, Lahore 55. Two Kos Minars, 6 miles from Jullo, Lahore 56. Tomb of Sheikh Musa Ahangar, Masjid & House, McLeod Road, 35 Chiraghan Street, Lahore
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 72
References
57. Tomb of Zeb-un-Nisa, Nawankot, Lahore 58. Nadira Begum’s Tomb and Tank, Mian Mir, Lahore 59. Hujra Mir Mehdi (Janazgah), Kot Khawaja Saeed, Lahore 60. Tomb of Prince Parwaiz, Kot Khawaja Saeed, Lahore 61. Tomb of Nawab Bahadur Khan, Mughalpura near Railway Crossing, B-II, South of Railway Carriage Shop, Lahore 62. Javed Manzil, Allama Iqbal Road, Lahore 63. Jahangir’s Tomb & Compound, Shahdara, Lahore 64. Akbari Sarai & Masjid, Shahdara, Lahore 65. Tomb of Asif Khan & Compound, Shahdara, Lahore 66. Tomb of Noor Jehan, Shahdara, Lahore 67. Tomb of Mahabat Khan & Boundary Wall, Baghbanpura, Lahore 68. Samadhi of Ranjit Singh, Kharak Singh & Nau Nihal Singh, Lahore 69. Tomb of Anarkali, Lahore 70. Baradari & Samadhi of Maharaja Sher Singh, Lahore 71. Badshahi Masjid, Lahore 72. Wazir Khan’s Masjid, Lahore 73. Chitta Gate, Chowk Wazir Khan, inside Delhi Gate, Lahore 74. Another Gate to northeast of Wazir Khan’s Masjid, Chowk Wazir Khan, Lahore 75. Well of Raja Dina Nath, Chowk Wazir Khan, Lahore 76. Masti Gate, Lahore 77. Bhati Gate, Lahore 78. Sheranwala Gate, Lahore 79. Kashmiri Gate, Lahore 80. Lohari Gate, Lahore 81. Delhi Gate, Lahore 82. Wazir Khan’s Hamams, inside Delhi Gate, Chowk Wazir Khan, Lahore 83. Haveli Nau Nihal Singh, including Garden, Quarters, Latrine etc., inside Bhati Gate, Koocha Nau Nihal Singh, Lahore 84. Tomb of Khawaja Sabir (Nawab Nusrat Khan), inside Railway Mechanical Workshop, Mughalpura, Lahore 85. Tomb of French Officer’s Daughter, Kuri Bagh, Lahore 86. Wazir Khan’s Baradari, Old Anarkali, Behind Lahore Museum, Lahore 87. Samadhi of Jhingar Shah Suthra (Suthron ka Asthan) Lahore 88. Samadhi of Bhai Wasti Ram Texali Gate near Shahi Qila, Lahore 89. A Mughal Period Tomb, Singhpura, opposite Police Post, Lahore 90. Jani Khan’s Tomb, Baghbanpura, Lahore 91. Dai Anga’s mosque, Naulakha, Lahore. 92. Masjid with Glazed Tiles Work, Begumpura, Lahore 93. Masjid of Nawab Zakariya Khan, Begumpura, Lahore 94. Inayat Bagh, opposite Shalamar Garden, Begumpura, Lahore 95. Anguri Bagh, opposite Shalamar Garden Begumpura, Lahore 96. Mariam Zamani Masjid, inside Masti Gate, Lahore
Mianwali District
97. Sher Shah’s Baoli, Wah Bhuchran, Mianwali 98. A Buddhist Stupa with a surrounding area on River Indus, to the north of Village
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 73
References
Rokhri, District Mianwali
Multan District
99. Sawi Masjid, Kotla Tole Khan, Multan 100. Tomb of Patrick Alexander Vana, Andrew, and William Anderson, Old Fort, Multan 101. Shrine of Rukn e Alam, Old Fortm Multan 102. Tomb of Shah Ali Akbar’s Mother, Sura Miana, Multan 103. Tomb of Shah Ali Akbar, Sura Miana, Multan 104. Tomb of Shams Tabrez, Sura Miana, Multan 105. Tomb of Sheikh Yousaf Gardezi, Multan 106. Mound Ratti Khari, Head Bust 133, Village Bhattianwala, Tehsil Kabirwala, Multan 107. Tomb of Shah Hussain Soozai, near Abdal Road, Multan 108. Tomb of Mai Meharban, Mohalla Kirialoghana, Multan 109. Ruined Masjid Village Sargana, Multan 110. Maryala Moun, Chak No. 267/IOR, Multan
Muzaffargarh District
111. Tomb of Tahar Khan Nahar, Sitpur, Muzaffargarh 112. Mosque of Tahar Khan Nahar, Sitpur, Muzaffargarh 113. Tomb of Sheikh Saidan Shaheed, Village Saidan, Muzaffargarh
Rawalpindi District
114. Tope or Stupa (Buddhist), Mankiyala, Rwp 115. Tope or Stupa (Buddhist), Bhallar, Rwp 116. Pharwala Fort, Rwp 117. Losar Baoli, Wah Cantt. Rwp 118. Bhir Moun, Taxila. Mauza Majawar Rwp 119. Babar Khan Track, Taxila – Rwp 120. Kalawansite, Mauza Karawal, Rwp 121. Chirtope Site, Mauza gangu Bahadur, Rwp 122. Sirkap Site, Mauza gangu Bahadur, Rwp 123. Giri Remains, Mauza Khuram Gujjar, Rwp 124. Mohra Maradu Site, Taxila, Rwp 125. Rewat Fort, Mauza Rewat, Rwp 126. Nicholson Column, Margala Pass, Rwp 127. Kos Minar, 102 Milestone, GT Road, Rwp 128. Kos Minar near Golra Rly Stn., Rwp 129. Farudgah-Shahan-e-Mughliya, Tank & Garden, Wah, Rwp 130. Ratta Pind, Mauza Gangu Bahadur, Rwp
Sahiwal District
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 74
References
131. Mounds Harappa, Sahiwal 132. Mir Chakar’s Tomb, Satgarha, Sahiwal 133. Tomb of Syed Daud Kirmani, Shergarh, Sahiwal
Sargodha District
134. Three Temples inside Fort Amb, Sargodha 135. Site of Ancient City, Bhera – Sargodha 136. Site of Ancient City, Vijjhi, 2 miles southeast of Miani known as Sabzal Pind, Sargodha 137. A Red Stone Temple, Sodhi Zerin, Sargodha
Sheikhupura District
138. Sheikhupura Fort, East of Sheikhupura Town, Sheikhupura 139. Baoli and Masjid, Jandiala Sher Khan, Sheikhupura 140. Tank and tower, Sheikhupura 141. Tomb of Abdullah Shah, Jandiala Sher Khan, Sheikhupura 142. Mound Mian Ali Sahib, Mian Ali Faqiran, Shaikhupura 143. Tibba (Mound), Kala Shah Kaku, Sheikhupura 144. Tomb of Noor Muhammad, Jandiala Sher Khan, Sheikhupura 145. Tomb of Hafiz Barkhurda, Jandiala Sher Khan, Sheikhupura
Sialkot District
146. Tibba Jolian, Sialkot
National Monuments 147. Tomb of Allama Muhammad Iqbal 148. Javed Manzil (Allama Iqbal Museum) 149. Islamic Summit Minar
UNESCO’s World Heritage Monuments
1. Old Fort Lahore 2. Shalamar Garden 3. Archaeological Remains of Taxila
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 75
References
Annex-6
Sites Protected under the Punjab Special Premises Ordinance, 1985
Bahawalpur District
1. Jamia Masjid Alsadiq 2. Shrine of Hazrat Jalal-ud-Din Bukhari & attached Masjid 3. Shrine of Hazrat Makhdum Jahanian Jahangasht & attached Masjid 4. Shrine of Hazrat Mahboob Subhani & attached Masjid 5. Shrine of Hazrat Fazal Din Ladla 6. Masjid-e-Haajat 7. Shrine of Hazrat Sibi Tagni 8. Shrine of Hazrat Rajam Qattal 9. Shrine of Hazrat Salis Bil Khair 10. Qadim Masjid in graveyard Malook Shah 11. Masjid Sahibzadgan 12. Shrine of Hazrat Hasan Darya Kabir 13. Shrine of Hazrat Jamal Khandan Darvesh 14. Shrine of Hazrat Razi-ud-Din Ganj Alam Darya 15. Tomb of Safi-ud-Din Garzani, Uchh Sharif 16. Tomb of Khwaja Khuda Bakhsh, Khairpur Tamewali 17. Masjid-e-Khanan, Khairpur Tamewali 18. Masjid Maulvi Ubaidullah
Dear Ghazi Khan District
19. Shrines of Hazrat Pir Adil and Hazrat Imam Ali 20. Shrine of Hazrat Sakhi Sarwar 21. Tomb of Hazrat Khawaja Suleman Taunsvi at Taunsa Sharif 22. Tomb of Hazrat Khawaja Mahmood at Taunsa Sharif
Gujranwala District
23. Chilla Gah of Hazrat Sakhi Sarwar 24. Masjid of Sher Shah Suri 25. Dak Chowki of Sher Shah Suri’s period
Gujrat District
26. Masjid attached to the Shrine of Hafiz Muhammad Hayat 27. Baradari attached to the Shrine of Hafiz Muhammad Hayat 28. Shrine of Hafiz Muhammad Hayat 29. Shrine of Hazrat Tawakkal Shah Rehman 30. Tomb of Shah Jehangir & attached Masjid 31. Shrine of Hazrat shah Daula 32. Gujrat Fort 33. An unknown & ruined tomb near the Shrine of Mirza Ali Beg 34. Camp (Parao or Bardasht Khana) 35. Akbari Hamam 36. Baoli Rajgah 37. Baoli 38. Baoli (Kharian)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 76
References
Jhang District
39. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Saiq Nihang 40. Shrine of Hazrat Pir Ghazi 41. Shrine of Hazrat Pir Abdul Rehman Qureishi 42. Shrine of Hazrat Taj ud Din Makhdum 43. Shahi Masjid Chiniot 44. Gulzar Mahal Chiniot 45. Shrine of Hazrat Pir Abdul Razzaq 46. Shrine of Hazrat Sultan Bahu
Jehlum District
47. Shrine of Hazrat Hoo-Ba-Hoo 48. Shrine of Hazrat Saidan Shah 49. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Suleman Paris 50. Masjid Afghana 51. An Unidentified Tomb of Suri’s Period 52. A ruined & Unidentified Tomb 53. Jahndo ki Sarai 54. Katas Raj including the Sacred Pond of Water and some Temples also known as Satgaraha Temples 55. Masjid and Temple at Nandna
Kasur District
56. Shrine of Hazrat Bulleh Shah 57. Shrine of Baba Kamal Chishti 58. Masjid of Sher Shah Suri’s period known as Jinnon Wali Masjid
Khanewal District
59. Shrine of Hazrat Hussein Shah 60. Old Ruined Mosque, Mauza Khatti Chaar, Tehsil Kabirwala
Khushab District
61. Shrine of Hazrat Badshahan
Lahore District
62. Aitcheson College, Lahore 63. Residency (State Guest House), Lahore 64. Lahore High Court, Lahore 65. Assembly Chambers, Lahore 66. Free Mason Hall, Lahore 67. Ferozesons Building, Shahrah-e-Quaid-e-Azam, Lahore 68. Montgomery Hall (Quaid-e-Azam Library), Lahore 69. Chamba House (GOR Estate), Lahore 70. Civil Lines Police Station, Lahore 71. Patiala Block, King Edward Medical College, Lahore 72. Ewing Hall, Neela Gumbad, Lahore 73. General Post Office, Lahore 74. State Bank of Pakistan, Nabha Road, Lahore
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 77
References
75. Taj Palace, Opp. Services Hospital, Jail Road, Lahore 76. Anarkali’s Tomb (Civil Secretariat), Lahore 77. Barkat Ali Hall, Circular Road, Lahore 78. Punjab University (Old Campus), Lahore. 79. Museum & National College of Arts, Lahore 80. Town Hall, Shahrah-e-Quaid-e-Azam, Lahore 81. Lakshami Building, McLeod Road, Lahore 82. Tomb of Malik Ayyaz (Rang Mahal), Lahore 83. Fatehgarh Garden near Shalamar Garden, Lahore 84. Faqir Khana Museum (inside Bhati Gate), Lahore 85. Haveli Dhayan Singh, Texali Gate, Lahore 86. Kamran Baradari at Ravi, Lahore 87. Seetla Mandir (outside Shahalami Gate), Lahore 88. Tomb of Qutabuddin Aibak, Lahore 89. Bredlaw Hall, Sheesh Mahal Road, Lahore 90. Railway Station, Lahore 91. Government College, Lahore 92. Islamia College, Railway Road, Lahore 93. Islamia College, Civil Lines, Lahore 94. Government College Hostel, Lower Mall, Lahore 95. Animal Husbandry College, Lahore 96. Central Model High School, Lower Mall, Lahore 97. Mubarik Haveli, Bhati Gate, Lahore 98. Haveli Nawab Sahib, Mochi Gate, Lahore 99. Cricket Pavilion, Bagh-e-Jinnah, Lahore 100. Kinnaird College, Jail Road, Lahore 101. Queen Marry College, Lahore 102. Government House, Lahore 103. Haveli Sheikh Rukanuddin, Lohari Gate, Lahore 104. Gurdawara (D-Block Model Town), Lahore 105. Chobara Chajju Bhagat near Mayo Hospital, Lahore 106. Dayal Singh Library, Nisbat road, Lahore 107. Administrative Staff College, Lahore 108. Shahdin Building, Sharah-e-Quaid-e-Azam, Lahore 109. Badshahi Masjid, Lahore 110. Masjid Wazir Khan, Lahore 111. Sunehri Masjid, Lahore 112. Shrine of Hazrat Abul Ma’ali, Lahore 113. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Chiragh & attached Masjid, Lahore 114. Shrine of Hazrat Alishan Sahib, Lahore 115. Shrine of Hazrat Mauj Darya Bukhari, Lahore 116. Shrine of Mian Wada Sahib, Lahore 117. Shrine of Hazrat Sikandar Shah, Lahore 118. Masjid Saleh Muhammad Kamboh, Lahore 119. Shrine of Hazrat Data Ganj Bakhsh, Lahore 120. Shrine of Hazrat Khawaja Behari, Lahore 121. Small Masjid near the Shrine of Hazrat Behari, Lahore 122. Shrine of Hazrat Maddho Lal Hussain, Lahore 123. Shrine of Hazrat Miran Hussain Zanjani, Lahore 124. Platform of the Grave of Mian Mir’s Sister, Lahore 125. Tomb of Hazrat Sabir on the west of Badshahi Masjid, Lahore 126. Tomb of Hazrat Pir Makki, Lahore 127. Mazar of Hazrat Bibi Pak Daman, Lahore 128. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Jamal, Lahore 129. Tomb of Hazrat Mullah Badakhshani and its surrounding area especially the corner Burja, Lahore 130. Small Masjid of Wazir Khan inside Texali Gate known as the Masjid of Ladies of Wazir Khan, Lahore 131. Tombs of Nawab Abdul Samad Khan and his Family, Lahore
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 78
References
132. Chowk Masjid Wazir Khan occupied by Khokhawalas, Lahore 133. Masjid Mai Ladu, Lahore 134. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Kamal, Lahore 135. Barkat Ali Islamia Hall, Lahore 136. Ucchi Masjid, Lahore 137. Masjid Patolian, Lahore 138. Shrine of Hazrat Syed Mahmood Hazoori, Lahore 139. Shrine & Masjid of Syed Jan Muhammad Hazoori, Lahore 140. Shrine of Hazrat Syed Maulvi Nazam-ud-Din, Lahore 141. Shrine of Hazrat Sadar-ud-Din Sadar Jehan, Lahore 142. Masjid of Khawaja Ayyaz, Lahore 143. Tomb of Shah Rustam Ghazi, Lahore 144. Masjid Chinian Wali, Lahore 145. Masjid Maulvi Taj Din, Lahore 146. Tomb of Hazrat Shah Ismail, Lahore 147. Tomb of Khawaja Muhammad Saeed with Enclosure opposite Nila Gumbad, Lahore 148. Tomb of Shah Sharflying on the north of Khawaja Muhammad Saeed’s Tomb, Lahore 149. Tomb of Hazrat Shah Muhammad Ismail Gilani, Lahore 150. Tomb of Hazrat Shah Shams-ud-Din, Lahore 151. Tomb & Garden of Mian Khan s/o Gald Ullah Khan, the Prime Minister of Shahjehan, Lahore 152. The Mughal Garden at Fetehgarh, Lahore 153. Shahzadi ka Maqbara surrounded by residential houses, Fatehgarh, Lahore 154. The remaining Entrance Gate & Baradari of the Garden of Khawaja Ayyaz, the Governor of Lahore 155. Masjid of Khawaja Ayyaz, Lahore 156. Tomb of Nawab Khan-e-Dauran, Nusrat Jang Bahadur lying within the area of Railway Workshop, Lahore 157. Tomb of Muhammad Saleh Kamboh, Lahore 158. Masjid Moran Tawaif, Lahore 159. Shrine of Hazrat Imam Gamun, Lahore 160. Tomb of Abdul Ghani between Shalamar Garden, Lahore 161. Temple and Tank of Bherron ka Than in Ichhra, Lahore 162. Samadhi of Sir Ganga Ram, Lahore 163. Samadhi of Chhajju Bhagat, Lahore 164. The Enclosure and Grave of Mian Natha & his Goat in the General Graveyard of Mian Mir, Lahore 165. The Grave of Mulla Hamid Gujjar and his relatives, Lahore 166. Shah Chiragh Chambers, Lahore 167. Hayat House No. 14, Hall Road, Lahore 168. Nila Gumbad Masjid, Lahore 169. Shrine of Hazrat Abdul Razzaq Makki, Lahore
Layyah District 170. Shrine of Hazrat Lal Easan 171. Shrine of Hazrat Fajan Shah
Multan District 172. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Rukn e Alam 173. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Shams Sabzwari 174. Shrine of Hazrat Bibi Pak Damna 175. Shrine of Hazrat Musa Pak Shahi and attached Masjid 176. Mosque of Nawab Ali Muhammad Khan 177. Shrine of Hazrat Baha ud Din Zakariya 178. Shrine of Hazrat Sultan Ahmad Qattal 179. Shrine of Hazrat Makhdum Rashid 180. Shrine of Hazrat Sultan Ayyub Qattal 181. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Dana Shaheed 182. Shrine of Nawab Saeed Qureshi
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 79
References
183. Shrine of Hazrat Khawaja Awais Khagga 184. Shrine of Hazrat Inayat Walait 185. Shrine of Hazrat Shah Hussain Saddozel 186. Shrine of Mai Meharban 187. Shrine of Hafiz Jamal 188. Shrine of Hazrat Hamid Gillani 189. Shrine of Hazrat Yahya Nawab 190. Masjid Khuddaka 191. Shrine of Hazrat Ali Sarwar 192. Tomb of Mian Dalail 193. Tomb of Shah Ali Mardan 194. Tomb of Allah Dad Gurmani 195. Tomb of Pir Luddan Kuddan 196. Shahi Masjid Qasim Bela 197. Old Masjid Muhammad Pur Goth 198. Masjid near the Tomb of Hazrat Ali Akbar at Sura Miana 199. Jamia Masjid, Khaipur Bhutta 200. Masjid Jazir Khan 201. Perhalad Temple 202. Suraj Kund Temple 203. Old Mosque at Basti Hasil Wali, Tehsil Lodhran 204. Old Mosque near Bela Wagah, Lodhran 205. Old Mosque at Basti Mansoor Shah Wali, Tehsil Lodhran 206. Mosque at Basti Zirakhwah, Lodhran 207. Tomb of Hazrat Handira Pir, Karor Pucca 208. Tomb of Hazrat Sheikh Ahmed Kabir at Dhant, Lodhran 209. Ruined Mosque near Tomb of Hazrat Sheikh Ahmed Kabir at Dhanat, Lodhran 210. Tomb of Hazrat Sheikh Muhammad Ismail Qureshi at Basti Umarpur, Jalalpur Pirwala, Tehsil Shujabad 211. Tomb of Pir Aulia e Ghuri at Bahadurpur, Jalalpur Pirwala, Tehsil Suhjabad 212. Fortification Wall of Shujabad City
Muzaffargarh District 213. Shrine of Hazrat Abu Wahab Bukhari 214. Shrine of Hazrat Sheikh Ludhho 215. Shrine of Hazrat Sheikh Saan Shaheed, alias Sheikh Saidan 216. Tomb of Hazrat Sultan Manjhan at Basti Sultan Manjhan 217. Tomb of Hazrat Buha Sher 218. Tomb of Hazrat Muhammad Anwar at Kunnal Sharif 219. Old Masjid at Khairpur Sadat, Tehsil Alipur
Okara District 220. Tomb of Hazrat Ghous Muhammad Bala Peer at Satgara
221. Rahimyar Khan District 222. Faridi Mahal 223. Qadim Masjid 224. Tomb of Hazrat Sadar ud Din Shamsi at Taranda, Tehsil Liaqatpur 225. Tomb of Son Hazrat Sadar ud Din Shamsi at Taranda, Tehsil Liaqatpur
Rajanpur District 226. Shrine of Hazrat Khawaja Ghulam Farid 227. Shrine of Hazrat Taj Mahmud 228. Shrine of Hazrat Noor Muhammad Hassan 229. Tomb of Hazrat Noor Muhammad at Hajipur 230. So called Suri period Masjid Rajanpur 231. Haran Fort, Tehsil Jampur
Rawalpindi District
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 80
References
232. Entrance Gate of Sarai Kala 233. Sarai Kharbuza, Rwp
Sahiwal District 234. Shrine of Hazrat Alauddin Mauj Darya 235. A ruined mosque of so called ‘Suri Period’ at Dhawa Sharma, Tehsil Chichawatni
Sargodha District 236. Jamia Masjid, Bhera
Sheikupura District 237. Shrine of Hazrat Abdul Kher Nau Lakh Hazari 238. Shrine of Mian Sher Muhammad
Sialkot District 239. Shrine of Hazrat Jamam Ali ul Haq 240. Shrine of Hazrat Syed Murad Ali Shah 241. Shrine of Hazrat Pir Mullah Rahim Pur Kuchian 242. Shrine of Hazrat Abdul Salam Chishti known as (Bara Bhai) 243. Shrine of Hazrat Qutab Shah Wali 244. Shrine of Hazrat Mir Muhammad Zareef
Vehari District 245. Shrine of Hazrat Diwan Shawali Mashaikh 246. Tomb of Hazrat Abu Bakar Burraq, Mailsi
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 81
References
Annex-7
Notified Ecologically Protected Areas in Punjab
National Parks:
1. Chinji Reserve Forest 2. Lal Suhanra
Wildlife Santuaries:
3. Head Qadirabad 4. Bahawalpur Plantation 5. Bhagat Plantation 6. Bhakkar Plantation 7. Chak Katora Plantation 8. Change Manga Plantation 9. Chashma Barrage 10. Chichawatni plantation 11. Cholistan 12. Chumbi Suria 13. Daman Forest Plantation 14. Depalpur Plantation 15. Fateh Major Plantation 16. Harnoli Plantation 17. Inayat Forest Plantation 18. Jhalar Lake 19. Jalalpur Sharif 20. Jauharabad Plantation 21. Kamalia Plantation 22. Khabeki Lake 23. Khanewal Plantation 24. Kotal Issan Plantation 25. Rakh Kundal 26. Kundian Plantation 27. Machu Plantation 28. Miranpur plantation 29. Mitha Tiwana Plantation 30. Rajan Shah Plantation 31. Rakh Ghulaman 32. Shorko Plantation 33. Sodhi 34. Taunsa Barrage 35. Walhar Plantation 36. Head Panjnad Pond Area 37. Kalar Kahar 38. Rakh Kharewala 39. Daphar Forest Plantation 40. Lal Suhanra National Park
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 82
References
Game Reserves:
41. Abbasia Forest Plantation 42. Bajwat 43. Bhon Fazal 44. Chopalia 45. Cholistan 46. Daulana 47. Dilijabba / Domeli 48. Border Belt (8 km strip on India-Pakistan border) 49. Kala Chitta 50. Kathar 51. Rakh Kheri Murat 52. Kot Sabzal 53. Nammal Lake 54. Rahri Bunglow 55. Rasool Barrage 56. Thal 57. Uchhali Lake 58. Loui Bher Forest Plantation 59. Khanpur Plantation 60. Nabi Shah Lake 61. Head Islam 62. Tilla Jogian 63 . Shujabad Canal (Source: WWF Pakistan
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 83
References
Annex 8 Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines (Please see the following pages.)
ESMF – PERSP-II Page 84
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Environmental, Health, and Safety General Guidelines Introduction based on the professional opinion of qualified and experienced persons. When host country regulations differ from the levels and The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects are expected technical reference documents with general and industry-specific to achieve whichever is more stringent. If less stringent levels or examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) 1. When measures than those provided in these EHS Guidelines are one or more members of the World Bank Group are involved in a appropriate, in view of specific project circumstances, a full and project, these EHS Guidelines are applied as required by their detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part respective policies and standards. These General EHS Guidelines of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector should demonstrate that the choice for any alternate performance EHS Guidelines which provide guidance to users on EHS issues in levels is protective of human health and the environment. specific industry sectors. For complex projects, use of multiple industry-sector guidelines may be necessary. A complete list of The General EHS Guidelines are organized as follows: industry-sector guidelines can be found at: 1. Environmental 3 www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Content/EnvironmentalGuidelines 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality 3 1.2 Energy Conservation 17 The EHS Guidelines contain the performance levels and measures 1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality 24 1.4 Water Conservation 32 that are generally considered to be achievable in new facilities by 1.5 Hazardous Materials Management 35 1.6 Waste Management 45 existing technology at reasonable costs. Application of the EHS 1.7 Noise 51 Guidelines to existing facilities may involve the establishment of 1.8 Contaminated Land 53 2. Occupational Health and Safety 59 site-specific targets, with an appropriate timetable for achieving 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation 60 2.2 Communication and Training 62 them. The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be tailored to 2.3 Physical Hazards 64 the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of 2.4 Chemical Hazards 68 2.5 Biological Hazards 70 the results of an environmental assessment2 in which site-specific 2.6 Radiological Hazards 72 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 72 variables, such as host country context, assimilative capacity of the 2.8 Special Hazard Environments 73 environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The 2.9 Monitoring 74 3. Community Health and Safety 77 applicability of specific technical recommendations should be 3.1 Water Quality and Availability 77 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure 78 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) 79 3.4 Traffic Safety 82 1 Defined as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials 82 would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged 3.6 Disease Prevention 85 in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally. 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response 86 The circumstances that skilled and experienced professionals may find when 4. Construction and Decommissioning 89 evaluating the range of pollution prevention and control techniques available to a project may include, but are not limited to, varying levels of environmental 4.1 Environment 89 degradation and environmental assimilative capacity as well as varying levels of 4.2 Occupational Health & Safety 92 financial and technical feasibility. 4.3 Community Health & Safety 94 2 For IFC, such assessment is carried out consistent with Performance Standard 1, References and Additional Sources* 96 and for the World Bank, with Operational Policy 4.01.
APRIL 30, 2007 1 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
General Approach to the Management people or to the environmental resources on which they of EHS Issues at the Facility or Project depend. Level · Prioritizing risk management strategies with the objective of achieving an overall reduction of risk to human health and the Effective management of environmental, health, and safety (EHS) environment, focusing on the prevention of irreversible and / or issues entails the inclusion of EHS considerations into corporate- significant impacts. and facility-level business processes in an organized, hierarchical approach that includes the following steps: · Favoring strategies that eliminate the cause of the hazard at its source, for example, by selecting less hazardous materials · Identifying EHS project hazards3 and associated risks4 as or processes that avoid the need for EHS controls. early as possible in the facility development or project cycle, including the incorporation of EHS considerations into the site · When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating selection process, product design process, engineering engineering and management controls to reduce or minimize planning process for capital requests, engineering work the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for orders, facility modification authorizations, or layout and example, with the application of pollution controls to reduce process change plans. the levels of emitted contaminants to workers or environments.
· Involving EHS professionals, who have the experience, · Preparing workers and nearby communities to respond to competence, and training necessary to assess and manage accidents, including providing technical and financial EHS impacts and risks, and carry out specialized resources to effectively and safely control such events, and environmental management functions including the restoring workplace and community environments to a safe preparation of project or activity-specific plans and procedures and healthy condition. that incorporate the technical recommendations presented in · Improving EHS performance through a combination of ongoing this document that are relevant to the project. monitoring of facility performance and effective accountability. · Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of EHS risks, based on:
o The nature of the project activities, such as whether the project will generate significant quantities of emissions or effluents, or involve hazardous materials or processes;
o The potential consequences to workers, communities, or the environment if hazards are not adequately managed, which may depend on the proximity of project activities to
3 Defined as “threats to humans and what they value” (Kates, et al., 1985). 4 Defined as “quantitative measures of hazard consequences, usually expressed as conditional probabilities of experiencing harm” (Kates, et. al., 1985)
APRIL 30, 2007 2
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
1.0 Environmental 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality the spatial characteristic of the source including point sources, Applicability and Approach ...... 3 fugitive sources, and mobile sources and, further, by process, Ambient Air Quality ...... 4 such as combustion, materials storage, or other industry sector- General Approach...... 4 specific processes. Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically Sensitive Areas...... 5 Point Sources ...... 5 Where possible, facilities and projects should avoid, minimize, and Stack Height...... 5 control adverse impacts to human health, safety, and the Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines ....6 Fugitive Sources ...... 8 environment from emissions to air. Where this is not possible, the Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)...... 8 generation and release of emissions of any type should be Particulate Matter (PM)...... 8 managed through a combination of: Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) ...... 9 Mobile Sources – Land-based ...... 9 Greenhouse Gases (GHGs)...... 9 · Energy use efficiency Monitoring...... 10 · Process modification Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions...11 · Selection of fuels or other materials, the processing of which
may result in less polluting emissions Applicability and Approach · Application of emissions control techniques
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate The selected prevention and control techniques may include one emissions to air at any stage of the project life-cycle. It or more methods of treatment depending on: complements the industry-specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) · Regulatory requirements Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for · Significance of the source emissions management that may be applied to a range of industry · Location of the emitting facility relative to other sources sectors. This guideline provides an approach to the management · Location of sensitive receptors of significant sources of emissions, including specific guidance for · Existing ambient air quality, and potential for degradation of assessment and monitoring of impacts. It is also intended to the airshed from a proposed project provide additional information on approaches to emissions · Technical feasibility and cost effectiveness of the available management in projects located in areas of poor air quality, where options for prevention, control, and release of emissions it may be necessary to establish project-specific emissions standards.
Emissions of air pollutants can occur from a wide variety of activities during the construction, operation, and decommissioning phases of a project. These activities can be categorized based on
APRIL 30, 2007 3 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Ambient Air Quality additional, future sustainable development in the same airshed. 12 General Approach At facility level, impacts should be estimated through qualitative or Projects with significant5,6 sources of air emissions, and potential quantitative assessments by the use of baseline air quality for significant impacts to ambient air quality, should prevent or assessments and atmospheric dispersion models to assess minimize impacts by ensuring that: potential ground level concentrations. Local atmospheric, climatic, · Emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach and air quality data should be applied when modeling dispersion, or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards9 protection against atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence, of the source, nearby13 structures, and terrain features. The the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines10 (see Table 1.1.1), dispersion model applied should be internationally recognized, or or other internationally recognized sources11; comparable. Examples of acceptable emission estimation and · Emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the dispersion modeling approaches for point and fugitive sources are attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines or standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25 Table 1.1.1: WHO Ambient Air Quality Guidelines7,8 percent of the applicable air quality standards to allow Averaging Guideline value in Period mg/m3
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) 24-hour 125 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) 20 (guideline) 10 minute 500 (guideline) 5 Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) 1-year 40 (guideline) Significant sources of point and fugitive emissions are considered to be general 1-hour 200 (guideline) sources which, for example, can contribute a net emissions increase of one or more of the following pollutants within a given airshed: PM10: 50 tons per year Particulate Matter 1-year 70 (Interim target-1) (tpy); NOx: 500 tpy; SO2: 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation; PM10 50 (Interim target-2) and combustion sources with an equivalent heat input of 50 MWth or greater. The 30 (Interim target-3) significance of emissions of inorganic and organic pollutants should be established 20 (guideline) on a project-specific basis taking into account toxic and other properties of the pollutant. 24-hour 150 (Interim target-1) 6 United States Environmental Protection Agency, Prevention of Significant 100 (Interim target-2) Deterioration of Air Quality, 40 CFR Ch. 1 Part 52.21. Other references for 75 (Interim target-3) establishing significant emissions include the European Commission. 2000. 50 (guideline) “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” Particulate Matter 1-year 35 (Interim target-1) http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ; and Australian Government. PM2.5 25 (Interim target-2) 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf 15 (Interim target-3) 10 (guideline) 7 World Health Organization (WHO). Air Quality Guidelines Global Update, 2005. PM 24-hour value is the 99th percentile. 8 24-hour 75 (Interim target-1) Interim targets are provided in recognition of the need for a staged approach to 50 (Interim target-2) achieving the recommended guidelines. 37.5 (Interim target-3) 9 Ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and 25 (guideline) published through national legislative and regulatory processes, and ambient Ozone 8-hour daily 160 (Interim target-1) quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by maximum 100 (guideline) the World Health Organization). 10 Available at World Health Organization (WHO). http://www.who.int/en 12 US EPA Prevention of Significant Deterioration Increments Limits applicable to 11 For example the United States National Ambient Air Quality Standards non-degraded airsheds. (NAAQS) (http://www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html) and the relevant European Council Directives (Council Directive 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 / Council Directive 2002/3/EC of February 12 2002).
APRIL 30, 2007 4 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP included in Annex 1.1.1. These approaches include screening Point Sources models for single source evaluations (SCREEN3 or AIRSCREEN), Point sources are discrete, stationary, identifiable sources of as well as more complex and refined models (AERMOD OR emissions that release pollutants to the atmosphere. They are ADMS). Model selection is dependent on the complexity and geo- typically located in manufacturing or production plants. Within a morphology of the project site (e.g. mountainous terrain, urban or given point source, there may be several individual ‘emission rural area). points’ that comprise the point source.15
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Point sources are characterized by the release of air pollutants Ecologically Sensitive Areas typically associated with the combustion of fossil fuels, such as 14 Facilities or projects located within poor quality airsheds , and nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide within or next to areas established as ecologically sensitive (e.g. (CO), and particulate matter (PM), as well as other air pollutants national parks), should ensure that any increase in pollution levels including certain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and metals is as small as feasible, and amounts to a fraction of the applicable that may also be associated with a wide range of industrial short-term and annual average air quality guidelines or standards activities. as established in the project-specific environmental assessment. Emissions from point sources should be avoided and controlled Suitable mitigation measures may also include the relocation of according to good international industry practice (GIIP) applicable significant sources of emissions outside the airshed in question, to the relevant industry sector, depending on ambient conditions, use of cleaner fuels or technologies, application of comprehensive through the combined application of process modifications and pollution control measures, offset activities at installations emissions controls, examples of which are provided in Annex controlled by the project sponsor or other facilities within the same 1.1.2. Additional recommendations regarding stack height and airshed, and buy-down of emissions within the same airshed. emissions from small combustion facilities are provided below.
Specific provisions for minimizing emissions and their impacts in Stack Height poor air quality or ecologically sensitive airsheds should be The stack height for all point sources of emissions, whether established on a project-by-project or industry-specific basis. ‘significant’ or not, should be designed according to GIIP (see Offset provisions outside the immediate control of the project Annex 1.1.3) to avoid excessive ground level concentrations due sponsor or buy-downs should be monitored and enforced by the to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects, and to ensure reasonable local agency responsible for granting and monitoring emission diffusion to minimize impacts. For projects where there are permits. Such provisions should be in place prior to final multiple sources of emissions, stack heights should be established commissioning of the facility / project. with due consideration to emissions from all other project sources, both point and fugitive. Non-significant sources of emissions,
15 13 “Nearby” generally considers an area within a radius of up to 20 times the stack Emission points refer to a specific stack, vent, or other discrete point of pollution height. release. This term should not be confused with point source, which is a regulatory 14 distinction from area and mobile sources. The characterization of point sources An airshed should be considered as having poor air quality if nationally into multiple emissions points is useful for allowing more detailed reporting of legislated air quality standards or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded emissions information. significantly.
APRIL 30, 2007 5 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP including small combustion sources,16 should also use GIIP in stack design.
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines Small combustion processes are systems designed to deliver electrical or mechanical power, steam, heat, or any combination of these, regardless of the fuel type, with a total, rated heat input capacity of between three Megawatt thermal (MWth) and 50 MWth.
The emissions guidelines in Table 1.1.2 are applicable to small combustion process installations operating more than 500 hours per year, and those with an annual capacity utilization of more than 30 percent. Plants firing a mixture of fuels should compare emissions performance with these guidelines based on the sum of the relative contribution of each applied fuel17. Lower emission values may apply if the proposed facility is located in an ecologically sensitive airshed, or airshed with poor air quality, in order to address potential cumulative impacts from the installation of more than one small combustion plant as part of a distributed generation project.
16 Small combustion sources are those with a total rated heat input capacity of 50MWth or less. 17 The contribution of a fuel is the percentage of heat input (LHV) provided by this fuel multiplied by its limit value.
APRIL 30, 2007 6 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 1.1.2 - Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines (3MWth – 50MWth) – (in mg/Nm3 or as indicated) Combustion Technology / Dry Gas, Excess Particulate Matter (PM) Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) Fuel O2 Content (%) Engine 200 (Spark Ignition) Gas N/A N/A 400 (Dual Fuel) 15 1,600 (Compression Ignition) 1.5 percent Sulfur or up to 3.0 percent Sulfur if 50 or up to 100 if justified by project specific If bore size diameter [mm] < 400: 1460 justified by project specific considerations (e.g. considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of (or up to 1,600 if justified to maintain high Economic feasibility of using lower S content fuel, Liquid using lower ash content fuel, or adding energy efficiency.) 15 or adding secondary treatment to meet levels of secondary treatment to meet 50, and using 1.5 percent Sulfur, and available available environmental capacity of the site) If bore size diameter [mm] > or = 400: 1,850 environmental capacity of the site) Turbine Natural Gas 42 ppm (Electric generation) N/A N/A 15 =3MWth to < 15MWth 100 ppm (Mechanical drive) Natural Gas N/A N/A 25 ppm 15 =15MWth to < 50MWth
0.5 percent Sulfur or lower percent Sulfur (e.g. 0.2 Fuels other than Natural Gas 96 ppm (Electric generation) N/A percent Sulfur) if commercially available without 15 =3MWth to < 15MWth 150 ppm (Mechanical drive) significant excess fuel cost
Fuels other than Natural Gas 0.5% S or lower % S (0.2%S) if commercially N/A 74 ppm 15 =15MWth to < 50MWth available without significant excess fuel cost Boiler Gas N/A N/A 320 3 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental Liquid 2000 460 3 assessment 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental Solid 2000 650 6 assessment Notes: -N/A/ - no emissions guideline; Higher performance levels than these in the Table should be applicable to facilities located in urban / industrial areas with degraded airsheds or close to ecologically sensitive areas where more stringent emissions controls may be needed.; MWth is heat input on HHV basis; Solid fuels include biomass; Nm3 is at one atmosphere pressure, 0°C.; MWth category is to apply to the entire facility consisting of multiple units that are reasonably considered to be emitted from a common stack except for NOx and PM limits for turbines and boilers. Guidelines values apply to facilities operating more than 500 hours per year with an annual capacity utilization factor of more than 30 percent.
APRIL 30, 2007 7 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
· Implementing a leak detection and repair (LDAR) program Fugitive Sources that controls fugitive emissions by regularly monitoring to Fugitive source air emissions refer to emissions that are detect leaks, and implementing repairs within a predefined distributed spatially over a wide area and not confined to a specific time period.18 discharge point. They originate in operations where exhausts are For VOC emissions associated with handling of chemicals in open not captured and passed through a stack. Fugitive emissions have vats and mixing processes, the recommended prevention and the potential for much greater ground-level impacts per unit than control techniques include: stationary source emissions, since they are discharged and dispersed close to the ground. The two main types of fugitive · Substitution of less volatile substances, such as aqueous emissions are Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) and solvents; particulate matter (PM). Other contaminants (NOx, SO2 and CO) · Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent are mainly associated with combustion processes, as described treatment of gas stream by removing VOCs with control above. Projects with potentially significant fugitive sources of devices such as condensers or activated carbon absorption; emissions should establish the need for ambient quality · Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent assessment and monitoring practices. treatment with destructive control devices such as: o Catalytic Incinerators: Used to reduce VOCs from Open burning of solid wastes, whether hazardous or non- process exhaust gases exiting paint spray booths, hazardous, is not considered good practice and should be ovens, and other process operations avoided, as the generation of polluting emissions from this type of o Thermal Incinerators: Used to control VOC levels in a source cannot be controlled effectively. gas stream by passing the stream through a combustion chamber where the VOCs are burned in air at Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) temperatures between 700º C to 1,300º C The most common sources of fugitive VOC emissions are o Enclosed Oxidizing Flares: Used to convert VOCs into associated with industrial activities that produce, store, and use CO2 and H2O by way of direct combustion VOC-containing liquids or gases where the material is under pressure, exposed to a lower vapor pressure, or displaced from an · Use of floating roofs on storage tanks to reduce the enclosed space. Typical sources include equipment leaks, open opportunity for volatilization by eliminating the headspace vats and mixing tanks, storage tanks, unit operations in present in conventional storage tanks. wastewater treatment systems, and accidental releases. Particulate Matter (PM) Equipment leaks include valves, fittings, and elbows which are The most common pollutant involved in fugitive emissions is dust subject to leaks under pressure. The recommended prevention or particulate matter (PM). This is released during certain and control techniques for VOC emissions associated with operations, such as transport and open storage of solid materials, equipment leaks include: and from exposed soil surfaces, including unpaved roads. · Equipment modifications, examples of which are presented in Annex 1.1.4; 18 For more information, see Leak Detection and Repair Program (LDAR), at: http://www.ldar.net
APRIL 30, 2007 8 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Recommended prevention and control of these emissions sources programs. In the absence of these, the following approach should include: be considered:
· Use of dust control methods, such as covers, water · Regardless of the size or type of vehicle, fleet owners / suppression, or increased moisture content for open operators should implement the manufacturer recommended materials storage piles, or controls, including air extraction engine maintenance programs; and treatment through a baghouse or cyclone for material · Drivers should be instructed on the benefits of driving handling sources, such as conveyors and bins; practices that reduce both the risk of accidents and fuel · Use of water suppression for control of loose materials on consumption, including measured acceleration and driving paved or unpaved road surfaces. Oil and oil by-products is within safe speed limits; not a recommended method to control road dust. Examples · Operators with fleets of 120 or more units of heavy duty of additional control options for unpaved roads include those vehicles (buses and trucks), or 540 or more light duty summarized in Annex 1.1.5. vehicles21 (cars and light trucks) within an airshed should consider additional ways to reduce potential impacts Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) including: Several chemicals are classified as ozone depleting substances o Replacing older vehicles with newer, more fuel efficient (ODSs) and are scheduled for phase-out under the Montreal alternatives Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.19 No new o Converting high-use vehicles to cleaner fuels, where systems or processes should be installed using CFCs, halons, feasible 1,1,1-trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride, methyl bromide or o Installing and maintaining emissions control devices, HBFCs. HCFCs should only be considered as interim / bridging such as catalytic converters alternatives as determined by the host country commitments and o Implementing a regular vehicle maintenance and repair 20 regulations. program
Mobile Sources – Land-based Greenhouse Gases (GHGs) Similar to other combustion processes, emissions from vehicles Sectors that may have potentially significant emissions of include CO, NOx, SO2, PM and VOCs. Emissions from on-road greenhouse gases (GHGs)22 include energy, transport, heavy and off-road vehicles should comply with national or regional industry (e.g. cement production, iron / steel manufacturing, aluminum smelting, petrochemical industries, petroleum refining, fertilizer manufacturing), agriculture, forestry and waste 19 Examples include: chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); halons; 1,1,1-trichloroethane management. GHGs may be generated from direct emissions (methyl chloroform); carbon tetrachloride; hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs); hydrobromofluorocarbons (HBFCs); and methyl bromide. They are currently used in a variety of applications including: domestic, commercial, and process refrigeration (CFCs and HCFCs); domestic, commercial, and motor vehicle air 21 The selected fleet size thresholds are assumed to represent potentially conditioning (CFCs and HCFCs); for manufacturing foam products (CFCs); for significant sources of emissions based on individual vehicles traveling 100,000 km solvent cleaning applications (CFCs, HCFCs, methyl chloroform, and carbon / yr using average emission factors. tetrachloride); as aerosol propellants (CFCs); in fire protection systems (halons 22 The six greenhouse gases that form part of the Kyoto Protocol to the United and HBFCs); and as crop fumigants (methyl bromide). Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change include carbon dioxide (C02); 20 Additional information is available through the Montreal Protocol Secretariat methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); perfluorocarbons web site available at: http://ozone.unep.org/ (PFCs); and sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6).
APRIL 30, 2007 9 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP from facilities within the physical project boundary and indirect decisions to be made based on the data and the consequences of emissions associated with the off-site production of power used by making an incorrect decision, the time and geographic the project. boundaries, and the quality of data needed to make a correct decision.25 The air quality monitoring program should consider Recommendations for reduction and control of greenhouse gases include: the following elements: · Monitoring parameters: The monitoring parameters selected · Carbon financing;23 should reflect the pollutants of concern associated with · Enhancement of energy efficiency (see section on project processes. For combustion processes, indicator ‘Energy Conservation’); parameters typically include the quality of inputs, such as the · Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of sulfur content of fuel. greenhouse gases; · Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture and · Baseline calculations: Before a project is developed, baseline forestry; air quality monitoring at and in the vicinity of the site should · Promotion, development and increased use of be undertaken to assess background levels of key pollutants, renewable forms of energy; in order to differentiate between existing ambient conditions · Carbon capture and storage technologies;24 and project-related impacts. · Limitation and / or reduction of methane emissions · Monitoring type and frequency: Data on emissions and through recovery and use in waste management, as well ambient air quality generated through the monitoring program as in the production, transport and distribution of energy should be representative of the emissions discharged by the (coal, oil, and gas). project over time. Examples of time-dependent variations in the manufacturing process include batch process Monitoring manufacturing and seasonal process variations. Emissions Emissions and air quality monitoring programs provide information from highly variable processes may need to be sampled that can be used to assess the effectiveness of emissions more frequently or through composite methods. Emissions management strategies. A systematic planning process is monitoring frequency and duration may also range from recommended to ensure that the data collected are adequate for continuous for some combustion process operating their intended purposes (and to avoid collecting unnecessary parameters or inputs (e.g. the quality of fuel) to less frequent, data). This process, sometimes referred to as a data quality monthly, quarterly or yearly stack tests. objectives process, defines the purpose of collecting the data, the · Monitoring locations: Ambient air quality monitoring may consists of off-site or fence line monitoring either by the 23 Carbon financing as a carbon emissions reduction strategy may include the host government-endorsed Clean Development Mechanism or Joint Implementation of project sponsor, the competent government agency, or by the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change. 24 Carbon dioxide capture and storage (CCS) is a process consisting of the collaboration between both. The location of ambient air separation of CO2 from industrial and energy-related sources; transport to a storage location; and long-term isolation from the atmosphere, for example in geological formations, in the ocean, or in mineral carbonates (reaction of CO2 with metal oxides in silicate minerals to produce stable carbonates). It is the object of 25 See, for example, United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance on intensive research worldwide (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA/G-4, (IPCC), Special Report, Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage (2006). EPA/240/B-06/001 February 2006.
APRIL 30, 2007 10 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
quality monitoring stations should be established based on o If Annual Stack Emission Testing demonstrates results the results of scientific methods and mathematical models to consistently and significantly better than the required estimate potential impact to the receiving airshed from an levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can emissions source taking into consideration such aspects as be reduced from annual to every two or three years. the location of potentially affected communities and o Emission Monitoring: None prevailing wind directions. Boilers with capacities between =20 MWth and < 50 MWth
· Sampling and analysis methods: Monitoring programs should o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For apply national or international methods for sample collection gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
and analysis, such as those published by the International calculated based on fuel quality certification (if no SO2 Organization for Standardization,26 the European Committee control equipment is used) for Standardization,27 or the U.S. Environmental Protection o Emission Monitoring: SO2. Plants with SO2 control Agency.28 Sampling should be conducted by, or under, the equipment: Continuous. NOx: Continuous monitoring of supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. combustion parameters. PM: Continuous monitoring of Sampling and analysis Quality Assurance / Quality Control either PM emissions, opacity, or indicative PM (QA/QC) plans should be applied and documented to ensure emissions using combustion parameters / visual that data quality is adequate for the intended data use (e.g., monitoring.
method detection limits are below levels of concern). · Additional recommended monitoring approaches for Monitoring reports should include QA/QC documentation. turbines:
o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx and SO2 (NOx Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions only for gaseous fuel-fired turbines). · Additional recommended monitoring approaches for boilers: o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show Boilers with capacities between =3 MWth and < 20 MWth: constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
calculated based on fuel quality certification if no SO2 reduced from annual to every two or three years. control equipment is used. o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
combustion parameters.SO2: Continuous monitoring if 26 An on-line catalogue of ISO standards relating to the environment, health protection, and safety is available at: SO2 control equipment is used. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/CatalogueListPage.CatalogueList?ICS1=13&ICS2=&ICS 3=&scopelist= · Additional recommended monitoring approaches for 27 An on-line catalogue of European Standards is available at: http://www.cen.eu/catweb/cwen.htm . engines:
28 The National Environmental Methods Index provides a searchable o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx ,SO2 and PM (NOx clearinghouse of U.S. methods and procedures for both regulatory and non- regulatory monitoring purposes for water, sediment, air and tissues, and is only for gaseous fuel-fired diesel engines). available at http://www.nemi.gov/.
APRIL 30, 2007 11 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g. less than 75 percent) better than the required levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be reduced from annual to every two or three years.
o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
combustion parameters. SO2: Continuous monitoring if
SO2 control equipment is used. PM: Continuous monitoring of either PM emissions or indicative PM emissions using operating parameters.
APRIL 30, 2007 12 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.1 – Air Emissions Estimation and Dispersion Modeling Methods
The following is a partial list of documents to aid in the estimation of air emissions from various processes and air dispersion models:
Australian Emission Estimation Technique Manuals http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/
Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook, UN / ECE / EMEP and the European Environment Agency http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm
Emission factors and emission estimation methods, US EPA
Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief
Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised), US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 2005 http://www.epa.gov/scram001/guidance/guide/appw_05.pdf
Frequently Asked Questions, Air Quality Modeling and Assessment Unit (AQMAU), UK Environment Agency http://www.environment- agency.gov.uk/subjects/airquality/236092/?version=1&lang=_e
OECD Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals http://www.olis.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf/
APRIL 30, 2007 13 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2 – Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies
Principal Sources and Issues General Prevention / Process Reduction Gas Control Options Comments Modification Approach Efficiency (%) Condition Particulate Matter (PM) Main sources are the combustion of fossil Fuel switching (e.g. selection of lower sulfur Fabric Filters 99 - 99.7% Dry gas, temp Applicability depends on flue gas properties including temperature, chemical fuels and numerous manufacturing processes fuels) or reducing the amount of fine <400F properties, abrasion and load. Typical air to cloth ratio range of 2.0 to 3.5 cfm/ft2 that collect PM through air extraction and particulates added to a process. ventilation systems. Volcanoes, ocean spray, Achievable outlet concentrations of 23 mg/Nm3 forest fires and blowing dust (most prevalent in dry and semiarid climates) contribute to Electrostatic 97 – 99% Varies Precondition gas to remove large particles. Efficiency dependent on resistivity of background levels. Precipitator (ESP) depending of particle. Achievable outlet concentration of 23 mg/Nm3 particle type
Cyclone 74 – 95% None Most efficient for large particles. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm3
Wet Scrubber 93 – 95% None Wet sludge may be a disposal problem depending on local infrastructure. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm3
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Mainly produced by the combustion of fuels Control system selection is heavily Fuel Switching >90% Alternate fuels may include low sulfur coal, light diesel or natural gas with such as oil and coal and as a by-product from dependent on the inlet concentration. For consequent reduction in particulate emissions related to sulfur in the fuel. Fuel some chemical production or wastewater SO2 concentrations in excess of 10%, the cleaning or beneficiation of fuels prior to combustion is another viable option but treatment processes. stream is passed through an acid plant not may have economic consequences. only to lower the SO2 emissions but also to
generate high grade sulfur for sale. Levels Sorbent Injection 30% - 70% Calcium or lime is injected into the flue gas and the SO2 is adsorbed onto the below 10% are not rich enough for this sorbent process and should therefore utilize absorption or ‘scrubbing,’ where SO2 Dry Flue Gas 70%-90% Can be regenerable or throwaway. molecules are captured into a liquid phase Desulfurization or adsorption, where SO2 molecules are captured on the surface of a solid Wet Flue Gas >90% Produces gypsum as a by-product adsorbent. Desulfurization
APRIL 30, 2007 14 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2: Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies (continued)
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Percent Reduction by Fuel Type Comments Combustion modification Associated with combustion of fuel. Coal Oil Gas These modifications are capable of reducing NOx emissions by 50 (Illustrative of boilers) May occur in several forms of nitrogen to 95%. The method of combustion control used depends on the oxide; namely nitric oxide (NO), Low-excess-air firing 10–30 10–30 10–30 type of boiler and the method of firing fuel. nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and nitrous Staged Combustion 20–50 20–50 20–50 oxide (N2O), which is also a greenhouse gas. The term NOx Flue Gas Recirculation N/A 20–50 20–50 serves as a composite between NO and NO2 and emissions are usually Water/Steam Injection N/A 10–50 N/A. reported as NOx. Here the NO is multiplied by the ratio of molecular Low-NOx Burners 30–40 30–40 30–40 weights of NO to NO and added to 2 Flue Gas Treatment Coal Oil Gas Flue gas treatment is more effective in reducing NOx emissions the NO2 emissions. than are combustion controls. Techniques can be classified as Means of reducing NOx emissions are SCR, SNCR, and adsorption. SCR involves the injection of based on the modification of operating Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) 60–90 60–90 60–90 ammonia as a reducing agent to convert NOx to nitrogen in the conditions such as minimizing the presence of a catalyst in a converter upstream of the air heater. resident time at peak temperatures, Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction N/A 30–70 30–70 Generally, some ammonia slips through and is part of the reducing the peak temperatures by (SNCR) emissions. SNCR also involves the injection of ammonia or urea increasing heat transfer rates or based products without the presence of a catalyst. minimizing the availability of oxygen.
Note: Compiled by IFC based on inputs from technical experts.
APRIL 30, 2007 15 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.3 - Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) Annex 1.1.4 - Examples of VOC Emissions Controls Stack Height (Based on United States 40 CFR, part 51.100 (ii)).
Approximate Control HG = H + 1.5L; where Equipment Type Modification Efficiency HG = GEP stack height measured from the ground level (%)
elevation at the base of the stack Seal-less design 10029 H = Height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the stack. Closed-vent system 9030 Pumps L = Lesser dimension, height (h) or width (w), of nearby Dual mechanical seal with barrier fluid structures maintained at a higher 100 “Nearby structures” = Structures within/touching a radius pressure than the pumped fluid of 5L but less than 800 m. Closed-vent system 90
Dual mechanical seal Compressors with barrier fluid maintained at a higher 100 pressure than the Stack compressed gas Closed-vent system Variable31 Pressure Relief Devices Projected width (w) Rupture disk assembly 100
Valves Seal-less design 100
Connectors Weld together 100 1.5*L H G Blind, cap, plug, or Open-ended Lines 100 second valve
h Sampling Connections Closed-loop sampling 100 H Note: Examples of technologies are provided for illustrative purposes. The availability and applicability of any particular technology will vary Maximum 5*L depending on manufacturer specifications.
29 Seal-less equipment can be a large source of emissions in the event of equipment failure. 30 Actual efficiency of a closed-vent system depends on percentage of vapors collected and efficiency of control device to which the vapors are routed. 31 Control efficiency of closed vent-systems installed on a pressure relief device may be lower than other closed-vent systems.
APRIL 30, 2007 16 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL
AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.5 - Fugitive PM Emissions Controls
Control Control Type Efficiency
Chemical Stabilization 0% - 98% Hygroscopic salts 60% - 96% Bitumens/adhesives Surfactants 0% - 68%
Wet Suppression – Watering 12% - 98%
Speed Reduction 0% - 80%
Traffic Reduction Not quantified
Paving (Asphalt / Concrete) 85% - 99% Covering with Gravel, Slag, or "Road 30% - 50% Carpet" Vacuum Sweeping 0% - 58%
Water Flushing/Broom Sweeping 0% - 96%
APRIL 30, 2007 17
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
1.2 Energy Conservation should also evaluate energy conservation opportunities arising Applicability and Approach ...... 18 from manufacturing process modifications. Energy Management Programs...... 18 Energy Efficiency...... 18 Process Heating...... 19 Energy Management Programs Heating Load Reduction ...... 19 Energy management programs should include the following Heat Distribution Systems...... 19 elements: Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements20 Process Cooling...... 20 · Identification, and regular measurement and reporting of Load Reduction...... 21 principal energy flows within a facility at unit process level Energy Conversion...... 21 Refrigerant Compression Efficiency ...... 23 · Preparation of mass and energy balance; Refrigeration System Auxiliaries...... 23 · Definition and regular review of energy performance Compressed Air Systems...... 24 targets, which are adjusted to account for changes in major Load reduction ...... 24 Distribution...... 24 influencing factors on energy use
· Regular comparison and monitoring of energy flows with Applicability and Approach performance targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce energy use This guideline applies to facilities or projects that consume energy in process heating and cooling; process and auxiliary · Regular review of targets, which may include comparison with benchmark data, to confirm that targets are set at systems, such as motors, pumps, and fans; compressed air appropriate levels systems and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems (HVAC); and lighting systems. It complements the industry- Energy Efficiency specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector For any energy-using system, a systematic analysis of energy Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines by efficiency improvements and cost reduction opportunities should providing information about common techniques for energy include a hierarchical examination of opportunities to: conservation that may be applied to a range of industry sectors.
· Demand/Load Side Management by reducing loads on the Energy management at the facility level should be viewed in the energy system context of overall consumption patterns, including those · Supply Side Management by: associated with production processes and supporting utilities, as Reduce losses in energy distribution well as overall impacts associated with emissions from power o Improve energy conversion efficiency sources. The following section provides guidance on energy o Exploit energy purchasing opportunities management with a focus on common utility systems often o Use lower-carbon fuels representing technical and financially feasible opportunities for o improvement in energy conservation. However, operations
APRIL 30, 2007 18
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
Common opportunities in each of these areas are summarized · Review opportunities to schedule work flow to limit the below.32 need for process reheating between stages · Operate furnaces/ovens at slight positive pressure, and Process Heating maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the heated Process heating is vital to many manufacturing processes, system, thereby reducing the energy required to heat including heating for fluids, calcining, drying, heat treating, metal unnecessary air to system operating temperature heating, melting, melting agglomeration, curing, and forming33. · Reduce radiant heat losses by sealing structural openings and keep viewing ports closed when not in use In process heating systems, a system heat and mass balance · Where possible, use the system for long runs close to or at will show how much of the system’s energy input provides true operating capacity process heating, and quantify fuel used to satisfy energy losses · Consider use of high emissivity coatings of high caused by excessive parasitic loads, distribution, or conversion temperature insulation, and consequent reduction in losses. Examination of savings opportunities should be directed process temperature by the results of the heat and mass balance, though the · Near net weight and shape heat designs following techniques are often valuable and cost-effective. · Robust Quality assurance on input material Heating Load Reduction · Robust Scheduled maintenance programs
· Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat losses through Heat Distribution Systems furnace/oven etc. structure Heat distribution in process heating applications typically takes · Recover heat from hot process or exhaust streams to place through steam, hot water, or thermal fluid systems. reduce system loads Losses can be reduced through the following actions: · In intermittently-heated systems, consider use of low thermal mass insulation to reduce energy required to heat · Promptly repair distribution system leaks the system structure to operating temperature · Avoid steam leaks despite a perceived need to get steam · Control process temperature and other parameters through the turbine. Electricity purchase is usually cheaper accurately to avoid, for example, overheating or overdrying overall, especially when the cost to treat turbine-quality boiler feed water is included. If the heat-power ratio of the · Examine opportunities to use low weight and/or low thermal mass product carriers, such as heated shapers, distribution process is less than that of power systems, kiln cars etc. opportunities should be considered to increase the ratio; for example, by using low-pressure steam to drive absorption cooling systems rather than using electrically-driven vapor- 32 Additional guidance on energy efficiency is available from sources such as Natural Resources Canada (NRCAN compression systems. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new- buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20); the European Union (EUROPA. · Regularly verify correct operation of steam traps in steam http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm ), and United States Department of Energy (US DOE, systems, and ensure that traps are not bypassed. Since http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html).
33 US DOE. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html
APRIL 30, 2007 19
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
steam traps typically last approximately 5 years, 20% · Maintain clean heat transfer surfaces; in steam boilers, flue should be replaced or repaired annually gases should be no more than 20 K above steam · Insulate distribution system vessels, such as hot wells and temperature) de-aerators, in steam systems and thermal fluid or hot · In steam boiler systems, use economizers to recover heat water storage tanks from flue gases to pre-heat boiler feed water or combustion · Insulate all steam, condensate, hot water and thermal fluid air distribution pipework, down to and including 1” (25 mm) · Consider reverse osmosis or electrodialysis feed water diameter pipe, in addition to insulating all hot valves and treatment to minimize the requirement for boiler blowdown flanges · Adopt automatic (continuous) boiler blowdown · In steam systems, return condensate to the boiler house · Recover heat from blowdown systems through flash steam for re-use, since condensate is expensive boiler-quality recovery or feed-water preheat water and valuable beyond its heat content alone · Do not supply excessive quantities of steam to the de- · Use flash steam recovery systems to reduce losses due to aerator evaporation of high-pressure condensate · With fired heaters, consider opportunities to recover heat to · Consider steam expansion through a back-pressure turbine combustion air through the use of recuperative or rather than reducing valve stations regenerative burner systems · Eliminate distribution system losses by adopting point-of- · For systems operating for extended periods (> 6000 use heating systems hours/year), cogeneration of electrical power, heat and /or cooling can be cost effective Energy Conversion System Efficiency · Oxy Fuel burners Improvements · Oxygen enrichment/injection The following efficiency opportunities should be examined for · Use of turbolators in boilers process furnaces or ovens, and utility systems, such as boilers · Sizing design and use of multiple boilers for different load and fluid heaters: configurations · Regularly monitor CO, oxygen or CO2 content of flue · Fuel quality control/fuel blending gases to verify that combustion systems are using the minimum practical excess air volumes Process Cooling · Consider combustion automation using oxygen-trim The general methodology outlined above should be applied to controls process cooling systems. Commonly used and cost-effective · Minimize the number of boilers or heaters used to meet measures to improve process cooling efficiency are described loads. It is typically more efficient to run one boiler at 90% below. of capacity than two at 45%. Minimize the number of boilers kept at hot–standby · Use flue dampers to eliminate ventilation losses from hot boilers held at standby
APRIL 30, 2007 20
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
Load Reduction o Planting trees as thermal shields around buildings Installing timers and/or thermostats and/or · Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat gains through o cooling system structure and to below-ambient temperature enthalpy-based control systems 34 refrigerant pipes and vessels o Installing ventilation heat recovery systems · Control process temperature accurately to avoid Energy Conversion overcooling The efficiency of refrigeration service provision is normally · Operate cooling tunnels at slight positive pressure and discussed in terms of Coefficient of Performance (“COP”), which maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the cooled is the ratio of cooling duty divided by input power. COP is system, thus reducing the energy required to cool this maximized by effective refrigeration system design and unnecessary air to system operating temperature increased refrigerant compression efficiency, as well as · Examine opportunities to pre-cool using heat recovery to a minimization of the temperature difference through which the process stream requiring heating, or by using a higher system works and of auxiliary loads (i.e. those in addition to temperature cooling utility compressor power demand) used to operate the refrigeration · In cold and chill stores, minimize heat gains to the cooled system. space by use of air curtains, entrance vestibules, or rapidly
opening/closing doors. Where conveyors carry products System Design into chilled areas, minimize the area of transfer openings, · If process temperatures are above ambient for all, or part, for example, by using strip curtains of the year, use of ambient cooling systems, such as · Quantify and minimize “incidental” cooling loads, for provided by cooling towers or dry air coolers, may be example, those due to evaporator fans, other machinery, appropriate, perhaps supplemented by refrigeration in defrost systems and lighting in cooled spaces, circulation summer conditions. fans in cooling tunnels, or secondary refrigerant pumps · Most refrigeration systems are electric-motor driven vapor (e.g. chilled water, brines, glycols) compression systems using positive displacement or · Do not use refrigeration for auxiliary cooling duties, such as centrifugal compressors. The remainder of this guideline compressor cylinder head or oil cooling relates primarily to vapor-compression systems. However, · While not a thermal load, ensure there is no gas bypass of when a cheap or free heat source is available (e.g. waste the expansion valve since this imposes compressor load heat from an engine-driven generator—low-pressure steam while providing little effective cooling · In the case of air conditioning applications, energy efficiency techniques include: 34 More information on HVAC energy efficiency can be found at the British Columbia Building Corporation (Woolliams, 2002. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategi o Placing air intakes and air-conditioning units in cool, es_guide.pdf), NRCAN’s EnerGuide (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N) shaded locations and NRCAN’s Energy Star Programs (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&pri o Improving building insulation including seals, vents, ntview=N#AC ), and the US Energy Star Program windows, and doors (http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines).
APRIL 30, 2007 21
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
that has passed through a back-pressure turbine), temperature is indicative of an appropriately sized absorption refrigeration may be appropriate. evaporator. When cooling liquids, 2K between leaving · Exploit high cooling temperature range: precooling by liquid and evaporating temperatures can be achieved, ambient and/or ‘high temperature’ refrigeration before final though a 4K difference is generally indicative of a cooling can reduce refrigeration capital and running costs. generously-sized evaporator. High cooling temperature range also provides an · Keep the evaporator clean. When cooling air, ensure opportunity for countercurrent (cascade) cooling, which correct defrost operation. In liquid cooling, monitor reduces refrigerant flow needs. refrigerant/process temperature differences and compare · Keep ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ fluids separate, for example, do not with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger mix water leaving the chiller with water returning from contamination by scale or oil. cooling circuits. · Ensure oil is regularly removed from the evaporator, and · In low-temperature systems where high temperature that oil additions and removals balance. differences are inevitable, consider two-stage or compound · Avoid the use of back-pressure valves. compression, or economized screw compressors, rather · Adjust expansion valves to minimize suction superheat than single-stage compression. consistent with avoidance of liquid carry-over to compressors. Minimizing Temperature Differences · Ensure that an appropriate refrigerant charge volume is A vapor-compression refrigeration system raises the present. temperature of the refrigerant from somewhat below the lowest process temperature (the evaporating temperature) to provide Reducing Condensing Temperature process cooling, to a higher temperature (the condensing · Consider whether to use air-cooled or evaporation-based temperature), somewhat above ambient, to facilitate heat cooling (e.g. evaporative or water cooled condensers and rejection to the air or cooling water systems. Increasing cooling towers). Air-cooled evaporators usually have evaporating temperature typically increases compressor cooling higher condensing temperatures, hence higher compressor capacity without greatly affecting power consumption. Reducing energy use, and auxiliary power consumption, especially in condensing temperature increases evaporator cooling capacity low humidity climates. If a wet system is used, ensure and substantially reduces compressor power consumption. adequate treatment to prevent growth of legionella bacteria. Elevating Evaporating Temperature · Whichever basic system is chosen, select a relatively large · Select a large evaporator to permit relatively low condenser to minimize differences between condensing temperature differences between process and evaporating and the heat sink temperatures. Condensing temperatures temperatures. Ensure that energy use of auxiliaries (e.g. with air cooled or evaporative condensers should not be evaporator fans) does not outweigh compression savings. more than 10K above design ambient condition, and a 4K In air-cooling applications, a design temperature difference approach in a liquid-cooled condenser is possible. of 6-10 K between leaving air temperature and evaporating
APRIL 30, 2007 22
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
· Avoid accumulation of non-condensable gases in the Refrigerant Compression Efficiency condenser system. Consider the installation of refrigerated · Some refrigerant compressors and chillers are more non-condensable purgers, particularly for systems efficient than others offered for the same duty. Before operating below atmospheric pressure. purchase, identify the operating conditions under which the · Keep condensers clean and free from scale. Monitor compressor or chiller is likely to operate for substantial refrigerant/ambient temperature differences and compare parts of its annual cycle. Check operating efficiency under with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger these conditions, and ask for estimates of annual running contamination. cost. Note that refrigeration and HVAC systems rarely run · Avoid liquid backup, which restricts heat transfer area in for extended periods at design conditions, which are condensers. This can be caused by installation errors such deliberately extreme. Operational efficiency under the most as concentric reducers in horizontal liquid refrigerant pipes, commonly occurring off-design conditions is likely to be or “up and over” liquid lines leading from condensers. most important. · In multiple condenser applications, refrigerant liquid lines · Compressors lose efficiency when unloaded. Avoid should be connected via drop-leg traps to the main liquid operation of multiple compressors at part-load conditions. refrigerant line to ensure that hot gases flow to all Note that package chillers can gain coefficient of condensers. performance (COP) when slightly unloaded, as loss of · Avoid head pressure control to the extent possible. Head compressor efficiency can be outweighed by the benefits of pressure control maintains condensing temperature at, or reduced condensing and elevated evaporating near, design levels. It therefore prevents reduction in temperature. However, it is unlikely to be energy efficient compressor power consumption, which accompanies to operate a single compressor-chiller at less than 50% of reduced condensing temperature, by restricting condenser capacity. capacity (usually by switching off the condenser, or cooling · Consider turndown efficiency when specifying chillers. tower fans, or restricting cooling water flow) under Variable speed control or multiple compressor chillers can conditions of less severe than design load or ambient be highly efficient at part loads. temperature conditions. Head pressure is often kept higher · Use of thermal storage systems (e.g., ice storage) can than necessary to facilitate hot gas defrost or adequate avoid the need for close load-tracking and, hence, can liquid refrigerant circulation. Use of electronic rather than avoid part-loaded compressor operation. thermostatic expansion valves, and liquid refrigerant pumps can permit effective refrigerant circulation at much Refrigeration System Auxiliaries reduced condensing temperatures. Many refrigeration system auxiliaries (e.g. evaporator fans and · Site condensers and cooling towers with adequate spacing chilled water pumps) contribute to refrigeration system load, so so as to prevent recirculation of hot air into the tower. reductions in their energy use have a double benefit. General energy saving techniques for pumps and fans, listed in the next section of these guidelines, should be applied to refrigeration auxiliaries.
APRIL 30, 2007 23
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
Additionally, auxiliary use can be reduced by avoidance of part- o Implement systems for systematic identification and load operation and in plant selection (e.g. axial fan evaporative repair of leaks condensers generally use less energy than equivalent o All condensate drain points should be trapped. Do not centrifugal fan towers). leave drain valves continuously ‘cracked open’ o Train workers never to direct compressed air against Under extreme off-design conditions, reduction in duty of cooling their bodies or clothing to dust or cool themselves system fans and pumps can be worthwhile, usually when the down. lowest possible condensing pressure has been achieved. Distribution Compressed Air Systems · Monitor pressure losses in filters and replace as Compressed air is the most commonly found utility service in appropriate industry, yet in many compressed air systems, the energy · Use adequately sized distribution pipework designed to contained in compressed air delivered to the user is often 10% minimize pressure losses or less of energy used in air compression. Savings are often possible through the following techniques:
Load reduction · Examine each true user of compressed air to identify the air volume needed and the pressure at which this should be delivered. · Do not mix high volume low pressure and low volume high pressure loads. Decentralize low volume high-pressure applications or provide dedicated low-pressure utilities, for example, by using fans rather than compressed air. · Review air use reduction opportunities, for example:
o Use air amplifier nozzles rather than simple open-pipe compressed air jets o Consider whether compressed air is needed at all o Where air jets are required intermittently (e.g. to propel product), consider operating the jet via a process-related solenoid valve, which opens only when air is required o Use manual or automatically operated valves to isolate air supply to individual machines or zones that are not in continuous use
APRIL 30, 2007 24
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality · Understand the quality, quantity, frequency and sources of Applicability and Approach...... 25 liquid effluents in its installations. This includes knowledge General Liquid Effluent Quality...... 26 about the locations, routes and integrity of internal drainage Discharge to Surface Water...... 26 Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems...... 26 systems and discharge points Land Application of Treated Effluent...... 27 · Plan and implement the segregation of liquid effluents Septic Systems ...... 27 principally along industrial, utility, sanitary, and stormwater Wastewater Management...... 27 Industrial Wastewater ...... 27 categories, in order to limit the volume of water requiring Sanitary Wastewater ...... 29 specialized treatment. Characteristics of individual streams Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations .30 may also be used for source segregation. Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations..30 Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater · Identify opportunities to prevent or reduce wastewater Treatment Operations...... 30 pollution through such measures as recycle/reuse within their Monitoring...... 30 facility, input substitution, or process modification (e.g. change of technology or operating conditions/modes). Applicability and Approach · Assess compliance of their wastewater discharges with the This guideline applies to projects that have either direct or indirect applicable: (i) discharge standard (if the wastewater is discharge of process wastewater, wastewater from utility discharged to a surface water or sewer), and (ii) water quality operations or stormwater to the environment. These guidelines standard for a specific reuse (e.g. if the wastewater is reused are also applicable to industrial discharges to sanitary sewers that for irrigation). discharge to the environment without any treatment. Process wastewater may include contaminated wastewater from utility Additionally, the generation and discharge of wastewater of any operations, stormwater, and sanitary sewage. It provides type should be managed through a combination of: information on common techniques for wastewater management, · Water use efficiency to reduce the amount of wastewater water conservation, and reuse that can be applied to a wide range generation of industry sectors. This guideline is meant to be complemented · Process modification, including waste minimization, and by the industry-specific effluent guidelines presented in the reducing the use of hazardous materials to reduce the load of Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) pollutants requiring treatment Guidelines. Projects with the potential to generate process · If needed, application of wastewater treatment techniques to wastewater, sanitary (domestic) sewage, or stormwater should further reduce the load of contaminants prior to discharge, incorporate the necessary precautions to avoid, minimize, and taking into consideration potential impacts of cross-media control adverse impacts to human health, safety, or the transfer of contaminants during treatment (e.g., from water to environment. air or land) In the context of their overall ESHS management system, facilities should:
APRIL 30, 2007 25
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
When wastewater treatment is required prior to discharge, the the receiving water into consideration, should also influence the level of treatment should be based on: acceptable pollution loadings and effluent discharge quality. Additional considerations that should be included in the setting of · Whether wastewater is being discharged to a sanitary sewer project-specific performance levels for wastewater effluents system, or to surface waters include: · National and local standards as reflected in permit requirements and sewer system capacity to convey and treat · Process wastewater treatment standards consistent with wastewater if discharge is to sanitary sewer applicable Industry Sector EHS Guidelines. Projects for · Assimilative capacity of the receiving water for the load of which there are no industry-specific guidelines should contaminant being discharged wastewater if discharge is to reference the effluent quality guidelines of an industry sector surface water with suitably analogous processes and effluents; · Intended use of the receiving water body (e.g. as a source of · Compliance with national or local standards for sanitary drinking water, recreation, irrigation, navigation, or other) wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the indicative · Presence of sensitive receptors (e.g., endangered species) guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
or habitats discharges shown in Table 1.3.1 below ; · Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) for the relevant · Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result industry sector in an increase greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which General Liquid Effluent Quality takes into account ambient water quality, receiving water use and assimilative capacity among other considerations. Discharge to Surface Water Discharges of process wastewater, sanitary wastewater, Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems wastewater from utility operations or stormwater to surface water Discharges of industrial wastewater, sanitary wastewater, should not result in contaminant concentrations in excess of local wastewater from utility operations or stormwater into public or ambient water quality criteria or, in the absence of local criteria, private wastewater treatment systems should: other sources of ambient water quality.35 Receiving water use36 and assimilative capacity37, taking other sources of discharges to · Meet the pretreatment and monitoring requirements of the sewer treatment system into which it discharges.
· Not interfere, directly or indirectly, with the operation and 35 An example is the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/wqcriteria.html maintenance of the collection and treatment systems, or
36 Examples of receiving water uses as may be designated by local authorities pose a risk to worker health and safety, or adversely impact include: drinking water (with some level of treatment), recreation, aquaculture, irrigation, general aquatic life, ornamental, and navigation. Examples of health- based guideline values for receiving waters include World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines for recreational use (http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/guidelines/en/index.html) the area or region. A seasonally representative baseline assessment of ambient 37 water quality may be required for use with established scientific methods and The assimilative capacity of the receiving water body depends on numerous mathematical models to estimate potential impact to the receiving water from an factors including, but not limited to, the total volume of water, flow rate, flushing effluent source. rate of the water body and the loading of pollutants from other effluent sources in
APRIL 30, 2007 26
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
characteristics of residuals from wastewater treatment · Properly designed and installed in accordance with local operations. regulations and guidance to prevent any hazard to public · Be discharged into municipal or centralized wastewater health or contamination of land, surface or groundwater. treatment systems that have adequate capacity to meet local · Well maintained to allow effective operation. regulatory requirements for treatment of wastewater · Installed in areas with sufficient soil percolation for the design generated from the project. Pretreatment of wastewater to wastewater loading rate. meet regulatory requirements before discharge from the · Installed in areas of stable soils that are nearly level, well project site is required if the municipal or centralized drained, and permeable, with enough separation between the wastewater treatment system receiving wastewater from the drain field and the groundwater table or other receiving project does not have adequate capacity to maintain waters. regulatory compliance. Wastewater Management Land Application of Treated Effluent Wastewater management includes water conservation, The quality of treated process wastewater, wastewater from utility wastewater treatment, stormwater management, and wastewater operations or stormwater discharged on land, including wetlands, and water quality monitoring. should be established based on local regulatory requirements. . Where land is used as part of the treatment system and the Industrial Wastewater ultimate receptor is surface water, water quality guidelines for Industrial wastewater generated from industrial operations surface water discharges specific to the industry sector process includes process wastewater, wastewater from utility operations,, should apply.38 Potential impact on soil, groundwater, and surface runoff from process and materials staging areas, and water, in the context of protection, conservation and long term miscellaneous activities including wastewater from laboratories, sustainability of water and land resources should be assessed equipment maintenance shops, etc.. The pollutants in an industrial when land is used as part of any wastewater treatment system. wastewater may include acids or bases (exhibited as low or high pH), soluble organic chemicals causing depletion of dissolved Septic Systems oxygen, suspended solids, nutrients (phosphorus, nitrogen), Septic systems are commonly used for treatment and disposal of heavy metals (e.g. cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, domestic sanitary sewage in areas with no sewerage collection nickel, zinc), cyanide, toxic organic chemicals, oily materials, and networks, Septic systems should only be used for treatment of volatile materials. , as well as from thermal characteristics of the sanitary sewage, and unsuitable for industrial wastewater discharge (e.g., elevated temperature). Transfer of pollutants to treatment. When septic systems are the selected form of another phase, such as air, soil, or the sub-surface, should be wastewater disposal and treatment, they should be: minimized through process and engineering controls.
38 Additional guidance on water quality considerations for land application is Process Wastewater – – Examples of treatment approaches available in the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture typically used in the treatment of industrial wastewater are http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html summarized in Annex 1.3.1. While the choice of treatment
APRIL 30, 2007 27
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP technology is driven by wastewater characteristics, the actual account ambient water quality, receiving water use, potential performance of this technology depends largely on the adequacy receptors and assimilative capacity among other of its design, equipment selection, as well as operation and considerations; maintenance of its installed facilities. Adequate resources are · Minimizing use of antifouling and corrosion inhibiting required for proper operation and maintenance of a treatment chemicals by ensuring appropriate depth of water intake and facility, and performance is strongly dependent on the technical use of screens. Least hazardous alternatives should be used ability and training of its operational staff. One or more treatment with regards to toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and technologies may be used to achieve the desired discharge bioaccumulation potential. Dose applied should accord with quality and to maintain consistent compliance with regulatory local regulatory requirements and manufacturer requirements. The design and operation of the selected recommendations; wastewater treatment technologies should avoid uncontrolled air · Testing for residual biocides and other pollutants of concern emissions of volatile chemicals from wastewaters. Residuals from should be conducted to determine the need for dose industrial wastewater treatment operations should be disposed in adjustments or treatment of cooling water prior to discharge. compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health Stormwater Management - Stormwater includes any surface and safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water runoff and flows resulting from precipitation, drainage or other and land resources. sources. Typically stormwater runoff contains suspended sediments, metals, petroleum hydrocarbons, Polycyclic Aromatic Wastewater from Utilities Operations - Utility operations such Hydrocarbons (PAHs), coliform, etc. Rapid runoff, even of as cooling towers and demineralization systems may result in high uncontaminated stormwater, also degrades the quality of the rates of water consumption, as well as the potential release of receiving water by eroding stream beds and banks. In order to high temperature water containing high dissolved solids, residues reduce the need for stormwater treatment, the following principles of biocides, residues of other cooling system anti-fouling agents, should be applied: etc. Recommended water management strategies for utility operations include: · Stormwater should be separated from process and sanitary wastewater streams in order to reduce the volume of · Adoption of water conservation opportunities for facility wastewater to be treated prior to discharge cooling systems as provided in the Water Conservation · Surface runoff from process areas or potential sources of section below; contamination should be prevented · Use of heat recovery methods (also energy efficiency · Where this approach is not practical, runoff from process and improvements) or other cooling methods to reduce the storage areas should be segregated from potentially less temperature of heated water prior to discharge to ensure the contaminated runoff discharge water temperature does not result in an increase · Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at the edge of a should be minimized (e.g. by minimizing the area of scientifically established mixing zone which takes into impermeable surfaces) and the peak discharge rate should
APRIL 30, 2007 28
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
be reduced (e.g. by using vegetated swales and retention medical infirmaries, water softening etc. may also be discharged ponds); to the sanitary wastewater treatment system. Recommended · Where stormwater treatment is deemed necessary to protect sanitary wastewater management strategies include: the quality of receiving water bodies, priority should be given to managing and treating the first flush of stormwater runoff · Segregation of wastewater streams to ensure compatibility with selected treatment option (e.g. septic system which can where the majority of potential contaminants tend to be only accept domestic sewage); present; · Segregation and pretreatment of oil and grease containing · When water quality criteria allow, stormwater should be effluents (e.g. use of a grease trap) prior to discharge into managed as a resource, either for groundwater recharge or sewer systems; for meeting water needs at the facility; · If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to · Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed surface water, treatment to meet national or local standards and maintained as appropriate at refueling facilities, for sanitary wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment indicative guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater areas. discharges shown in Table 1.3.1; · Sludge from stormwater catchments or collection and · If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to treatment systems may contain elevated levels of pollutants either a septic system, or where land is used as part of the and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be treatment system, treatment to meet applicable national or local standards for sanitary wastewater discharges is consistent with protection of public health and safety, and required. conservation and long term sustainability of water and land resources. · Sludge from sanitary wastewater treatment systems should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory Sanitary Wastewater requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be Sanitary wastewater from industrial facilities may include effluents consistent with protection of public health and safety, and from domestic sewage, food service, and laundry facilities serving conservation and long term sustainability of water and land site employees. Miscellaneous wastewater from laboratories, resources.
APRIL 30, 2007 29
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
or a non-hazardous waste and managed accordingly as described Table 1.3.1 Indicative Values for Treated in the Waste Management section of this document. Sanitary Sewage Dischargesa Pollutants Units Guideline Value Occupational Health and Safety Issues in pH pH 6 – 9 Wastewater Treatment Operations Wastewater treatment facility operators may be exposed to BOD mg/l 30 physical, chemical, and biological hazards depending on the COD mg/l 125 design of the facilities and the types of wastewater effluents Total nitrogen mg/l 10 managed. Examples of these hazards include the potential for Total phosphorus mg/l 2 trips and falls into tanks, confined space entries for maintenance
Oil and grease mg/l 10 operations, and inhalation of VOCs, bioaerosols, and methane, contact with pathogens and vectors, and use of potentially Total suspended solids mg/l 50 hazardous chemicals, including chlorine, sodium and calcium Total coliform bacteria MPNb / 100 ml 400a hypochlorite, and ammonia. Detailed recommendations for the Notes: a Not applicable to centralized, municipal, wastewater treatment systems management of occupational health and safety issues are which are included in EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation. b MPN = Most Probable Number presented in the relevant section of this document. Additional guidance specifically applicable to wastewater treatment systems Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation. Air emissions from wastewater treatment operations may include hydrogen sulfide, methane, ozone (in the case of ozone Monitoring disinfection), volatile organic compounds (e.g., chloroform A wastewater and water quality monitoring program with adequate generated from chlorination activities and other volatile organic resources and management oversight should be developed and compounds (VOCs) from industrial wastewater), gaseous or implemented to meet the objective(s) of the monitoring program. volatile chemicals used for disinfection processes (e.g., chlorine The wastewater and water quality monitoring program should and ammonia), and bioaerosols. Odors from treatment facilities consider the following elements: can also be a nuisance to workers and the surrounding community. Recommendations for the management of emissions · Monitoring parameters: The parameters selected for are presented in the Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality monitoring should be indicative of the pollutants of concern section of this document and in the EHS Guidelines for Water and from the process, and should include parameters that are Sanitation. regulated under compliance requirements;
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations · Monitoring type and frequency: Wastewater monitoring Sludge from a waste treatment plant needs to be evaluated on a should take into consideration the discharge characteristics case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous from the process over time. Monitoring of discharges from processes with batch manufacturing or seasonal process variations should take into consideration of time-dependent
APRIL 30, 2007 30
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
variations in discharges and, therefore, is more complex than monitoring of continuous discharges. Effluents from highly variable processes may need to be sampled more frequently or through composite methods. Grab samples or, if automated equipment permits, composite samples may offer more insight on average concentrations of pollutants over a 24-hour period. Composite samplers may not be appropriate where analytes of concern are short-lived (e.g., quickly degraded or volatile).
· Monitoring locations: The monitoring location should be selected with the objective of providing representative monitoring data. Effluent sampling stations may be located at the final discharge, as well as at strategic upstream points prior to merging of different discharges. Process discharges should not be diluted prior or after treatment with the objective of meeting the discharge or ambient water quality standards.
· Data quality: Monitoring programs should apply internationally approved methods for sample collection, preservation and analysis. Sampling should be conducted by or under the supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. Sampling and Analysis Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) plans should be prepared and, implemented. QA/QC documentation should be included in monitoring reports.
APRIL 30, 2007 31
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.3.1 - Examples of Industrial Wastewater Treatment Approaches
Pollutant/Parameter Control Options / Principle Common End of Pipe Control Technology pH Chemical, Equalization Acid/Base addition, Flow equalization Oil and Grease / TPH Phase separation Dissolved Air Floatation, oil water separator, grease trap TSS - Settleable Settling, Size Exclusion Sedimentation basin, clarifier, centrifuge, screens Floatation, Filtration - traditional and Dissolved air floatation, Multimedia filter, sand filter, fabric filter, TSS - Non-Settleable tangential ultrafiltration, microfiltration Hi - BOD (> 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Anaerobic Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
Lo - BOD (< 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Aerobic, Facultative Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid Oxidation, Adsorption, Size COD - Non-Biodegradable Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Membranes Exclusion Metals - Particulate and Coagulation, flocculation, Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential Soluble precipitation, size exclusion Coagulation, flocculation, Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential, Chemical Inorganics / Non-metals precipitation, size exclusion, oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Reverse Osmosis, Oxidation, Adsorption Evaporation Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Biological : Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid; Chemical Organics - VOCs and SVOCs Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon Emissions – Odors and Capture – Active or Passive; Biological : Attached growth; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, VOCs Biological; Adsorption, Oxidation Activated Carbon Biological Nutrient Removal, Aerobic/Anoxic biological treatment, chemical hydrolysis and air Nutrients Chemical, Physical, Adsorption stripping, chlorination, ion exchange Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Color Biological Aerobic, Chemical oxidation, Activated Carbon Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation Temperature Evaporative Cooling Surface Aerators, Flow Equalization TDS Concentration, Size Exclusion Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
Active Ingredients/Emerging Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Ion Contaminants Exclusion, Concentration Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization
Adsorption,Size Exclusion, Radionuclides Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization Concentration Pathogens Disinfection, Sterilization Chlorine, Ozone, Peroxide, UV, Thermal Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Evaporation, Toxicity Exclusion, Concentration crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
APRIL 30, 2007 32
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
1.4 Water Conservation
Applicability and Approach ...... 33 Water Monitoring and Management Water Monitoring and Management...... 33 Process Water Reuse and Recycling...... 33 The essential elements of a water management program Building Facility Operations ...... 34 involve: Cooling Systems...... 34 Heating Systems...... 34 · Identification, regular measurement, and recording of principal flows within a facility; Applicability and Approach · Definition and regular review of performance targets, which Water conservation programs should be implemented are adjusted to account for changes in major factors commensurate with the magnitude and cost of water use. affecting water use (e.g. industrial production rate); These programs should promote the continuous reduction in · Regular comparison of water flows with performance water consumption and achieve savings in the water targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce pumping, treatment and disposal costs. Water conservation water use. measures may include water monitoring/management Water measurement (metering) should emphasize areas of techniques; process and cooling/heating water recycling, greatest water use. Based on review of metering data, reuse, and other techniques; and sanitary water conservation ‘unaccounted’ use–indicating major leaks at industrial facilities– techniques. could be identified.
General recommendations include: Process Water Reuse and Recycling
· Storm/Rainwater harvesting and use Opportunities for water savings in industrial processes are highly industry-specific. However, the following techniques have · Zero discharge design/Use of treated waste water to be included in project design processes all been used successfully, and should be considered in conjunction with the development of the metering system · Use of localized recirculation systems in plant/facility/shops (as opposed to centralized described above. recirculation system), with provision only for makeup · Washing Machines: Many washing machines use large water quantities of hot water. Use can increase as nozzles · Use of dry process technologies e.g. dry quenching become enlarged due to repeated cleaning and /or wear. · Process water system pressure management Monitor machine water use, compare with specification, · Project design to have measures for adequate water and replace nozzles when water and heat use reaches collection, spill control and leakage control system levels warranting such work.
· Water reuse: Common water reuse applications include countercurrent rinsing, for example in multi-stage washing
APRIL 30, 2007 33
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
and rinsing processes, or reusing waste water from one the facility, whether sanitary or including other activities process for another with less exacting water such as showering or catering requirements. For example, using bleaching rinse water · Regularly maintain plumbing, and identify and repair leaks for textile washing, or bottle-washer rinse water for · Shut off water to unused areas bottle crate washing, or even washing the floor. More · Install self-closing taps, automatic shut-off valves, spray sophisticated reuse projects requiring treatment of water nozzles, pressure reducing valves, and water conserving before reuse are also sometimes practical. fixtures (e.g. low flow shower heads, faucets, toilets, urinals; and spring loaded or sensored faucets) · Water jets/sprays: If processes use water jets or sprays (e.g. to keep conveyors clean or to cool product) review · Operate dishwashers and laundries on full loads, and only the accuracy of the spray pattern to prevent when needed unnecessary water loss. · Install water-saving equipment in lavatories, such as low- flow toilets · Flow control optimization: Industrial processes sometimes require the use of tanks, which are refilled to Cooling Systems control losses. It is often possible to reduce the rate of Water conservation opportunities in cooling systems include: water supply to such tanks, and sometimes to reduce tank levels to reduce spillage. If the process uses water · Use of closed circuit cooling systems with cooling cooling sprays, it may be possible to reduce flow while towers rather than once-through cooling systems maintaining cooling performance. Testing can · Limiting condenser or cooling tower blowdown to the determine the optimum balance. minimum required to prevent unacceptable accumulation of dissolved solids o If hoses are used in cleaning, use flow controls to · Use of air cooling rather than evaporative cooling, restrict wasteful water flow although this may increase electricity use in the o Consider the use of high pressure, low volume cooling system cleaning systems rather than using large volumes · Use of treated waste water for cooling towers of water sprayed from hosepipes · Reusing/recycling cooling tower blowdown o Using flow timers and limit switches to control water use Heating Systems o Using ‘clean-up’ practices rather than hosing down Heating systems based on the circulation of low or medium Building Facility Operations pressure hot water (which do not consume water) should be closed. If they do consume water, regular maintenance should Consumption of building and sanitary water is typically less be conducted to check for leaks. However, large quantities of than that used in industrial processes. However, savings can water may be used by steam systems, and this can be reduced readily be identified, as outlined below: by the following measures: · Compare daily water use per employee to existing benchmarks taking into consideration the primary use at
APRIL 30, 2007 34
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP
· Repair of steam and condensate leaks, and repair of all failed steam traps · Return of condensate to the boilerhouse, and use of heat exchangers (with condensate return) rather than direct steam injection where process permits · Flash steam recovery · Minimizing boiler blowdown consistent with maintaining acceptably low dissolved solids in boiler water. Use of reverse osmosis boiler feed water treatment substantially reduces the need for boiler blowdown · Minimizing deaerator heating
APRIL 30, 2007 35
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
1.5 Hazardous Materials Management When a hazardous material is no longer usable for its original Applicability and Approach ...... 36 purpose and is intended for disposal, but still has hazardous General Hazardous Materials Management...... 37 properties, it is considered a hazardous waste (see Section 1.4). Hazard Assessment ...... 37 Management Actions...... 37 This guidance is intended to be applied in conjunction with Release Prevention and Control Planning ...... 38 Occupational Health and Safety ...... 38 traditional occupational health and safety and emergency Process Knowledge and Documentation ...... 39 preparedness programs which are included in Section 2.0 on Preventive Measures...... 39 Hazardous Materials Transfer...... 39 Occupational Health and Safety Management, and Section 3.7 on Overfill Protection...... 39 Emergency Preparedness and Response. Guidance on the Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention...... 40 Control Measures...... 40 Transport of Hazardous Materials is provided in Section 3.5. Secondary Containment (Liquids) ...... 40 Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection...... 41 This section is divided into two main subsections: Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) ...... 41 Management of Major Hazards...... 42 General Hazardous Materials Management: Guidance applicable Management Actions...... 42 Preventive Measures...... 43 to all projects or facilities that handle or store any quantity of Emergency Preparedness and Response ...... 44 hazardous materials. Community Involvement and Awareness...... 44 Management of Major Hazards: Additional guidance for projects or facilities that store or handle hazardous materials at, or above, Applicability and Approach threshold quantities39, and thus require special treatment to These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any prevent accidents such as fire, explosions, leaks or spills, and to quantity of hazardous materials (Hazmats), defined as materials prepare and respond to emergencies. that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment due to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be The overall objective of hazardous materials management is to classified according to the hazard as explosives; compressed avoid or, when avoidance is not feasible, minimize uncontrolled gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids; releases of hazardous materials or accidents (including explosion flammable solids; oxidizing substances; toxic materials; and fire) during their production, handling, storage and use. This radioactive material; and corrosive substances. Guidance on the objective can be achieved by: transport of hazardous materials is covered in Section 3 of this document.
39 For examples, threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007 36
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Establishing hazardous materials management priorities · The types and amounts of hazardous materials present in the based on hazard analysis of risky operations identified project. This information should be recorded and should through Social and Environmental Assessment; include a summary table with the following information: · Where practicable, avoiding or minimizing the use of o Name and description (e.g. composition of a mixture) of hazardous materials. For example, non-hazardous materials the Hazmat have been found to substitute asbestos in building materials, o Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the PCBs in electrical equipment, persistent organic pollutants Hazmat (POPs) in pesticides formulations, and ozone depleting o Internationally accepted regulatory reporting threshold substances in refrigeration systems; quantity or national equivalent40 of the Hazmat · Preventing uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials to o Quantity of Hazmat used per month the environment or uncontrolled reactions that might result in o Characteristic(s) that make(s) the Hazmat hazardous fire or explosion; (e.g. flammability, toxicity) · Using engineering controls (containment, automatic alarms, · Analysis of potential spill and release scenarios using and shut-off systems) commensurate with the nature of available industry statistics on spills and accidents where hazard; available · Implementing management controls (procedures, · Analysis of the potential for uncontrolled reactions such as inspections, communications, training, and drills) to address fire and explosions residual risks that have not been prevented or controlled · Analysis of potential consequences based on the physical- through engineering measures. geographical characteristics of the project site, including aspects such as its distance to settlements, water resources, General Hazardous Materials Management and other environmentally sensitive areas Projects which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous materials should establish management programs that are Hazard assessment should be performed by specialized commensurate with the potential risks present. The main professionals using internationally-accepted methodologies such objectives of projects involving hazardous materials should be the as Hazardous Operations Analysis (HAZOP), Failure Mode and protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Hazard Identification (HAZID). releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed by integrating prevention and control measures, management actions, and procedures into day-to-day business activities. Management Actions Potentially applicable elements of a management program include The management actions to be included in a Hazardous Materials the following: Management Plan should be commensurate with the level of
Hazard Assessment
The level of risk should be established through an on-going 40 Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. assessment process based on: Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007 37
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP potential risks associated with the production, handling, storage, external resources for equipment and personnel, if and use of hazardous materials. necessary, to supplement internal resources · Description of response activities in the event of a spill,
Release Prevention and Control Planning release, or other chemical emergency including:
Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials, o Internal and external notification procedures facilities should prepare a spill control, prevention, and o Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency o Decision process for assessing severity of the release, Preparedness and Response Plan (described in more detail in and determining appropriate actions Section 3.7). The plan should be tailored to the hazards o Facility evacuation routes associated with the project, and include: o Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal, incident investigation, employee re-entry, and · Training of operators on release prevention, including drills restoration of spill response equipment. specific to hazardous materials as part of emergency preparedness response training Occupational Health and Safety · Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should address mechanical integrity and operability of pressure vessels, applicable, essential elements of occupational health and safety tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems, management as described in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health containment infrastructure, emergency shutdown systems, and Safety, including: controls and pumps, and associated process equipment
· Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures · Job safety analysis to identify specific potential occupational (SOPs) for filling USTs, ASTs or other containers or hazards and industrial hygiene surveys, as appropriate, to equipment as well as for transfer operations by personnel monitor and verify chemical exposure levels, and compare trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous with applicable occupational exposure standards41 material, and in spill prevention and response · Hazard communication and training programs to prepare · SOPs for the management of secondary containment workers to recognize and respond to workplace chemical structures, specifically the removal of any accumulated fluid, hazards. Programs should include aspects of hazard such as rainfall, to ensure that the intent of the system is not identification, safe operating and materials handling accidentally or willfully defeated procedures, safe work practices, basic emergency · Identification of locations of hazardous materials and procedures, and special hazards unique to their jobs. associated activities on an emergency plan site map · Documentation of availability of specific personal protective 41 Including: Threshold Limit Value (TLV®) occupational exposure guidelines and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs®), American Conference of Governmental equipment and training needed to respond to an emergency Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), http://www.acgih.org/TLV/; U.S. National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/npg/; · Documentation of availability of spill response equipment Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a spill and a list of http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARD S&p_id=9992; Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values, European Union, http://europe.osha.eu.int/good_practice/risks/ds/oel/; and other similar sources.
APRIL 30, 2007 38
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
Training should incorporate information from Material Safety Preventive Measures 42 Data Sheets (MSDSs) for hazardous materials being Hazardous Materials Transfer handled. MSDSs should be readily accessible to employees Uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials may result from in their local language. small cumulative events, or from more significant equipment · Definition and implementation of permitted maintenance failure associated with events such as manual or mechanical activities, such as hot work or confined space entries transfer between storage systems or process equipment. · Provision of suitable personal protection equipment (PPE) Recommended practices to prevent hazardous material releases (footwear, masks, protective clothing and goggles in from processes include: appropriate areas), emergency eyewash and shower · Use of dedicated fittings, pipes, and hoses specific to stations, ventilation systems, and sanitary facilities materials in tanks (e.g., all acids use one type of connection, · Monitoring and record-keeping activities, including audit all caustics use another), and maintaining procedures to procedures designed to verify and record the effectiveness of prevent addition of hazardous materials to incorrect tanks prevention and control of exposure to occupational hazards, · Use of transfer equipment that is compatible and suitable for and maintaining accident and incident investigation reports the characteristics of the materials transferred and designed on file for a period of at least five years to ensure safe transfer Process Knowledge and Documentation · Regular inspection, maintenance and repair of fittings, pipes The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be and hoses incorporated into, and consistent with, the other elements of the · Provision of secondary containment, drip trays or other facility ES/OHS MS and include: overflow and drip containment measures, for hazardous materials containers at connection points or other possible · Written process safety parameters (i.e., hazards of the overflow points. chemical substances, safety equipment specifications, safe operation ranges for temperature, pressure, and other Overfill Protection applicable parameters, evaluation of the consequences of Overfills of vessels and tanks should be prevented as they are deviations, etc.) among the most common causes of spills resulting in soil and · Written operating procedures water contamination, and among the easiest to prevent. · Compliance audit procedures Recommended overfill protection measures include:
· Prepare written procedures for transfer operations that includes a checklist of measures to follow during filling operations and the use of filling operators trained in these procedures · Installation of gauges on tanks to measure volume inside 42 MSDSs are produced by the manufacturer, but might not be prepared for · Use of dripless hose connections for vehicle tank and fixed chemical intermediates that are not distributed in commerce. In these cases, employers still need to provide workers with equivalent information. connections with storage tanks
APRIL 30, 2007 39
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Provision of automatic fill shutoff valves on storage tanks to · Prohibition of all sources of ignition from areas near prevent overfilling flammable storage tanks · Use of a catch basin around the fill pipe to collect spills · Use of piping connections with automatic overfill protection Control Measures (float valve) Secondary Containment (Liquids) · Pumping less volume than available capacity into the tank or A critical aspect for controlling accidental releases of liquid vessel by ordering less material than its available capacity hazardous materials during storage and transfer is the provision of · Provision of overfill or over pressure vents that allow secondary containment. It is not necessary for secondary controlled release to a capture point containment methods to meet long term material compatibility as with primary storage and piping, but their design and construction Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention should hold released materials effectively until they can be Reactive, flammable, and explosive materials should also be detected and safely recovered. Appropriate secondary managed to avoid uncontrolled reactions or conditions resulting in containment structures consist of berms, dikes, or walls capable of fire or explosion. Recommended prevention practices include: containing the larger of 110 percent of the largest tank or 25% percent of the combined tank volumes in areas with above-ground · Storage of incompatible materials (acids, bases, flammables, tanks with a total storage volume equal or greater than 1,000 liters oxidizers, reactive chemicals) in separate areas, and with and will be made of impervious, chemically resistant material. containment facilities separating material storage areas Secondary containment design should also consider means to · Provision of material-specific storage for extremely prevent contact between incompatible materials in the event of a hazardous or reactive materials release. · Use of flame arresting devices on vents from flammable
storage containers Other secondary containment measures that should be applied · Provision of grounding and lightning protection for tank depending on site-specific conditions include: farms, transfer stations, and other equipment that handles · Transfer of hazardous materials from vehicle tanks to storage flammable materials in areas with surfaces sufficiently impervious to avoid loss to · Selection of materials of construction compatible with the environment and sloped to a collection or a containment products stored for all parts of storage and delivery systems, structure not connected to municipal wastewater/stormwater and avoiding reuse of tanks for different products without collection system checking material compatibility · Where it is not practical to provide permanent, dedicated · Storage of hazardous materials in an area of the facility containment structures for transfer operations, one or more separated from the main production works. Where proximity alternative forms of spill containment should be provided, is unavoidable, physical separation should be provided using such as portable drain covers (which can be deployed for the structures designed to prevent fire, explosion, spill, and other duration of the operations), automatic shut-off valves on emergency situations from affecting facility operations storm water basins, or shut off valves in drainage or sewer facilities, combined with oil-water separators
APRIL 30, 2007 40
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Storage of drummed hazardous materials with a total volume Underground Storage Tanks (USTs)45 equal or greater than 1,000 liters in areas with impervious Although there are many environmental and safety advantages of surfaces that are sloped or bermed to contain a minimum of underground storage of hazardous materials, including reduced 25 percent of the total storage volume risk of fire or explosion, and lower vapor losses into the · Provision of secondary containment for components (tanks, atmosphere, leaks of hazardous materials can go undetected for pipes) of the hazardous material storage system, to the long periods of time with potential for soil and groundwater extent feasible contamination. Examples of techniques to manage these risks · Conducting periodic (e.g. daily or weekly) reconciliation of include: tank contents, and inspection of visible portions of tanks and · Avoiding use of USTs for storage of highly soluble organic piping for leaks; materials · Use of double-walled, composite, or specially coated storage · Assessing local soil corrosion potential, and installing and and piping systems particularly in the use of underground maintaining cathodic protection (or equivalent rust protection) storage tanks (USTs) and underground piping. If double- for steel tanks walled systems are used, they should provide a means of · For new installations, installing impermeable liners or detecting leaks between the two walls. structures (e.g., concrete vaults) under and around tanks and Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection lines that direct any leaked product to monitoring ports at the lowest point of the liner or structure Leak detection may be used in conjunction with secondary · Monitoring the surface above any tank for indications of soil containment, particularly in high-risk locations43. Leak detection is movement especially important in situations where secondary containment is · Reconciling tank contents by measuring the volume in store not feasible or practicable, such as in long pipe runs. Acceptable with the expected volume, given the stored quantity at last leak detection methods include: stocking, and deliveries to and withdrawals from the store · Use of automatic pressure loss detectors on pressurized or · Testing integrity by volumetric, vacuum, acoustic, tracers, or long distance piping other means on all tanks at regular intervals · Use of approved or certified integrity testing methods on · Considering the monitoring groundwater of quality down piping or tank systems, at regular intervals gradient of locations where multiple USTs are in use · Considering the use of SCADA44 if financially feasible · Evaluating the risk of existing UST in newly acquired facilities to determine if upgrades are required for USTs that will be continued to be used, including replacement with new systems or permanent closure of abandoned USTs. 43 High-risk locations are places where the release of product from the storage system could result in the contamination of drinking water source or those located Ensuring that new USTs are sited away from wells, in water resource protection areas as designated by local authorities.
44 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 45 Additional details on the management of USTs is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Retail Petroleum Stations.
APRIL 30, 2007 41
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
reservoirs and other source water protection areas and the prevention measures (see below) should be conducted at floodplains, and maintained so as to prevent corrosion. least every three years and should include:
o Preparation of a report of the findings Management of Major Hazards o Determination and documentation of the appropriate In addition to the application of the above-referenced guidance on response to each finding prevention and control of releases of hazardous materials, o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected projects involving production, handling, and storage of hazardous · Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable materials at or above threshold limits46 should prepare a information about site hazards and the steps needed to Hazardous Materials Risk Management Plan, in the context of its prevent accidental releases. An incident investigation overall ES/OHS MS, containing all of the elements presented mechanism should include procedures for: below.47 The objective of this guidance is the prevention and o Initiation of the investigation promptly control of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or o Summarizing the investigation in a report explosive chemicals that may result in toxic, fire, or explosion o Addressing the report findings and recommendations hazards.48 o A review of the report with staff and contractors
Management Actions · Employee Participation: A written plan of action should · Management of Change: These procedures should address: describe an active employee participation program for the o The technical basis for changes in processes and prevention of accidents. operations · Contractors: There should be a mechanism for contractor o The impact of changes on health and safety control which should include a requirement for them to o Modification to operating procedures develop hazard materials management procedures that meet o Authorization requirements the requirements of the hazardous materials management o Employees affected plan. Their procedures should be consistent with those of o Training needs the contracting company and the contractor workforce should
· Compliance Audit: A compliance audit is a way to evaluate undergo the same training. Additionally, procedures should compliance with the prevention program requirements for require that contractors are: each process. A compliance audit covering each element of o Provided with safety performance procedures and safety and hazard information
o Observe safety practices 46 Threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection o Act responsibly of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 300-399 and 700 to 789). o Have access to appropriate training for their employees 47 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Risk Management Manual. Washington, o Ensure that their employees know process hazards and D.C. December 2000. applicable emergency actions 48 The approach to the management of major hazards is largely based on an approach to Process Safety Management developed by the American Institute of Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007 42
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
o Prepare and submit training records for their employees initial startup, normal operations, temporary operations, to the contracting company emergency shutdown, emergency operations, normal o Inform their employees about the hazards presented by shutdown, and start-up following a normal or emergency their work shutdown or major change). These SOPs should include o Assess trends of repeated similar incidents special considerations for Mazmats used in the process or o Develop and implement procedures to manage repeated operations (e.g. temperature control to prevent emissions of similar incidents a volatile hazardous chemical; diversion of gaseous discharges of hazardous pollutants from the process to a · Training: Project employees should be provided training on temporary storage tank in case of emergency). Hazmat management. The training program should include:
o A list of employees to be trained Other procedures to be developed include impacts of o Specific training objectives deviations, steps to avoid deviations, prevention of chemical o Mechanisms to achieve the objectives (i.e., hands-on exposure, exposure control measures, and equipment workshops, videos, etc.) inspections. o The means to determine whether the training program is Mechanical Integrity of process equipment, piping and effective instrumentation: Inspection and maintenance procedures o Training procedures for new hires and refresher courses should be developed and documented to ensure mechanical for existing employees integrity of equipment, piping, and instrumentation and Preventive Measures prevent uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials from the project. These procedures should be included as part of The purpose of preventive measures is to ensure that safety- the project SOPs. The specific process components of major related aspects of the process and equipment are considered, interest include pressure vessels and storage tanks, piping limits to be placed on the operations are well known, and systems, relief and vent systems and devices, emergency accepted standards and codes are adopted, where they apply. shutdown systems, controls, and pumps. Recommended · Process Safety Information: Procedures should be prepared aspects of the inspection and maintenance program include: for each hazardous materials and include: o Developing inspection and maintenance procedures o Compilation of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) o Establishing a quality assurance plan for equipment, o Identification of maximum intended inventories and safe maintenance materials, and spare parts upper/lower parameters o Conducting employee training on the inspection and o Documentation of equipment specifications and of maintenance procedures codes and standards used to design, build and operate o Conducting equipment, piping, and instrumentation the process inspections and maintenance o Identifying and correcting identified deficiencies · Operating Procedures: SOPs should be prepared for each step of all processes or operations within the project (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007 43
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
o Evaluating the inspection and maintenance results and, incorporated into and consistent with, the facility’s overall ES/OHS if necessary, updating the inspection and maintenance MS, should be prepared to cover the following:49 procedures · Planning Coordination: Procedures should be prepared for: o Reporting the results to management. o Informing the public and emergency response agencies
o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment · Hot Work Permit: Hot work operations – such as brazing, o Taking emergency response actions torch-cutting, grinding, soldering, and welding – are o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan associated with potential health, safety, and property hazards to reflect changes, and ensuring that employees are resulting from the fumes, gases, sparks, and hot metal and informed of such changes radiant energy produced during hot work. Hot work permit is required for any operation involving open flames or producing · Emergency Equipment: Procedures should be prepared for heat and/or sparks. The section of SOPs on hot work should using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining the emergency include the responsibility for hot work permitting, personal response equipment. protection equipment (PPE), hot work procedures, personnel · Training: Employees and contractors should be trained on training, and recordkeeping. emergency response procedures. · Pre-Start Review: Procedures should be prepared to carry out pre-start reviews when a modification is significant Community Involvement and Awareness enough to require a change in safety information under the When hazardous materials are in use above threshold quantities, management of change procedure. The procedures should: the management plan should include a system for community o Confirm that the new or modified construction and/or awareness, notification and involvement that should be equipment meet design specifications commensurate with the potential risks identified for the project o Ensure that procedures for safety, operation, during the hazard assessment studies. This should include maintenance, and emergency are adequate mechanisms for sharing the results of hazard and risk assessment o Include a process hazard assessment, and resolve or studies in a timely, understandable and culturally sensitive manner implement recommendations for new process with potentially affected communities that provides a means for o Ensure that training for all affected employees is being public feedback. Community involvement activities should include: conducted · Availability of general information to the potentially affected community on the nature and extent of project operations, Emergency Preparedness and Response and the prevention and control measures in place to ensure When handling hazardous materials, procedures and practices no effects to human health should be developed allowing for quick and efficient responses to accidents that could result in human injury or damage to the environment. An Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan, 49 For a comprehensive treatment of the development of emergency response plans in conjunction with communities refer to the Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
APRIL 30, 2007 44
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· The potential for off-site effects to human health or the environment following an accident at planned or existing hazardous installations · Specific and timely information on appropriate behavior and safety measures to be adopted in the event of an accident including practice drills in locations with higher risks · Access to information necessary to understand the nature of the possible effect of an accident and an opportunity to contribute effectively, as appropriate, to decisions concerning hazardous installations and the development of community emergency preparedness plans.
APRIL 30, 2007 45
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
residual waste from industrial operations, such as boiler slag, 1.6 Waste Management clinker, and fly ash. Applicability and Approach ...... 46 General Waste Management...... 47 Hazardous waste shares the properties of a hazardous Waste Management Planning ...... 47 material (e.g. ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity), or Waste Prevention...... 47 other physical, chemical, or biological characteristics that Recycling and Reuse...... 48 Treatment and Disposal...... 48 may pose a potential risk to human health or the environment Hazardous Waste Management...... 48 if improperly managed. Wastes may also be defined as Waste Storage ...... 48 “hazardous” by local regulations or international conventions, Transportation...... 49 Treatment and Disposal...... 49 based on the origin of the waste and its inclusion on Commercial or Government Waste Contractors....49 hazardous waste lists, or based on its characteristics. Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste ...... 50 Monitoring...... 50 Sludge from a waste treatment plant, water supply treatment
plant, or air pollution control facility, and other discarded material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained Applicability and Approach gaseous material resulting from industrial operations needs These guidelines apply to projects that generate, store, or to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis to establish whether handle any quantity of waste across a range of industry it constitutes a hazardous or a non-hazardous waste. sectors. It is not intended to apply to projects or facilities where the primary business is the collection, transportation, Facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the treatment, or disposal of wastes. Specific guidance for these following: types of facilities is presented in the Environmental Health · Establishing waste management priorities at the outset and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste Management of activities based on an understanding of potential Facilities. Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and A waste is any solid, liquid, or contained gaseous material impacts and considering waste generation and its that is being discarded by disposal, recycling, burning or consequences incineration. It can be byproduct of a manufacturing process · Establishing a waste management hierarchy that or an obsolete commercial product that can no longer be considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery, used for intended purpose and requires disposal. recycling, removal and finally disposal of wastes. · Avoiding or minimizing the generation waste materials, Solid (non-hazardous) wastes generally include any garbage, as far as practicable refuse. Examples of such waste include domestic trash and · Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has garbage; inert construction / demolition materials; refuse, been minimized, recovering and reusing waste such as metal scrap and empty containers (except those previously used to contain hazardous materials which should, in principle, be managed as a hazardous waste); and
APRIL 30, 2007 46
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Where waste can not be recovered or reused, treating, · Definition of procedures and operational controls for on- destroying, and disposing of it in an environmentally site storage sound manner · Definition of options / procedures / operational controls for treatment and final disposal General Waste Management The following guidance applies to the management of non- Waste Prevention hazardous and hazardous waste. Additional guidance Processes should be designed and operated to prevent, or specifically applicable to hazardous wastes is presented minimize, the quantities of wastes generated and hazards below. Waste management should be addressed through a associated with the wastes generated in accordance with the Waste management system that addresses issues linked to following strategy: waste minimization, generation, transport, disposal, and · Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous monitoring. or toxic materials, or with those where processing generates lower waste volumes Waste Management Planning · Applying manufacturing process that convert materials Facilities that generate waste should characterize their waste efficiently, providing higher product output yields, according to composition, source, types of wastes produced, including modification of design of the production generation rates, or according to local regulatory process, operating conditions, and process controls50 requirements. Effective planning and implementation of · Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices, waste management strategies should include: including inventory control to reduce the amount of · Review of new waste sources during planning, siting, waste resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off- and design activities, including during equipment specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to modifications and process alterations, to identify plant needs expected waste generation, pollution prevention · Instituting procurement measures that recognize opportunities, and necessary treatment, storage, and opportunities to return usable materials such as disposal infrastructure containers and which prevents the over ordering of · Collection of data and information about the process materials and waste streams in existing facilities, including · Minimizing hazardous waste generation by characterization of waste streams by type, quantities, implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the and potential use/disposition commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to · Establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that be managed takes into account the potential EHS risks during the waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to manage the waste in an environmentally sound manner 50 Examples of waste prevention strategies include the concept of Lean · Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well Manufacturing found at as reuse and recycling http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/minimize/lean.htm
APRIL 30, 2007 47
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
Recycling and Reuse wastes; properly designed, permitted and operated In addition to the implementation of waste prevention landfills or incinerators designed for the respective type strategies, the total amount of waste may be significantly of waste; or other methods known to be effective in the reduced through the implementation of recycling plans, which safe, final disposal of waste materials such as should consider the following elements: bioremediation.
· Evaluation of waste production processes and Hazardous Waste Management identification of potentially recyclable materials Hazardous wastes should always be segregated from non- · Identification and recycling of products that can be hazardous wastes. If generation of hazardous waste can not reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industry be prevented through the implementation of the above activity at the site general waste management practices, its management · Investigation of external markets for recycling by other should focus on the prevention of harm to health, safety, and industrial processing operations located in the the environment, according to the following additional neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste principles: exchange) · Understanding potential impacts and risks associated · Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of with the management of any generated hazardous waste generation and recycling rates waste during its complete life cycle · Providing training and incentives to employees in order · Ensuring that contractors handling, treating, and to meet objectives disposing of hazardous waste are reputable and Treatment and Disposal legitimate enterprises, licensed by the relevant If waste materials are still generated after the implementation regulatory agencies and following good international of feasible waste prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery and industry practice for the waste being handled recycling measures, waste materials should be treated and · Ensuring compliance with applicable local and 51 disposed of and all measures should be taken to avoid international regulations potential impacts to human health and the environment. Waste Storage Selected management approaches should be consistent with the characteristics of the waste and local regulations, and Hazardous waste should be stored so as to prevent or may include one or more of the following: control accidental releases to air, soil, and water resources in area location where: · On-site or off-site biological, chemical, or physical treatment of the waste material to render it non- hazardous prior to final disposal 51 International requirements may include host-country commitments under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of · Treatment or disposal at permitted facilities specially Hazardous Waste and their disposal (http://www.basel.int/) and Rotterdam Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous designed to receive the waste. Examples include: Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade (http://www.pic.int/) composting operations for organic non-hazardous
APRIL 30, 2007 48
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Waste is stored in a manner that prevents the · Preparing and implementing spill response and commingling or contact between incompatible wastes, emergency plans to address their accidental release and allows for inspection between containers to monitor (additional information on Emergency Plans in provided leaks or spills. Examples include sufficient space in Section 3 of this document) between incompatibles or physical separation such as · Avoiding underground storage tanks and underground walls or containment curbs piping of hazardous waste · Store in closed containers away from direct sunlight, wind and rain Transportation · Secondary containment systems should be constructed On-site and Off-site transportation of waste should be with materials appropriate for the wastes being conducted so as to prevent or minimize spills, releases, and contained and adequate to prevent loss to the exposures to employees and the public. All waste environment containers designated for off-site shipment should be · Secondary containment is included wherever liquid secured and labeled with the contents and associated wastes are stored in volumes greater than 220 liters. hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles before The available volume of secondary containment should leaving the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper be at least 110 percent of the largest storage container, (i.e., manifest) that describes the load and its associated or 25 percent of the total storage capacity (whichever is hazards, consistent with the guidance provided in Section 3.4 greater), in that specific location on the Transport of Hazardous Materials. · Provide adequate ventilation where volatile wastes are Treatment and Disposal stored. In addition to the recommendations for treatment and Hazardous waste storage activities should also be subject to disposal applicable to general wastes, the following issues special management actions, conducted by employees who specific to hazardous wastes should be considered: have received specific training in handling and storage of hazardous wastes: Commercial or Government Waste Contractors In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned · Provision of readily available information on chemical waste vendors (taking into consideration proximity and compatibility to employees, including labeling each transportation requirements), facilities generating waste container to identify its contents should consider using: · Limiting access to hazardous waste storage areas to employees who have received proper training · Have the technical capability to manage the waste in a manner that reduces immediate and future impact to the · Clearly identifying (label) and demarcating the area, including documentation of its location on a facility map environment or site plan · Have all required permits, certifications, and approvals, of applicable government authorities · Conducting periodic inspections of waste storage areas and documenting the findings
APRIL 30, 2007 49
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Have been secured through the use of formal are generated and stored on site, monitoring activities procurement agreements should include:
In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned o Inspection of vessels for leaks, drips or other waste disposal operators (taking into consideration proximity indications of loss and transportation requirements), project sponsors should o Identification of cracks, corrosion, or damage to consider using: tanks, protective equipment, or floors o Verification of locks, emergency valves, and other · Installing on-site waste treatment or recycling safety devices for easy operation (lubricating if processes required and employing the practice of keeping · As a final option, constructing facilities that will provide locks and safety equipment in standby position for the environmental sound long-term storage of when the area is not occupied) wastes on-site (as described elsewhere in the General o Checking the operability of emergency systems EHS Guidelines) or at an alternative appropriate o Documenting results of testing for integrity, location up until external commercial options become emissions, or monitoring stations (air, soil vapor, or available groundwater) o Documenting any changes to the storage facility, Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste and any significant changes in the quantity of Hazardous waste materials are frequently generated in small materials in storage quantities by many projects through a variety of activities such as equipment and building maintenance activities. · Regular audits of waste segregation and collection Examples of these types of wastes include: spent solvents practices and oily rags, empty paint cans, chemical containers; used · Tracking of waste generation trends by type and amount lubricating oil; used batteries (such as nickel-cadmium or of waste generated, preferably by facility departments lead acid); and lighting equipment, such as lamps or lamp · Characterizing waste at the beginning of generation of a ballasts. These wastes should be managed following the new waste stream, and periodically documenting the guidance provided in the above sections. characteristics and proper management of the waste, especially hazardous wastes Monitoring · Keeping manifests or other records that document the Monitoring activities associated with the management of amount of waste generated and its destination hazardous and non-hazardous waste should include: · Periodic auditing of third party treatment, and disposal services including re-use and recycling facilities when · Regular visual inspection of all waste storage collection significant quantities of hazardous wastes are managed and storage areas for evidence of accidental releases by third parties. Whenever possible, audits should and to verify that wastes are properly labeled and include site visits to the treatment storage and disposal stored. When significant quantities of hazardous wastes location
APRIL 30, 2007 50
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
· Regular monitoring of groundwater quality in cases of Hazardous Waste on site storage and/or pretreatment and disposal · Monitoring records for hazardous waste collected, stored, or shipped should include:
o Name and identification number of the material(s) composing the hazardous waste o Physical state (i.e., solid, liquid, gaseous or a combination of one, or more, of these) o Quantity (e.g., kilograms or liters, number of containers) o Waste shipment tracking documentation to include, quantity and type, date dispatched, date transported and date received, record of the originator, the receiver and the transporter o Method and date of storing, repacking, treating, or disposing at the facility, cross-referenced to specific manifest document numbers applicable to the hazardous waste o Location of each hazardous waste within the facility, and the quantity at each location
APRIL 30, 2007 51
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
1.7 Noise barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the source or to the receptor location to be effective Applicability · Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment This section addresses impacts of noise beyond the property · Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of boundary of the facilities. Worker exposure to noise is equipment or operations, especially mobile sources covered in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety. operating through community areas · Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take Prevention and Control advantage of distance and shielding Noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied · Siting permanent facilities away from community areas if where predicted or measured noise impacts from a project possible facility or operations exceed the applicable noise level · Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise 52 guideline at the most sensitive point of reception. The buffer during facility design preferred method for controlling noise from stationary · Reducing project traffic routing through community sources is to implement noise control measures at source.53 areas wherever possible Methods for prevention and control of sources of noise · Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft emissions depend on the source and proximity of receptors. (airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas Noise reduction options that should be considered include: · Developing a mechanism to record and respond to · Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels complaints · Installing silencers for fans Noise Level Guidelines · Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in compressor components Table 1.7.1, or result in a maximum increase in background · Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site. radiating noise · Improving the acoustic performance of constructed
buildings, apply sound insulation · Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in order to minimize the transmission of sound through the
52 A point of reception or receptor may be defined as any point on the premises occupied by persons where extraneous noise and/or vibration are received. Examples of receptor locations may include: permanent or seasonal residences; hotels / motels; schools and daycares; hospitals and nursing homes; places of worship; and parks and campgrounds. 53 At the design stage of a project, equipment manufacturers should provide design or construction specifications in the form of “Insertion Loss Performance” for silencers and mufflers, and “Transmission Loss Performance” for acoustic enclosures and upgraded building construction.
APRIL 30, 2007 52
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP
m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise Table 1.7.1- Noise Level Guidelines54 level limit is represented by the background or ambient noise
One Hour LAeq (dBA) levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or Receptor Daytime Nighttime noise source(s) under investigation. 07:00 - 22:00 22:00 - 07:00 Residential; institutional; 55 45 educational55 Industrial; commercial 70 70
Highly intrusive noises, such as noise from aircraft flyovers and passing trains, should not be included when establishing background noise levels.
Monitoring Noise monitoring56 may be carried out for the purposes of establishing the existing ambient noise levels in the area of the proposed or existing facility, or for verifying operational phase noise levels.
Noise monitoring programs should be designed and conducted by trained specialists. Typical monitoring periods should be sufficient for statistical analysis and may last 48 hours with the use of noise monitors that should be capable of logging data continuously over this time period, or hourly, or more frequently, as appropriate (or else cover differing time periods within several days, including weekday and weekend workdays). The type of acoustic indices recorded depends on the type of noise being monitored, as established by a noise expert. Monitors should be located approximately 1.5 m above the ground and no closer than 3
54 Guidelines values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source: Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999. 55 For acceptable indoor noise levels for residential, institutional, and educational settings refer to WHO (1999).
56 Noise monitoring should be carried out using a Type 1 or 2 sound level meter meeting all appropriate IEC standards.
APRIL 30, 2007 53
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP
1.8 Contaminated Land · The liability that it may pose to the polluter/business Applicability and Approach ...... 54 owners (e.g., cost of remediation, damage of business Risk Screening ...... 55 reputation and/or business-community relations) or Interim Risk Management ...... 56 Detailed Risk Assessment...... 56 affected parties (e.g. workers at the site, nearby property Permanent Risk Reduction Measures...... 57 owners). Occupational Health and Safety Considerations...... 59
Contamination of land should be avoided by preventing or Applicability and Approach controlling the release of hazardous materials, hazardous wastes, or oil to the environment. When contamination of land is This section provides a summary of management suspected or confirmed during any project phase, the cause of approaches for land contamination due to anthropogenic the uncontrolled release should be identified and corrected to releases of hazardous materials, wastes, or oil, including avoid further releases and associated adverse impacts. naturally occurring substances. Releases of these materials may be the result of historic or current site activities, Contaminated lands should be managed to avoid the risk to including, but not limited to, accidents during their handling human health and ecological receptors. The preferred strategy and storage, or due to their poor management or disposal. for land decontamination is to reduce the level of contamination at the site while preventing the human exposure to Land is considered contaminated when it contains hazardous contamination. materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally occurring levels. To determine whether risk management actions are warranted, the following assessment approach should be applied to Contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface establish whether the three risk factors of ‘Contaminants’, soils that, through leaching and transport, may affect ‘Receptors’, and ‘Exposure Pathways’ co-exist, or are likely to groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites. Where co-exist, at the project site under current or possible future land subsurface contaminant sources include volatile substances, use: soil vapor may also become a transport and exposure medium, and create potential for contaminant infiltration of · Contaminant(s): Presence of hazardous materials, waste, indoor air spaces of buildings. or oil in any environmental media at potentially hazardous concentrations Contaminated land is a concern because of: · Receptor(s): Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife, plants, and other living organisms with the contaminants of · The potential risks to human health and ecology (e.g. concern risk of cancer or other human health effects, loss of · Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of ecology); migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g., leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes
APRIL 30, 2007 54
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP
(e.g., ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would · Identification of the location of suspected highest level of allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with contamination through a combination of visual and contaminants historical operational information; · Sampling and testing of the contaminated media (soils or water) according to established technical methods applicable to suspected type of contaminant57,58; · Evaluation of the analytical results against the local and national contaminated sites regulations. In the absence of such regulations or environmental standards, other sources of risk-based standards or guidelines should be consulted to obtain comprehensive criteria for screening soil concentrations of pollutants.59 · Verification of the potential human and/or ecological receptors and exposure pathways relevant to the site in
question FIGURE 1.8.1: Inter-Relationship of Contaminant The outcome of risk-screening may reveal that there is no Risk Factors overlap between the three risk-factors as the contaminant levels identified are below those considered to pose a risk to human When the three risk factors are considered to be present (in health or the environment. Alternatively, interim or permanent spite of limited data) under current or foreseeable future conditions, the following steps should be followed (as described in the remaining parts of this section): 57 BC MOE. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance
1) Risk screening; 58 Massachusetts Department of Environment. http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup 2) Interim risk management; 59 These may include the USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs). 3) Detailed quantitative risk assessment; and http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. These RBCs are considered acceptable for specific land use and contaminant exposure 4) Permanent risk reduction measures. scenarios as they have been developed by governments using risk assessment techniques for use as general targets in the site remediation. Separate PRGs have been developed or adopted for soil, sediment or groundwater, and often a Risk Screening distinction is made between land uses (as noted earlier) because of the need for more stringent guidelines for residential and agricultural versus This step is also known as “problem formulation” for commercial/industrial landuse. The RBC Tables contains Reference Doses (RfDs) and Cancer Slope Factors (CSFs) for about 400 chemicals. These environmental risk assessment. Where there is potential toxicity factors have been combined with “standard” exposure scenarios to calculate RBCs--chemical concentrations corresponding to fixed levels of risk evidence of contamination at a site, the following steps are (i.e., a Hazard Quotient (HQ) of 1, or lifetime cancer risk of 1E-6, whichever occurs at a lower concentration) in water, air, fish tissue, and soil for individual recommended: chemical substances. The primary use of RBCs is for chemical screening during baseline risk assessment (see EPA Regional Guidance EPA/903/R-93-001, “Selecting Exposure Routes and Contaminants of Concern by Risk-Based Screening”). Additional useful soil quality guidelines can also be obtained from Lijzen et al. 2001.
APRIL 30, 2007 55
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP risk reduction measures may need to be taken with, or strategies that yield acceptable health risks, while achieving low without, more detailed risk assessment activities, as level contamination on-site. An assessment of contaminant described below. risks needs to be considered in the context of current and future land use, and development scenarios (e.g., residential,
Interim Risk Management commercial, industrial, and urban parkland or wilderness use).
Interim risk management actions should be implemented at A detailed quantitative risk assessment builds on risk screening any phase of the project life cycle if the presence of land (problem formulation). It involves first, a detailed site contamination poses an “imminent hazard”, i.e., representing investigation to identify the scope of contamination.61 Site an immediate risk to human health and the environment if investigation programs should apply quality assurance/quality contamination were allowed to continue, even a short period control (QA/QC) measures to ensure that data quality is of time. Examples of situations considered to involve adequate for the intended data use (e.g., method detection imminent hazards include, but are not restricted to: limits are below levels of concern). The site investigation in turn
· Presence of an explosive atmosphere caused by should be used to develop a conceptual site model of how and contaminated land where contaminants exist, how they are transported, and where · Accessible and excessive contamination for which short- routes of exposure occur to organisms and humans. The risk term exposure and potency of contaminants could result factors and conceptual site model provide a framework for in acute toxicity, irreversible long term effects, assessing contaminant risks. sensitization, or accumulation of persistent Human or ecological risk assessments facilitate risk biocumulative and toxic substances management decisions at contaminated sites. Specific risk · Concentrations of pollutants at concentrations above the assessment objectives include: Risk Based Concentrations (RBCs60) or drinking water standards in potable water at the point of abstraction · Identifying relevant human and ecological receptors (e.g., children, adults, fish, wildlife) Appropriate risk reduction should be implemented as soon as · Determining if contaminants are present at levels that pose practicable to remove the condition posing the imminent potential human health and/or ecological concerns (e.g., hazard. levels above applicable regulatory criteria based on health Detailed Risk Assessment or environmental risk considerations) · Determining how human or ecological receptors are As an alternative to complying with numerical standards or exposed to the contaminants (e.g., ingestions of soil, preliminary remediation goals, and depending on local dermal contact, inhalation of dust) regulatory requirements, a detailed site-specific, environmental risk assessment may be used to develop 61 Examples include processes defined by the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Phase II ESA Process; the British Columbia Ministry of Environment Canada (BC MOE) 60 For example, USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs). http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance); and the http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. Massachusetts Department of Environment http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup.
APRIL 30, 2007 56
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP
· Identifying the types of adverse effects that might result · Identifying the preferred technologies (including from exposure to the contaminants (e.g., effect on target engineering controls) needed to implement the conceptual organ, cancer, impaired growth or reproduction) in the risk reduction measures absence of regulatory standards · Developing a monitoring plan to ascertain whether risk · Quantifying the magnitude of health risks to human and reduction measures are effective ecological receptors based on a quantitative analysis of · Considering the need and appropriateness for institutional contaminant exposure and toxicity (e.g. calculate controls (e.g. deed restriction, land use restrictions) as part lifetime cancer risk or ratios of estimated exposure rates of a comprehensive approach compared to safe exposure rates) · Determining how current and proposed future land use Permanent Risk Reduction Measures influence the predicted risks (e.g. change of land use The risk factors and conceptual site model within the from industrial to residential with more sensitive contaminant risk approach described also provide a basis to receptors such as children) manage and mitigate environmental contaminant health risks. · Quantifying the potential environmental and/or human The underlying principle is to reduce, eliminate, or control any or health risks from off-site contaminant migration (e.g., all of the three risk factors illustrated in Figure 1.8.1. A short list consider if leaching and groundwater transport, or of examples of risk mitigation strategies is provided below, surface water transport results in exposure at adjacent although actual strategies should be developed based on site- lands/receptors) specific conditions, and the practicality of prevailing factors and · Determining if the risk is likely to remain stable, site constraints. Regardless of the management options increase, or decrease with time in the absence of any selected, the action plan should include, whenever possible, remediation (e.g., consider if the contaminant is contaminant source reduction (i.e., net improvement of the site) reasonably degradable and likely to remain in place, or as part of the overall strategy towards managing health risks at be transported to other media)62 contaminated sites, as this alone provides for improved environmental quality. Addressing these objectives provides a basis to develop and implement risk reduction measures (e.g., clean-up, on-site Figure 1.8.2 presents a schematic of the inter-relationship of risk controls) at the site. If such a need exists, the following factors and example strategies to mitigate contaminant health additional objectives become relevant: risk by modifying the conditions of one or more risk factors to ultimately reduce contaminant exposure to the receptor. The · Determining where, and in what conceptual manner, risk reduction measures should be implemented selected approach should take into consideration the technical and financial feasibility (e.g. operability of a selected technology given the local availability of technical expertise and equipment and its associated costs). 62 An example of a simplified quantitative risk assessment method is the ASTM E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Example risk mitigation strategies for contaminant source and Applied at Petroleum Release Sites and the ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites). exposure concentrations include:
APRIL 30, 2007 57
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP
· Soil, sediment, and sludge: o Installation (during building construction) of an o In situ biological treatment (aerobic or anaerobic) impermeable barrier below the building and/or an o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., soil vapor alternative flow pathway for soil vapor beneath extraction with off-gas treatment, chemical building foundations (e.g., porous media and oxidation) ventilation to shunt vapors away from building) o In situ thermal treatment (e.g., steam injection, 6- Example risk mitigation strategies for receptors include: phase heating) · Limiting or preventing access to contaminant by receptors o Ex situ biological treatment (e.g., excavation and (actions targeted at the receptor may include signage with composting) instructions, fencing, or site security) o Ex situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., · Imposing health advisory or prohibiting certain practices excavation and stabilization) leading to exposure such as fishing, crab trapping, shellfish o Ex situ thermal treatment (e.g., excavation and collection thermal desorption or incineration) · Educating receptors (people) to modify behavior in order to o Containment (e.g. landfill) reduce exposure (e.g., improved work practices, and use of o Natural attenuation protective clothing and equipment) o Other treatment processes Example risk mitigation strategies for exposure pathways · Groundwater, surface water, and leachate: include: In situ biological treatment (aerobic and/or aerobic) o · Providing an alternative water supply to replace, for o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., air example, a contaminated groundwater supply well sparging, zero-valent iron permeable reactive · Capping contaminated soil with at least 1m of clean soil to barrier) prevent human contact, as well as plant root or small Ex situ biological, physical, and or chemical o mammal penetration into contaminated soils treatment (i.e., groundwater extraction and · Paving over contaminated soil as an interim measure to treatment) negate the pathway of direct contact or dust generation Containment (e.g., slurry wall or sheet pile barrier) o and inhalation o Natural attenuation · Using an interception trench and pump, and treat o Other treatment processes technologies to prevent contaminated groundwater from · Soil vapor intrusion: discharging into fish streams
o Soil vapor extraction to reduce VOC contaminant The above-reference containment measures should also be source in soil considered for immediate implementation in situations where o Installation of a sub-slab depressurization system source reduction measures are expected to take time. to prevent migration of soil vapor into the building o Creating a positive pressure condition in buildings
APRIL 30, 2007 58
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP
Occupational Health and Safety Considerations Investigation and remediation of contaminated lands requires that workers be mindful of the occupational exposures that could arise from working in close contact with contaminated soil or other environmental media (e.g., groundwater, wastewater, sediments, and soil vapor). Occupational health and safety precautions should be exercised to minimize exposure, as described in Section 2 on Occupational Health and Safety. In addition, workers on contaminated sites should receive special health and safety training specific to contaminated site investigation and remediation activities.63
FIGURE 1.8.2: Inter-Relationship of Risk Factors and Management Options
63 For example, US Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA) regulations found at 40 CFR 1910.120. http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STAN DARDS&p_id=9765
APRIL 30, 2007 59
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
2.0 Occupational Health and Safety
Applicability and Approach...... 60 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation...... 61 Applicability and Approach Integrity of Workplace Structures...... 61 Employers and supervisors are obliged to implement all Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown ...... 61 Workspace and Exit...... 61 reasonable precautions to protect the health and safety of Fire Precautions ...... 62 workers. This section provides guidance and examples of Lavatories and Showers...... 62 Potable Water Supply ...... 62 reasonable precautions to implement in managing principal risks Clean Eating Area ...... 62 to occupational health and safety. Although the focus is placed on Lighting...... 62 Safe Access...... 62 the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also First Aid...... 63 applies to construction and decommissioning activities. Air Supply...... 63 Work Environment Temperature...... 63 Companies should hire contractors that have the technical 2.2 Communication and Training...... 63 capability to manage the occupational health and safety issues of OHS Training ...... 63 Visitor Orientation...... 63 their employees, extending the application of the hazard New Task Employee and Contractor Training...... 63 management activities through formal procurement agreements. Basic OHS Training ...... 64 Area Signage ...... 64 Labeling of Equipment...... 64 Preventive and protective measures should be introduced Communicate Hazard Codes ...... 64 according to the following order of priority: 2.3 Physical Hazards ...... 64 Rotating and Moving Equipment...... 65 Noise ...... 65 · Eliminating the hazard by removing the activity from the work Vibration...... 65 process. Examples include substitution with less hazardous Electrical ...... 66 Eye Hazards...... 67 chemicals, using different manufacturing processes, etc; Welding / Hot Work...... 67 Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic...... 67 · Controlling the hazard at its source through use of Working Environment Temperature...... 68 engineering controls. Examples include local exhaust Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling.68 Working at Heights ...... 68 ventilation, isolation rooms, machine guarding, acoustic Illumination...... 69 2.4 Chemical Hazards...... 69 insulating, etc; Air Quality ...... 70 Fire and Explosions ...... 70 · Minimizing the hazard through design of safe work systems Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals...... 71 and administrative or institutional control measures. Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)...... 71 2.5 Biological Hazards...... 71 Examples include job rotation, training safe work procedures, 2.6 Radiological Hazards...... 73 lock-out and tag-out, workplace monitoring, limiting exposure 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)...... 73 2.8 Special Hazard Environments...... 74 or work duration, etc. Confined Space...... 74 Lone and Isolated Workers ...... 75 · Providing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in 2.9 Monitoring...... 75 conjunction with training, use, and maintenance of the PPE. Accidents and Diseases monitoring...... 76 The application of prevention and control measures to occupational hazards should be based on comprehensive job
APRIL 30, 2007 60
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP safety or job hazard analyses. The results of these analyses should be prioritized as part of an action plan based on the Table 2.1.1. Risk Ranking Table to Classify Worker likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the Scenarios Based on Likelihood and Consequence identified hazards. An example of a qualitative risk ranking or analysis matrix to help identify priorities is described in Table Consequences 2.1.1. Catas- Insignificant Minor Moderate Major trophic Likelihood 2.1 General Facility Design and 1 2 3 4 5 Operation A. Almost certain L M E E E Integrity of Workplace Structures B. Likely Permanent and recurrent places of work should be designed and L M H E E equipped to protect OHS: C. L M H E E · Surfaces, structures and installations should be easy to clean Moderate and maintain, and not allow for accumulation of hazardous D. Unlikely compounds. L L M H E
· Buildings should be structurally safe, provide appropriate E. Rare L L M H H protection against the climate, and have acceptable light and noise conditions. Legend · Fire resistant, noise-absorbing materials should, to the extent E: extreme risk; immediate action required feasible, be used for cladding on ceilings and walls. H: high risk; senior management attention needed · Floors should be level, even, and non-skid. M: moderate risk; management responsibility should be specified · Heavy oscillating, rotating or alternating equipment should be L: low risk; manage by routine procedures located in dedicated buildings or structurally isolated sections. Workspace and Exit · The space provided for each worker, and in total, should be Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown adequate for safe execution of all activities, including · Work place structures should be designed and constructed to transport and interim storage of materials and products. withstand the expected elements for the region and have an · Passages to emergency exits should be unobstructed at all area designated for safe refuge, if appropriate. times. Exits should be clearly marked to be visible in total · Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be developed darkness. The number and capacity of emergency exits for project or process shut-down, including an evacuation should be sufficient for safe and orderly evacuation of the plan. Drills to practice the procedure and plan should also be greatest number of people present at any time, and there undertaken annually. should be a minimum two exits from any work area.
APRIL 30, 2007 61
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Facilities also should be designed and built taking into Potable Water Supply account the needs of disabled persons. · Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be provided from a fountain with an upward jet or with a sanitary Fire Precautions means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking The workplace should be designed to prevent the start of fires · Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the through the implementation of fire codes applicable to industrial purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) should settings. Other essential measures include: meet drinking water quality standards · Equipping facilities with fire detectors, alarm systems, and fire-fighting equipment. The equipment should be maintained Clean Eating Area in good working order and be readily accessible. It should be · Where there is potential for exposure to substances adequate for the dimensions and use of the premises, poisonous by ingestion, suitable arrangements are to be equipment installed, physical and chemical properties of made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are substances present, and the maximum number of people not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances present. Lighting · Provision of manual firefighting equipment that is easily accessible and simple to use · Workplaces should, to the degree feasible, receive natural · Fire and emergency alarm systems that are both audible and light and be supplemented with sufficient artificial illumination visible to promote workers’ safety and health, and enable safe equipment operation. Supplemental ‘task lighting’ may be The IFC Life and Fire Safety Guideline should apply to buildings required where specific visual acuity requirements should be accessible to the public (See Section 3.3). met. Lavatories and Showers · Emergency lighting of adequate intensity should be installed and automatically activated upon failure of the principal · Adequate lavatory facilities (toilets and washing areas) artificial light source to ensure safe shut-down, evacuation, should be provided for the number of people expected to etc. work in the facility and allowances made for segregated facilities, or for indicating whether the toilet facility is “In Use” Safe Access or “Vacant”. Toilet facilities should also be provided with · Passageways for pedestrians and vehicles within and outside adequate supplies of hot and cold running water, soap, and buildings should be segregated and provide for easy, safe, hand drying devices. and appropriate access · Where workers may be exposed to substances poisonous by · Equipment and installations requiring servicing, inspection, ingestion and skin contamination may occur, facilities for and/or cleaning should have unobstructed, unrestricted, and showering and changing into and out of street and work ready access clothes should be provided. · Hand, knee and foot railings should be installed on stairs, fixed ladders, platforms, permanent and interim floor openings, loading bays, ramps, etc.
APRIL 30, 2007 62
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Openings should be sealed by gates or removable chains microorganisms. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning · Covers should, if feasible, be installed to protect against (HVAC) and industrial evaporative cooling systems should be falling items equipped, maintained and operated so as to prevent growth · Measures to prevent unauthorized access to dangerous and spreading of disease agents (e.g. Legionnella areas should be in place pneumophilia) or breeding of vectors (e.g. mosquitoes and flies) of public health concern. First Aid · The employer should ensure that qualified first-aid can be Work Environment Temperature provided at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations · The temperature in work, rest room and other welfare should be easily accessible throughout the place of work facilities should, during service hours, be maintained at a · Eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be level appropriate for the purpose of the facility. provided close to all workstations where immediate flushing with water is the recommended first-aid response 2.2 Communication and Training
· Where the scale of work or the type of activity being carried OHS Training out so requires, dedicated and appropriately equipped first- · Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation aid room(s) should be provided. First aid stations and rooms training to all new employees to ensure they are apprised of should be equipped with gloves, gowns, and masks for the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal protection against direct contact with blood and other body protection and preventing injury to fellow employees. fluids · Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, site- · Remote sites should have written emergency procedures in specific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency place for dealing with cases of trauma or serious illness up to procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as the point at which patient care can be transferred to an appropriate. Any site-specific hazard or color coding in use appropriate medical facility. should be thoroughly reviewed as part of orientation training. Air Supply Visitor Orientation · Sufficient fresh air should be supplied for indoor and confined · If visitors to the site can gain access to areas where work spaces. Factors to be considered in ventilation design hazardous conditions or substances may be present, a visitor include physical activity, substances in use, and process- orientation and control program should be established to related emissions. Air distribution systems should be ensure visitors do not enter hazard areas unescorted. designed so as not to expose workers to draughts · Mechanical ventilation systems should be maintained in good New Task Employee and Contractor Training working order. Point-source exhaust systems required for · The employer should ensure that workers and contractors, maintaining a safe ambient environment should have local prior to commencement of new assignments, have received indicators of correct functioning. adequate training and information enabling them to · Re-circulation of contaminated air is not acceptable. Air inlet filters should be kept clean and free of dust and
APRIL 30, 2007 63
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
understand work hazards and to protect their health from · Signage should be in accordance with international hazardous ambient factors that may be present. standards and be well known to, and easily understood by The training should adequately cover: workers, visitors and the general public as appropriate.
o Knowledge of materials, equipment, and tools Labeling of Equipment o Known hazards in the operations and how they are controlled · All vessels that may contain substances that are hazardous as a result of chemical or toxicological properties, or o Potential risks to health o Precautions to prevent exposure temperature or pressure, should be labeled as to the o Hygiene requirements contents and hazard, or appropriately color coded. o Wearing and use of protective equipment and clothing · Similarly, piping systems that contain hazardous substances o Appropriate response to operation extremes, incidents should be labeled with the direction of flow and contents of and accidents the pipe, or color coded whenever the pipe passing through a wall or floor is interrupted by a valve or junction device. Basic OHS Training · A basic occupational training program and specialty courses Communicate Hazard Codes should be provided, as needed, to ensure that workers are · Copies of the hazard coding system should be posted oriented to the specific hazards of individual work outside the facility at emergency entrance doors and fire assignments. Training should generally be provided to emergency connection systems where they are likely to management, supervisors, workers, and occasional visitors come to the attention of emergency services personnel. to areas of risks and hazards. · Information regarding the types of hazardous materials · Workers with rescue and first-aid duties should receive stored, handled or used at the facility, including typical dedicated training so as not to inadvertently aggravate maximum inventories and storage locations, should be exposures and health hazards to themselves or their co- shared proactively with emergency services and security workers. Training would include the risks of becoming personnel to expedite emergency response when needed. infected with blood–borne pathogens through contact with · Representatives of local emergency and security services bodily fluids and tissue. should be invited to participate in periodic (annual) · Through appropriate contract specifications and monitoring, orientation tours and site inspections to ensure familiarity the employer should ensure that service providers, as well as with potential hazards present. contracted and subcontracted labor, are trained adequately before assignments begin. 2.3 Physical Hazards Physical hazards represent potential for accident or injury or Area Signage illness due to repetitive exposure to mechanical action or work · Hazardous areas (electrical rooms, compressor rooms, etc), activity. Single exposure to physical hazards may result in a wide installations, materials, safety measures, and emergency range of injuries, from minor and medical aid only, to disabling, exits, etc. should be marked appropriately. catastrophic, and/or fatal. Multiple exposures over prolonged
APRIL 30, 2007 64
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP periods can result in disabling injuries of comparable significance Noise and consequence. Noise limits for different working environments are provided in Table 2.3.1. Rotating and Moving Equipment Injury or death can occur from being trapped, entangled, or struck · No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than 85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without by machinery parts due to unexpected starting of equipment or hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be unobvious movement during operations. Recommended exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of protective measures include: more than 140 dB(C). · Designing machines to eliminate trap hazards and ensuring · The use of hearing protection should be enforced actively that extremities are kept out of harm’s way under normal when the equivalent sound level over 8 hours reaches 85 operating conditions. Examples of proper design dB(A), the peak sound levels reach 140 dB(C), or the considerations include two-hand operated machines to average maximum sound level reaches 110dB(A). Hearing prevent amputations or the availability of emergency stops protective devices provided should be capable of reducing dedicated to the machine and placed in strategic locations. sound levels at the ear to at least 85 dB(A). Where a machine or equipment has an exposed moving part · Although hearing protection is preferred for any period of or exposed pinch point that may endanger the safety of any noise exposure in excess of 85 dB(A), an equivalent level of worker, the machine or equipment should be equipped with, protection can be obtained, but less easily managed, by and protected by, a guard or other device that prevents limiting the duration of noise exposure. For every 3 dB(A) access to the moving part or pinch point. Guards should be increase in sound levels, the ‘allowed’ exposure period or designed and installed in conformance with appropriate duration should be reduced by 50 percent.65 machine safety standards.64 · Prior to the issuance of hearing protective devices as the · Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing final control mechanism, use of acoustic insulating materials, (Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or isolation of the noise source, and other engineering controls guarded moving parts, or in which energy can be stored (e.g. should be investigated and implemented, where feasible compressed air, electrical components) during servicing or · Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on maintenance, in conformance with a standard such as CSA workers exposed to high noise levels Z460 Lockout or equivalent ISO or ANSI standard · Designing and installing equipment, where feasible, to enable Vibration routine service, such as lubrication, without removal of the Exposure to hand-arm vibration from equipment such as hand and guarding devices or mechanisms power tools, or whole-body vibrations from surfaces on which the worker stands or sits, should be controlled through choice of equipment, installation of vibration dampening pads or devices, and limiting the duration of exposure. Limits for vibration and 64 For example: CSA Z432.04 Safe Guarding of Machinery, CSA Z434 Robot Safety, ISO 11161 Safety of Machinery – Integrated Manufacturing Systems or ISO 14121 Safety of Machinery – Principals of Risk Management or equivalent ANSI standard. 65 The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006
APRIL 30, 2007 65
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP action values, (i.e. the level of exposure at which remediation · Marking all energized electrical devices and lines with should be initiated) are provided by the ACGIH66. Exposure levels warning signs should be checked on the basis of daily exposure time and data · Locking out (de-charging and leaving open with a controlled provided by equipment manufacturers. locking device) and tagging-out (warning sign placed on the lock) devices during service or maintenance Electrical · Checking all electrical cords, cables, and hand power tools Exposed or faulty electrical devices, such as circuit breakers, for frayed or exposed cords and following manufacturer recommendations for maximum permitted operating voltage Table 2.3.1. Noise Limits for Various Working of the portable hand tools Environments · Double insulating / grounding all electrical equipment used in environments that are, or may become, wet; using equipment Location Equivalent level Maximum with ground fault interrupter (GFI) protected circuits /activity LAeq,8h LAmax,fast · Protecting power cords and extension cords against damage Heavy Industry (no from traffic by shielding or suspending above traffic areas demand for oral 85 dB(A) 110 dB(A) communication) · Appropriate labeling of service rooms housing high voltage
Light industry equipment (‘electrical hazard’) and where entry is controlled (decreasing demand for oral 50-65 dB(A) 110 dB(A) or prohibited (see also Section 3 on Planning, Siting, and communication) Design); Open offices, · Establishing “No Approach” zones around or under high control rooms, 45-50 dB(A) - service counters or voltage power lines in conformance with Table 2.3.2 similar · Rubber tired construction or other vehicles that come into Individual offices (no disturbing 40-45 dB(A) - direct contact with, or arcing between, high voltage wires noise) may need to be taken out of service for periods of 48 hours
Classrooms, and have the tires replaced to prevent catastrophic tire and lecture halls 35-40 dB(A) - wheel assembly failure, potentially causing serious injury or Hospitals 30-35 dB(A) 40 dB(A) death; panels, cables, cords and hand tools, can pose a serious risk to · Conducting detailed identification and marking of all buried workers. Overhead wires can be struck by metal devices, such as electrical wiring prior to any excavation work poles or ladders, and by vehicles with metal booms. Vehicles or grounded metal objects brought into close proximity with overhead wires can result in arcing between the wires and the object, without actual contact. Recommended actions include:
66 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007 66
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Provisions should be made for persons who have to wear Table 2.3.2. No Approach Zones for prescription glasses either through the use overglasses or High Voltage Power Lines prescription hardened glasses. Minimum Nominal phase-to-phase voltage rating distance Welding / Hot Work 750 or more volts, but no more than 150,000 volts 3 meters Welding creates an extremely bright and intense light that may More than 150,000 volts, but no more than 250,000 4.5 meters seriously injur a worker’s eyesight. In extreme cases, blindness volts may result. Additionally, welding may produce noxious fumes to More than 250,000 volts 6 meters which prolonged exposure can cause serious chronic diseases. Recommended measures include:
Eye Hazards · Provision of proper eye protection such as welder goggles Solid particles from a wide variety of industrial operations, and / or and/or a full-face eye shield for all personnel involved in, or a liquid chemical spray may strike a worker in the eye causing an assisting, welding operations. Additional methods may eye injury or permanent blindness. Recommended measures include the use of welding barrier screens around the specific include: work station (a solid piece of light metal, canvas, or plywood designed to block welding light from others). Devices to · Use of machine guards or splash shields and/or face and eye extract and remove noxious fumes at the source may also be protection devices, such as safety glasses with side shields, required. goggles, and/or a full face shield. Specific Safe Operating · Special hot work and fire prevention precautions and Procedures (SOPs) may be required for use of sanding and Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be grinding tools and/or when working around liquid chemicals. implemented if welding or hot cutting is undertaken outside Frequent checks of these types of equipment prior to use to established welding work stations, including ‘Hot Work ensure mechanical integrity is also good practice. Machine Permits, stand-by fire extinguishers, stand-by fire watch, and and equipment guarding should conform to standards maintaining the fire watch for up to one hour after welding or published by organizations such as CSA, ANSI and ISO (see hot cutting has terminated. Special procedures are required also Section 2.3 on Rotating and Moving Equipment and 2.7 for hotwork on tanks or vessels that have contained on Personal Protective Equipment). flammable materials. · Moving areas where the discharge of solid fragments, liquid, or gaseous emissions can reasonably be predicted (e.g. Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic discharge of sparks from a metal cutting station, pressure Poorly trained or inexperienced industrial vehicle drivers have relief valve discharge) away from places expected to be increased risk of accident with other vehicles, pedestrians, and occupied or transited by workers or visitors. Where machine equipment. Industrial vehicles and delivery vehicles, as well as or work fragments could present a hazard to transient private vehicles on-site, also represent potential collision workers or passers-by, extra area guarding or proximity scenarios. Industrial vehicle driving and site traffic safety restricting systems should be implemented, or PPE required practices include: for transients and visitors.
APRIL 30, 2007 67
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Training and licensing industrial vehicle operators in the safe · Use of protective clothing operation of specialized vehicles such as forklifts, including · Providing easy access to adequate hydration such as safe loading/unloading, load limits drinking water or electrolyte drinks, and avoiding · Ensuring drivers undergo medical surveillance consumption of alcoholic beverages · Ensuring moving equipment with restricted rear visibility is outfitted with audible back-up alarms Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling · Establishing rights-of-way, site speed limits, vehicle Injuries due to ergonomic factors, such as repetitive motion, over- inspection requirements, operating rules and procedures exertion, and manual handling, take prolonged and repeated (e.g. prohibiting operation of forklifts with forks in down exposures to develop, and typically require periods of weeks to position), and control of traffic patterns or direction months for recovery. These OHS problems should be minimized · Restricting the circulation of delivery and private vehicles to or eliminated to maintain a productive workplace. Controls may defined routes and areas, giving preference to ‘one-way’ include:
circulation, where appropriate · Facility and workstation design with 5th to 95th percentile operational and maintenance workers in mind Working Environment Temperature · Use of mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions Exposure to hot or cold working conditions in indoor or outdoor required to lift materials, hold tools and work objects, and environments can result temperature stress-related injury or requiring multi-person lifts if weights exceed thresholds death. Use of personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect · Selecting and designing tools that reduce force requirements against other occupational hazards can accentuate and aggravate and holding times, and improve postures heat-related illnesses. Extreme temperatures in permanent work · Providing user adjustable work stations environments should be avoided through implementation of · Incorporating rest and stretch breaks into work processes, engineering controls and ventilation. Where this is not possible, and conducting job rotation such as during short-term outdoor work, temperature-related · Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that stress management procedures should be implemented which reduce unnecessary forces and exertions include: · Taking into consideration additional special conditions such · Monitoring weather forecasts for outdoor work to provide as left handed persons advance warning of extreme weather and scheduling work accordingly Working at Heights · Adjustment of work and rest periods according to Fall prevention and protection measures should be implemented temperature stress management procedures provided by whenever a worker is exposed to the hazard of falling more than ACGIH67, depending on the temperature and workloads two meters; into operating machinery; into water or other liquid; · Providing temporary shelters to protect against the elements into hazardous substances; or through an opening in a work during working activities or for use as rest areas surface. Fall prevention / protection measures may also be warranted on a case-specific basis when there are risks of falling from lesser heights. Fall prevention may include: 67 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007 68
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Installation of guardrails with mid-rails and toe boards at the supplemented with dedicated work station illumination, as needed. edge of any fall hazard area The minimum limits for illumination intensity for a range of · Proper use of ladders and scaffolds by trained employees locations/activities appear in Table 2.3.3.
· Use of fall prevention devices, including safety belt and Controls should include: lanyard travel limiting devices to prevent access to fall hazard · Use of energy efficient light sources with minimum heat area, or fall protection devices such as full body harnesses emission used in conjunction with shock absorbing lanyards or self- · Undertaking measures to eliminate glare / reflections and retracting inertial fall arrest devices attached to fixed anchor flickering of lights point or horizontal life-lines · Taking precautions to minimize and control optical radiation · Appropriate training in use, serviceability, and integrity of the including direct sunlight. Exposure to high intensity UV and necessary PPE IR radiation and high intensity visible light should also be · Inclusion of rescue and/or recovery plans, and equipment to controlled respond to workers after an arrested fall · Controlling laser hazards in accordance with equipment Illumination specifications, certifications, and recognized safety Work area light intensity should be adequate for the general standards. The lowest feasible class Laser should be applied purpose of the location and type of activity, and should be to minimize risks. 2.4 Chemical Hazards Table 2.3.3. Minimum Limits For Workplace Chemical hazards represent potential for illness or injury due to Illumination Intensity single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure to toxic, Location / Activity Light Intensity corrosive, sensitizing or oxidative substances. They also Emergency light 10 lux represent a risk of uncontrolled reaction, including the risk of fire and explosion, if incompatible chemicals are inadvertently mixed. Outdoor non working areas 20 lux Chemical hazards can most effectively be prevented through a Simple orientation and temporary visits (machine 50 lux hierarchical approach that includes: storage, garage, warehouse) · Replacement of the hazardous substance with a less Workspace with occasional visual tasks only 100 lux (corridors, stairways, lobby, elevator, auditorium, etc.) hazardous substitute · Implementation of engineering and administrative control Medium precision work (simple assembly, rough 200 lux machine works, welding, packing, etc.) measures to avoid or minimize the release of hazardous substances into the work environment keeping the level of Precision work (reading, moderately difficult 500 lux assembly, sorting, checking, medium bench and exposure below internationally established or recognized machine works, etc.), offices. limits
High precision work (difficult assembly, sewing, color 1,000 – 3,000 · Keeping the number of employees exposed, or likely to inspection, fine sorting etc.) lux become exposed, to a minimum
APRIL 30, 2007 69
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Communicating chemical hazards to workers through · Where ambient air contains several materials that have labeling and marking according to national and internationally similar effects on the same body organs (additive effects), recognized requirements and standards, including the taking into account combined exposures using calculations International Chemical Safety Cards (ICSC), Materials Safety recommended by the ACGIH69 Data Sheets (MSDS), or equivalent. Any means of written · Where work shifts extend beyond eight (8) hours, calculating communication should be in an easily understood language adjusted workplace exposure criteria recommended by the and be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid ACGIH70 personnel · Training workers in the use of the available information (such Fire and Explosions as MSDSs), safe work practices, and appropriate use of PPE Fires and or explosions resulting from ignition of flammable materials or gases can lead to loss of property as well as possible Air Quality injury or fatalities to project workers. Prevention and control Poor air quality due to the release of contaminants into the work strategies include: place can result in possible respiratory irritation, discomfort, or · Storing flammables away from ignition sources and oxidizing illness to workers. Employers should take appropriate measures materials. Further, flammables storage area should be: to maintain air quality in the work area. These include: o Remote from entry and exit points into buildings · Maintaining levels of contaminant dusts, vapors and gases in o Away from facility ventilation intakes or vents the work environment at concentrations below those o Have natural or passive floor and ceiling level ventilation 68 recommended by the ACGIH as TWA-TLV’s (threshold limit and explosion venting value)—concentrations to which most workers can be o Use spark-proof fixtures exposed repeatedly (8 hours/day, 40 hrs/week, week-after- o Be equipped with fire extinguishing devices and self- week), without sustaining adverse health effects. closing doors, and constructed of materials made to · Developing and implementing work practices to minimize withstand flame impingement for a moderate period of release of contaminants into the work environment including: time Direct piping of liquid and gaseous materials o · Providing bonding and grounding of, and between, o Minimized handling of dry powdered materials; containers and additional mechanical floor level ventilation if o Enclosed operations materials are being, or could be, dispensed in the storage o Local exhaust ventilation at emission / release points area o Vacuum transfer of dry material rather than mechanical · Where the flammable material is mainly comprised of dust, or pneumatic conveyance providing electrical grounding, spark detection, and, if o Indoor secure storage, and sealed containers rather needed, quenching systems than loose storage
69 ACGIH, 2005. 68 ACGIH, 2005 70 ACGIH, 2005.
APRIL 30, 2007 70
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Defining and labeling fire hazards areas to warn of special Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) rules (e.g. prohibition in use of smoking materials, cellular The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) should be phones, or other potential spark generating equipment) avoided in new buildings or as a new material in remodeling or · Providing specific worker training in handling of flammable renovation activities. Existing facilities with ACM should develop materials, and in fire prevention or suppression an asbestos management plan which clearly identifies the locations where the ACM is present, its condition (e.g. whether it Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals is in friable form with the potential to release fibers), procedures Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals present similar for monitoring its condition, procedures to access the locations hazards and require similar control measures as flammable where ACM is present to avoid damage, and training of staff who materials. However, the added hazard of these chemicals is that can potentially come into contact with the material to avoid inadvertent mixing or intermixing may cause serious adverse damage and prevent exposure. The plan should be made reactions. This can lead to the release of flammable or toxic available to all persons involved in operations and maintenance materials and gases, and may lead directly to fires and activities. Repair or removal and disposal of existing ACM in explosions. These types of substances have the additional hazard buildings should only be performed by specially trained of causing significant personal injury upon direct contact, personnel71 following host country requirements, or in their regardless of any intermixing issues. The following controls absence, internationally recognized procedures.72 should be observed in the work environment when handling such chemicals: 2.5 Biological Hazards · Corrosive, oxidizing and reactive chemicals should be Biological agents represent potential for illness or injury due to segregated from flammable materials and from other single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure. Biological chemicals of incompatible class (acids vs. bases, oxidizers hazards can be prevented most effectively by implementing the vs. reducers, water sensitive vs. water based, etc.), stored in following measures: ventilated areas and in containers with appropriate · If the nature of the activity permits, use of any harmful secondary containment to minimize intermixing during spills biological agents should be avoided and replaced with an · Workers who are required to handle corrosive, oxidizing, or agent that, under normal conditions of use, is not dangerous reactive chemicals should be provided with specialized or less dangerous to workers. If use of harmful agents can training and provided with, and wear, appropriate PPE not be avoided, precautions should be taken to keep the risk (gloves, apron, splash suits, face shield or goggles, etc). of exposure as low as possible and maintained below · Where corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals are used, internationally established and recognized exposure limits. handled, or stored, qualified first-aid should be ensured at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be 71 Training of specialized personnel and the maintenance and removal methods easily accessible throughout the place of work, and eye-wash applied should be equivalent to those required under applicable regulations in the stations and/or emergency showers should be provided close United States and Europe (examples of North American training standards are available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/asbestos/training.html) to all workstations where the recommended first-aid 72 Examples include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects; E response is immediate flushing with water 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys; and E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products.
APRIL 30, 2007 71
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Work processes, engineering, and administrative controls The employer should at all times encourage and enforce the should be designed, maintained, and operated to avoid or highest level of hygiene and personal protection, especially for minimize release of biological agents into the working activities employing biological agents of Groups 3 and 4 above. environment. The number of employees exposed or likely to Work involving agents in Groups 3 and 4 should be restricted only become exposed should be kept at a minimum. to those persons who have received specific verifiable training in · The employer should review and assess known and working with and controlling such materials. suspected presence of biological agents at the place of work and implement appropriate safety measures, monitoring, Areas used for the handling of Groups 3 and 4 biological agents training, and training verification programs. should be designed to enable their full segregation and isolation in · Measures to eliminate and control hazards from known and emergency circumstances, include independent ventilation suspected biological agents at the place of work should be systems, and be subject to SOPs requiring routine disinfection designed, implemented and maintained in close co-operation and sterilization of the work surfaces. with the local health authorities and according to recognized international standards. HVAC systems serving areas handling Groups 3 and 4 biological agents should be equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air Biological agents should be classified into four groups73: (HEPA) filtration systems. Equipment should readily enable their disinfection and sterilization, and maintained and operated so as · Group 1: Biological agents unlikely to cause human disease, and consequently only require controls similar to those to prevent growth and spreading of disease agents, amplification required for hazardous or reactive chemical substances; of the biological agents, or breeding of vectors e.g. mosquitoes and flies of public health concern. · Group 2: Biological agents that can cause human disease and are thereby likely to require additional controls, but are unlikely to spread to the community;
· Group 3: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, present a serious hazard to workers, and may present a risk of spreading to the community, for which there usually is effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require extensive additional controls;
· Group 4: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, are a serious hazard to workers, and present a high risk of spreading to the community, for which there is usually no effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require very extensive additional controls.
73 World Health Organization (WHO) Classification of Infective Microorganisms by Risk Group (2004).
APRIL 30, 2007 72
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
2.6 Radiological Hazards · In the case of both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, the preferred method for controlling exposure is shielding and Radiation exposure can lead to potential discomfort, injury or limiting the radiation source. Personal protective equipment serious illness to workers. Prevention and control strategies is supplemental only or for emergency use. Personal include: protective equipment for near-infrared, visible and ultraviolet · Places of work involving occupational and/or natural range radiation can include appropriate sun block creams, exposure to ionizing radiation should be established and with or without appropriate screening clothing. operated in accordance with recognized international safety standards and guidelines.74 The acceptable effective dose 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment limits appear Table 2.6.1. (PPE) · Exposure to non-ionizing radiation (including static magnetic Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional fields; sub-radio frequency magnetic fields; static electric protection to workers exposed to workplace hazards in fields; radio frequency and microwave radiation; light and conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems. near-infrared radiation; and ultraviolet radiation) should be controlled to internationally recommended limits75. PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the other facility controls and provides the worker with an extra level of personal protection. Table 2.7.1 presents general examples of Table 2.6.1. Acceptable Effective Dose Limits for occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different Workplace Radiological Hazards purposes. Recommended measures for use of PPE in the workplace include: Apprentices and Workers students · Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or (min.19 years of (16-18 years procedures cannot eliminate, or sufficiently reduce, a hazard Exposure age) of age)
or exposure Five consecutive year average 20 mSv/year – effective dose · Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers adequate protection to the worker, co-workers, and Single year exposure 50 mSv/year 6 mSv/year – effective dose occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary
inconvenience to the individual Equivalent dose to the lens of 150 mSv/year 50 mSv/year the eye · Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty and replacement when damaged or worn out. Proper use of Equivalent dose to the 150 extremities (hands, feet) or the 500 mSv/year mSv/year PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for skin employees
74 International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources and its three interrelated Safety Guides. IAEA. http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160
75 For example ACGIH (2005) and International Commission for Non-Ionizing Radiation (ICNIRP).
APRIL 30, 2007 73
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk by recognized organizations76. ranking described earlier in this section, and selected according to criteria on performance and testing established 2.8 Special Hazard Environments Special hazard environments are work situations where all of the previously described hazards may exist under unique or especially Table 2.7.1. Summary of Recommended Personal hazardous circumstances. Accordingly, extra precautions or rigor Protective Equipment According to Hazard in application of precautions is required.
Objective Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE Confined Space A confined space is defined as a wholly or partially enclosed Eye and Flying particles, molten Safety Glasses with side-shields, face metal, liquid chemicals, protective shades, etc. space not designed or intended for human occupancy and in protection gases or vapors, light radiation. which a hazardous atmosphere could develop as a result of the contents, location or construction of the confined space or due to Head Falling objects, inadequate Plastic Helmets with top and side protection height clearance, and impact protection. work done in or around the confined space. A “permit-required” overhead power cords. confined space is one that also contains physical or atmospheric Hearing Noise, ultra-sound. Hearing protectors (ear plugs or hazards that could trap or engulf the person.77 protection ear muffs).
Foot Falling or rolling objects, Safety shoes and boots for Confined spaces can occur in enclosed or open structures or protection pointed objects. Corrosive protection against moving & or hot liquids. falling objects, liquids and locations. Serious injury or fatality can result from inadequate chemicals. preparation to enter a confined space or in attempting a rescue
Hand Hazardous materials, cuts Gloves made of rubber or from a confined space. Recommended management approaches protection or lacerations, vibrations, synthetic materials (Neoprene), extreme temperatures. leather, steel, insulating include: materials, etc.
Respiratory Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, Facemasks with appropriate · Engineering measures should be implemented to eliminate, protection gases, smokes, vapors. filters for dust removal and air to the degree feasible, the existence and adverse character purification (chemicals, mists, vapors and gases). Single or of confined spaces. multi-gas personal monitors, if available. · Permit-required confined spaces should be provided with
Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed permanent safety measures for venting, monitoring, and lines). rescue operations, to the extent possible. The area adjoining On-site rescue equipment. an access to a confined space should provide ample room Body/leg Extreme temperatures, Insulating clothing, body suits, for emergency and rescue operations. protection hazardous materials, aprons etc. of appropriate biological agents, cutting materials. and laceration. 76 Examples include the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), http://www.ansi.org/; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health76 (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html; Canadian Standards Association76 (CSA), http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english; Mine Safety and Health Administration76 (MSHA), http://www.msha.gov.
77 US OSHA CFR 1910.146
APRIL 30, 2007 74
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Access hatches should accommodate 90% of the worker persons capable of providing aid and assistance, for continuous population with adjustments for tools and protective clothing. periods exceeding one hour. The worker is therefore at increased The most current ISO and EN standards should be consulted risk should an accident or injury occur. for design specifications; · Where workers may be required to perform work under lone · Prior to entry into a permit-required confined space: or isolated circumstances, Standard Operating Procedures o Process or feed lines into the space should be (SOPs) should be developed and implemented to ensure all disconnected or drained, and blanked and locked-out. PPE and safety measures are in place before the worker o Mechanical equipment in the space should be starts work. SOPs should establish, at a minimum, verbal disconnected, de-energized, locked-out, and braced, as contact with the worker at least once every hour, and ensure appropriate. the worker has a capability for summoning emergency aid. o The atmosphere within the confined space should be · If the worker is potentially exposed to highly toxic or corrosive tested to assure the oxygen content is between 19.5 chemicals, emergency eye-wash and shower facilities should percent and 23 percent, and that the presence of any be equipped with audible and visible alarms to summon aid flammable gas or vapor does not exceed 25 percent of whenever the eye-wash or shower is activated by the worker its respective Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). and without intervention by the worker. o If the atmospheric conditions are not met, the confined space should be ventilated until the target safe 2.9 Monitoring atmosphere is achieved, or entry is only to be Occupational health and safety monitoring programs should verify undertaken with appropriate and additional PPE. the effectiveness of prevention and control strategies. The selected indicators should be representative of the most · Safety precautions should include Self Contained Breathing significant occupational, health, and safety hazards, and the Apparatus (SCBA), life lines, and safety watch workers implementation of prevention and control strategies. The stationed outside the confined space, with rescue and first occupational health and safety monitoring program should include: aid equipment readily available. · Safety inspection, testing and calibration: This should include · Before workers are required to enter a permit-required confined space, adequate and appropriate training in regular inspection and testing of all safety features and hazard control measures focusing on engineering and confined space hazard control, atmospheric testing, use of personal protective features, work procedures, places of the necessary PPE, as well as the serviceability and integrity work, installations, equipment, and tools used. The of the PPE should be verified. Further, adequate and inspection should verify that issued PPE continues to provide appropriate rescue and / or recovery plans and equipment should be in place before the worker enters the confined adequate protection and is being worn as required. All space. instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of working environment parameters should be regularly tested Lone and Isolated Workers and calibrated, and the respective records maintained. A lone and isolated worker is a worker out of verbal and line of · Surveillance of the working environment: Employers should sight communication with a supervisor, other workers, or other document compliance using an appropriate combination of
APRIL 30, 2007 75
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
portable and stationary sampling and monitoring instruments. · The systems and the employer should further enable and Monitoring and analyses should be conducted according to encourage workers to report to management all:
internationally recognized methods and standards. o Occupational injuries and near misses Monitoring methodology, locations, frequencies, and o Suspected cases of occupational disease parameters should be established individually for each o Dangerous occurrences and incidents project following a review of the hazards. Generally, · All reported occupational accidents, occupational diseases, monitoring should be performed during commissioning of dangerous occurrences, and incidents together with near facilities or equipment and at the end of the defect and misses should be investigated with the assistance of a liability period, and otherwise repeated according to the person knowledgeable/competent in occupational safety. The monitoring plan. investigation should: · Surveillance of workers health: When extraordinary o Establish what happened protective measures are required (for example, against o Determine the cause of what happened biological agents Groups 3 and 4, and/or hazardous o Identify measures necessary to prevent a recurrence compounds), workers should be provided appropriate and relevant health surveillance prior to first exposure, and at · Occupational accidents and diseases should, at a minimum, regular intervals thereafter. The surveillance should, if be classified according to Table 2.10.1. Distinction is made deemed necessary, be continued after termination of the between fatal and non-fatal injuries. The two main categories employment. are divided into three sub-categories according to time of death or duration of the incapacity to work. The total work · Training: Training activities for employees and visitors should be adequately monitored and documented (curriculum, hours during the specified reporting period should be duration, and participants). Emergency exercises, including reported to the appropriate regulatory agency. fire drills, should be documented adequately. Service Table 2.9.1. Occupational Accident Reporting providers and contractors should be contractually required to
submit to the employer adequate training documentation a. Fatalities b. Non-fatal c. Total time lost before start of their assignment. (number) injuries non-fatal injuries (number) 78 (days) b.1 Less than one a.1 Immediate Accidents and Diseases monitoring day · The employer should establish procedures and systems for a.2 Within a month b.2 Up to 3 days c.1 Category b.2 b.3 More than 3 reporting and recording: a.3 Within a year c.2 Category b.3 days o Occupational accidents and diseases o Dangerous occurrences and incidents These systems should enable workers to report immediately to their immediate supervisor any situation they believe presents a serious danger to life or health.
78 The day on which an incident occurs is not included in b.2 and b.3.
APRIL 30, 2007 76
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
3.0 Community Health and Safety
3.1 Water Quality and Availability ...... 77 impoundment should prevent adverse impacts to the quality and Water Quality...... 77 availability of groundwater and surface water resources. Water Availability...... 77 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure ...... 78 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) ...... 79 Water Quality Applicability and Approach...... 79 Drinking water sources, whether public or private, should at all Specific Requirements for New Buildings...... 79 times be protected so that they meet or exceed applicable national L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval...... 80 Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings ...... 81 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of Other Hazards...... 81 WHO Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Air emissions, 3.4 Traffic Safety...... 81 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials ...... 82 wastewater effluents, oil and hazardous materials, and wastes General Hazardous Materials Transport...... 82 should be managed according to the guidance provided in the Major Transportation Hazards...... 83 respective sections of the General EHS Guidelines with the 3.6 Disease Prevention...... 85 Communicable Diseases...... 85 objective of protecting soil and water resources. Vector-Borne Diseases...... 85 Where the project includes the delivery of water to the community 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response ...... 86 Communication Systems ...... 86 or to users of facility infrastructure (such as hotel hosts and Emergency Resources ...... 87 hospital patients), where water may be used for drinking, cooking, Training and Updating ...... 87 washing, and bathing, water quality should comply with national Business Continuity and Contingency ...... 88 Applicability and Approach...... 89 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of with WHO Drinking Water Guidelines. Water quality for more sensitive well-being-related demands such as water used in health This section complements the guidance provided in the preceding care facilities or food production may require more stringent, environmental and occupational health and safety sections, industry-specific guidelines or standards, as applicable. Any specifically addressing some aspects of project activities taking dependency factors associated with the deliver of water to the place outside of the traditional project boundaries, but nonetheless local community should be planned for and managed to ensure related to the project operations, as may be applicable on a the sustainability of the water supply by involving the community in project basis. These issues may arise at any stage of a project life its management to minimize the dependency in the long-term. cycle and can have an impact beyond the life of the project. Water Availability 3.1 Water Quality and Availability The potential effect of groundwater or surface water abstraction Groundwater and surface water represent essential sources of for project activities should be properly assessed through a drinking and irrigation water in developing countries, particularly in combination of field testing and modeling techniques, accounting rural areas where piped water supply may be limited or for seasonal variability and projected changes in demand in the unavailable and where available resources are collected by the project area. consumer with little or no treatment. Project activities involving wastewater discharges, water extraction, diversion or
APRIL 30, 2007 77
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Project activities should not compromise the availability of water project structures should be designed in accordance with for personal hygiene needs and should take account of potential engineering and design criteria mandated by site-specific future increases in demand. The overall target should be the risks, including but not limited to seismic activity, slope availability of 100 liters per person per day although lower levels stability, wind loading, and other dynamic loads may be used to meet basic health requirements.79 Water volume · Application of locally regulated or internationally recognized requirements for well-being-related demands such as water use in building codes80 to ensure structures are designed and health care facilities may need to be higher. constructed in accordance with sound architectural and engineering practice, including aspects of fire prevention and 3.2 Structural Safety of Project response Infrastructure · Engineers and architects responsible for designing and Hazards posed to the public while accessing project facilities may constructing facilities, building, plants and other structures include: should certify the applicability and appropriateness of the
· Physical trauma associated with failure of building structures structural criteria employed. · Burns and smoke inhalation from fires International codes, such as those compiled by the International · Injuries suffered as a consequence of falls or contact with Code Council (ICC)81, are intended to regulate the design, heavy equipment construction, and maintenance of a built environment and contain · Respiratory distress from dust, fumes, or noxious odors detailed guidance on all aspects of building safety, encompassing · Exposure to hazardous materials methodology, best practices, and documenting compliance. Reduction of potential hazards is best accomplished during the Depending on the nature of a project, guidance provided in the design phase when the structural design, layout and site ICC or comparable codes should be followed, as appropriate, with modifications can be adapted more easily. The following issues respect to: should be considered and incorporated as appropriate into the · Existing structures planning, siting, and design phases of a project: · Soils and foundations
· Inclusion of buffer strips or other methods of physical · Site grading separation around project sites to protect the public from · Structural design major hazards associated with hazardous materials incidents · Specific requirements based on intended use and occupancy or process failure, as well as nuisance issues related to · Accessibility and means of egress noise, odors, or other emissions · Types of construction · Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to · Roof design and construction prevent failures due to natural risks posed by earthquakes, · Fire-resistant construction tsunamis, wind, flooding, landslides and fire. To this end, all · Flood-resistant construction
79 World Health Organization (WHO) defines 100 liters/capita/day as the amount 80 required to meet all consumption and hygiene needs. Additional information on ILO-OSH, 2001. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/ lower service levels and potential impacts on health are described in “Domestic safework/cops/english/download/e000013.pdf Water Quantity, Service Level and Health” 2003. 81 ICC, 2006. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/diseases/wsh0302/en/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007 78
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Construction materials codes, local fire department regulations, local legal/insurance · Interior environment requirements, and in accordance with an internationally accepted · Mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems life and fire safety (L&FS) standard. The Life Safety Code82, which · Elevators and conveying systems provides extensive documentation on life and fire safety · Fire safety systems provisions, is one example of an internationally accepted standard · Safeguards during construction and may be used to document compliance with the Life and Fire · Encroachments into public right-of-way Safety objectives outlined in these guidelines. With regard to these objectives: Although major design changes may not be feasible during the operation phase of a project, hazard analysis can be undertaken · Project sponsors’ architects and professional consulting to identify opportunities to reduce the consequences of a failure or engineers should demonstrate that affected buildings meet accident. Illustrative management actions, applicable to these life and fire safety objectives. hazardous materials storage and use, include: · Life and fire safety systems and equipment should be · Reducing inventories of hazardous materials through designed and installed using appropriate prescriptive inventory management and process changes to greatly standards and/or performance based design, and sound reduce or eliminate the potential off-site consequences of a engineering practices.
release · Life and fire safety design criteria for all existing buildings · Modifying process or storage conditions to reduce the should incorporate all local building codes and fire potential consequences of an accidental off-site release department regulations. · Improving shut-down and secondary containment to reduce These guidelines apply to buildings that are accessible to the the amount of material escaping from containment and to public. Examples of such buildings include: reduce the release duration · Reducing the probability that releases will occur through · Health and education facilities improved site operations and control, and through · Hotels, convention centers, and leisure facilities improvements in maintenance and inspection · Retail and commercial facilities · Reducing off-site impacts of releases through measures · Airports, other public transport terminals, transfer facilities intended to contain explosions and fires, alert the public, provide for evacuation of surrounding areas, establish safety Specific Requirements for New Buildings zones around a site, and ensure the provision of emergency The nature and extent of life and fire safety systems required will medical services to the public depend on the building type, structure, construction, occupancy, and exposures. Sponsors should prepare a Life and Fire Safety 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan identifying major fire risks, applicable codes, standards and regulations, and mitigation measures. The Master Applicability and Approach 82 All new buildings accessible to the public should be designed, US NFPA. http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% constructed, and operated in full compliance with local building 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search
APRIL 30, 2007 79
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Plan should be prepared by a suitably qualified professional, and Compartmentation adequately cover, but not be limited to, the issues addressed Compartmentation involves all measures to prevent or slow the briefly in the following points. The suitably qualified professional spread of fire and smoke, including: selected to prepare the Master Plan is responsible for a detailed · Separations treatment of the following illustrative, and all other required, · Fire walls issues. · Floors Fire Prevention · Doors Fire prevention addresses the identification of fire risks and · Dampers ignition sources, and measures needed to limit fast fire and smoke · Smoke control systems development. These issues include: Fire Suppression and Control · Fuel load and control of combustibles Fire suppression and control includes all automatic and manual · Ignition sources fire protection installations, such as: · Interior finish flame spread characteristics · Automatic sprinkler systems · Interior finish smoke production characteristics · Manual portable extinguishers · Human acts, and housekeeping and maintenance · Fire hose reels Means of Egress Means of Egress includes all design measures that facilitate a Emergency Response Plan safe evacuation by residents and/or occupants in case of fire or An Emergency Response Plan is a set of scenario–based other emergency, such as: procedures to assist staff and emergency response teams during real life emergency and training exercises. This chapter of the Fire · Clear, unimpeded escape routes and Life Safety Master Plan should include an assessment of local · Accessibility to the impaired/handicapped fire prevention and suppression capabilities. · Marking and signing · Emergency lighting Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance involves preparing schedules for Detection and Alarm Systems mandatory regular maintenance and testing of life and fire safety These systems encompass all measures, including features to ensure that mechanical, electrical, and civil structures communication and public address systems needed to detect a and systems are at all times in conformance with life and fire fire and alert: safety design criteria and required operational readiness.
· Building staff L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval · Emergency response teams · A suitably qualified professional prepares and submits a Life · Occupants and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan, including preliminary · Civil defense drawings and specifications, and certifies that the design
APRIL 30, 2007 80
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
meets the requirements of these L&FS guidelines. The earthquakes, tsunamis, floods, windstorms, and fires from findings and recommendations of the review are then used to surrounding areas). establish the conditions of a Corrective Action Plan and a · All such structures should be designed in accordance with time frame for implementing the changes. the criteria mandated by situation-, climatic-, and geology- · The suitably qualified professional conducts a review as part specific location risks (e.g. seismic activity, wind loading, and of the project completion test at the time of life and fire safety other dynamic loads). systems testing and commissioning, and certifies that · Structural engineers and architects responsible for facilities, construction of these systems has been carried out in buildings, plants and structures should certify the applicability accordance with the accepted design. The findings and and appropriateness of the design criteria employed. recommendations of the review are used as the basis for · National or regional building regulations typically contain fire establishing project completion or to establish the conditions safety codes and standards83 or these standards are found in of a Pre-Completion Corrective Action Plan and a time frame separate Fire Codes.84,85 Generally, such codes and for implementing the changes. regulations incorporate further compliance requirements with respect to methodology, practice, testing, and other codes Specific Requirements for Existing and standards86. Such nationally referenced material Buildings constitutes the acceptable fire life safety code. · All life and fire safety guideline requirements for new buildings apply to existing buildings programmed for 3.4 Traffic Safety renovation. A suitably qualified professional conducts a Traffic accidents have become one of the most significant causes complete life and fire safety review of existing buildings of injuries and fatalities among members of the public worldwide. slated for renovation. The findings and recommendations of Traffic safety should be promoted by all project personnel during the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of displacement to and from the workplace, and during operation of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a time frame for project equipment on private or public roads. Prevention and implementing the changes. control of traffic related injuries and fatalities should include the · If it becomes apparent that life and fire safety conditions are adoption of safety measures that are protective of project workers deficient in an existing building that is not part of the project and of road users, including those who are most vulnerable to or that has not been programmed for renovation, a life and road traffic accidents87. Road safety initiatives proportional to the fire safety review of the building may be conducted by a scope and nature of project activities should include: suitably qualified professional. The findings and recommendations of the review are used as the basis to
establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a 83 For example, Australia, Canada, South Africa, United Kingdom time frame for implementing the changes. 84 Réglementation Incendie [des ERP] 85 USA NFPA, 2006. 86 Prepared by National Institutes and Authorities such as American Society for Other Hazards Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS), German Institute of Standardization (DIN), and French Standards (NF) · Facilities, buildings, plants, and structures should be situated 87 Additional information on vulnerable users of public roads in developing countries is provided by Peden et al., 2004. to minimize potential risks from forces of nature (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007 81
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Adoption of best transport safety practices across all aspects · Employing safe traffic control measures, including road signs of project operations with the goal of preventing traffic and flag persons to warn of dangerous conditions accidents and minimizing injuries suffered by project personnel and the public. Measures should include: 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials o Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers General Hazardous Materials Transport o Improving driving skills and requiring licensing of drivers · Projects should have procedures in place that ensure o Adopting limits for trip duration and arranging driver compliance with local laws and international requirements rosters to avoid overtiredness applicable to the transport of hazardous materials, including: o Avoiding dangerous routes and times of day to reduce 89 the risk of accidents o IATA requirements for air transport 90 o Use of speed control devices (governors) on trucks, and o IMDG Code sea transport remote monitoring of driver actions o UN Model Regulations91 of other international standards as well as local requirements for land transport · Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer o Host-country commitments under the Basel Convention approved parts to minimize potentially serious accidents on the Control of Transboundary Movements of caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure. Hazardous Waste and their disposal and Rotterdam Where the project may contribute to a significant increase in traffic Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for along existing roads, or where road transport is a significant Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in component of a project, recommended measures include: International Trade, if applicable to the project activities
· Minimizing pedestrian interaction with construction vehicles · The procedures for transportation of hazardous materials · Collaboration with local communities and responsible (Hazmats) should include: authorities to improve signage, visibility and overall safety of o Proper labeling of containers, including the identify and roads, particularly along stretches located near schools or quantity of the contents, hazards, and shipper contact other locations where children may be present. Collaborating information with local communities on education about traffic and o Providing a shipping document (e.g. shipping manifest) pedestrian safety (e.g. school education campaigns)88 that describes the contents of the load and its · Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that associated hazards in addition to the labeling of the appropriate first aid is provided in the event of accidents containers. The shipping document should establish a · Using locally sourced materials, whenever possible, to chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies to show minimize transport distances. Locating associated facilities that the waste was properly shipped, transported and such as worker camps close to project sites and arranging received by the recycling or treatment/disposal facility worker bus transport to minimizing external traffic 89 IATA, 2005. www.iata.org 90 IMO. www.imo.org/safety 88Additional sources of information for implementation of road safety measures is 91 United Nations. Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations. 14th available at WHO, 1989, Ross et al., 1991, Tsunokawa and Hoban, 1997, and Revised Edition. Geneva 2005. OECD, 1999 http://www.unece.org/trans/danger/publi/unrec/rev14/14files_e.html
APRIL 30, 2007 82
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
o Ensuring that the volume, nature, integrity and · The existing criteria for the safe transportation of hazardous protection of packaging and containers used for materials, including environmental management systems transport are appropriate for the type and quantity of used by the company and its contractors hazardous material and modes of transport involved This review should cover the management actions, preventive o Ensuring adequate transport vehicle specifications measures and emergency response procedures described below. o Training employees involved in the transportation of The hazard assessment helps to determine what additional hazardous materials regarding proper shipping measures may be required to complete the plan. procedures and emergency procedures o Using labeling and placarding (external signs on Management Actions transport vehicles), as required · Management of Change: These procedures should address: o Providing the necessary means for emergency response The technical basis for changes in hazardous materials on call 24 hours/day o offered for transportation, routes and/or procedures Major Transportation Hazards o The potential impact of changes on health and safety Guidance related to major transportation hazards should be o Modification required to operating procedures implemented in addition to measures presented in the preceding o Authorization requirements section for preventing or minimizing the consequences of o Employees affected catastrophic releases of hazardous materials, which may result in o Training needs toxic, fire, explosion, or other hazards during transportation. · Compliance Audit: A compliance audit evaluates compliance with prevention requirements for each transportation route or In addition to these aforementioned procedures, projects which for each hazardous material, as appropriate. A compliance transport hazardous materials at or above the threshold audit covering each element of the prevention measures (see quantities92 should prepare a Hazardous Materials Transportation below) should be conducted at least every three years. The Plan containing all of the elements presented below93. audit program should include:
Hazard Assessment o Preparation of a report of the findings o Determination and documentation of the appropriate The hazard assessment should identify the potential hazard response to each finding involved in the transportation of hazardous materials by reviewing: o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected. · The hazard characteristics of the substances identified during · Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable the screening stage information about transportation hazards and the steps · The history of accidents, both by the company and its needed to prevent accidental releases. The implementation contractors, involving hazardous materials transportation of incident investigation procedures should ensure that: 92 Threshold quantities for the transport of hazardous materials are found in the UN – Transport of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations cited above. o Investigations are initiated promptly
93 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance o Summaries of investigations are included in a report Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Transportation Manual. Washington, D.C. December 2000. o Report findings and recommendations are addressed
APRIL 30, 2007 83
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
o Reports are reviewed with staff and contractors Preventive Measures
· Employee Participation: There should be a written plan of The plan should include procedures to implement preventive action regarding the implementation of active employee measures specific to each hazardous material offered for participation in the prevention of accidents. transportation, including:
· Classification and segregation of hazardous materials in · Contractors: The plan should include procedures to ensure warehouses and transport units that: · Packaging and packaging testing o The contractor is provided with safety performance · Marking and labeling of packages containing hazardous procedures and safety and hazard information materials o Contractors observe safety practices · Handling and securing packages containing hazardous o Verify that the contractor acts responsibly materials in transport units The plan should also include additional procedures to ensure · Marking and placarding of transport units the contractors will: · Documentation (e.g. bills of lading) o Ensure appropriate training for their employees · Application of special provisions, as appropriate o Ensure their employees know process hazards and applicable emergency actions Emergency Preparedness and Response o Prepare and submit training records It is important to develop procedures and practices for the o Inform employees about the hazards presented by their handling of hazardous materials that allow for quick and efficient work responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental damage. The sponsor should prepare an Emergency · Training: Good training programs on operating procedures Preparedness and Response Plan that should cover: will provide the employees with the necessary information to understand how to operate safely and why safe operations · Planning Coordination: This should include procedures for: are needed. The training program should include: o Informing the public and emergency response agencies o The list of employees to be trained o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment o Specific training objectives o Taking emergency response actions o Mechanisms to achieve objectives (i.e. hands-on o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan workshops, videos, etc.) to reflect changes and ensuring that the employees are o Means to determine the effectiveness of the training informed of such changes program · Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures o Training procedures for new hires and refresher for using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining emergency programs response equipment.
· Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant procedures
APRIL 30, 2007 84
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
3.6 Disease Prevention access to medical treatment, confidentiality and appropriate care, particularly with respect to migrant workers Communicable Diseases · Promoting collaboration with local authorities to enhance Communicable diseases pose a significant public health threat access of workers families and the community to public worldwide. Health hazards typically associated with large health services and promote immunization development projects are those relating to poor sanitation and living conditions, sexual transmission and vector-borne infections. Vector-Borne Diseases Communicable diseases of most concern during the construction Reducing the impact of vector-borne disease on the long-term phase due to labor mobility are sexually-transmitted diseases health of workers is best accomplished through implementation of (STDs), such as HIV/AIDS. Recognizing that no single measure diverse interventions aimed at eliminating the factors that lead to is likely to be effective in the long term, successful initiatives disease. Project sponsors, in close collaboration with community typically involve a combination of behavioral and environmental health authorities, can implement an integrated control strategy for modifications. mosquito and other arthropod-borne diseases that might involve:
· Prevention of larval and adult propagation through sanitary Recommended interventions at the project level include94: improvements and elimination of breeding habitats close to · Providing surveillance and active screening and treatment of human settlements workers · Elimination of unusable impounded water · Preventing illness among workers in local communities by: · Increase in water velocity in natural and artificial channels o Undertaking health awareness and education initiatives, · Considering the application of residual insecticide to for example, by implementing an information strategy to dormitory walls reinforce person-to-person counseling addressing · Implementation of integrated vector control programs systemic factors that can influence individual behavior · Promoting use of repellents, clothing, netting, and other as well as promoting individual protection, and barriers to prevent insect bites protecting others from infection, by encouraging condom · Use of chemoprophylaxis drugs by non-immune workers and use collaborating with public health officials to help eradicate o Training health workers in disease treatment disease reservoirs o Conducting immunization programs for workers in local · Monitoring and treatment of circulating and migrating communities to improve health and guard against populations to prevent disease reservoir spread infection · Collaboration and exchange of in-kind services with other o Providing health services control programs in the project area to maximize beneficial · Providing treatment through standard case management in effects on-site or community health care facilities. Ensuring ready · Educating project personnel and area residents on risks, prevention, and available treatment · Monitoring communities during high-risk seasons to detect 94 Additional sources of information on disease prevention include IFC, 2006; UNDP, 2000, 2003; Walley et al., 2000; Kindhauser, 2003; Heymann, 2004. and treat cases
APRIL 30, 2007 85
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Distributing appropriate education materials Alarm bells, visual alarms, or other forms of communication · Following safety guidelines for the storage, transport, and should be used to reliably alert workers to an emergency. Related distribution of pesticides to minimize the potential for misuse, measures include: spills, and accidental human exposure · Testing warning systems at least annually (fire alarms monthly), and more frequently if required by local regulations, 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and equipment, or other considerations Response · Installing a back-up system for communications on-site with An emergency is an unplanned event when a project operation off-site resources, such as fire departments, in the event that loses control, or could lose control, of a situation that may result in normal communication methods may be inoperable during an risks to human health, property, or the environment, either within emergency the facility or in the local community. Emergencies do not normally include safe work practices for frequent upsets or events Community Notification that are covered by occupational health and safety. If a local community may be at risk from a potential emergency arising at the facility, the company should implement All projects should have an Emergency Preparedness and communication measures to alert the community, such as: Response Plan that is commensurate with the risks of the facility and that includes the following basic elements: · Audible alarms, such as fire bells or sirens
· Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions, etc) · Fan out telephone call lists · Organization of emergency areas (command centers, · Vehicle mounted speakers medical stations, etc) · Communicating details of the nature of the emergency · Roles and responsibilities · Communicating protection options (evacuation, quarantine) · Communication systems · Providing advise on selecting an appropriate protection · Emergency response procedures option · Emergency resources Media and Agency Relations · Training and updating Emergency information should be communicated to the media · Checklists (role and action list and equipment checklist) through: · Business Continuity and Contingency · A trained, local spokesperson able to interact with relevant Additional information is provided for key components of the stakeholders, and offer guidance to the company for emergency plan, as follows below. speaking to the media, government, and other agencies · Written press releases with accurate information, appropriate Communication Systems level of detail for the emergency, and for which accuracy can Worker notification and communication be guaranteed
APRIL 30, 2007 86
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Emergency Resources · Considering the quantity, response time, capability, limitations, and cost of these resources, for both site-specific Finance and Emergency Funds emergencies, and community or regional emergencies · A mechanism should be provided for funding emergency · Considering if external resources are unable to provide activities. sufficient capacity during a regional emergency and whether additional resources may need to be maintained on-site Fire Services · The company should consider the level of local fire fighting Mutual Aid capacity and whether equipment is available for use at the Mutual aid agreements decrease administrative confusion and facility in the event of a major emergency or natural disaster. provide a clear basis for response by mutual aid providers. If insufficient capacity is available, fire fighting capacity · Where appropriate, mutual aid agreements should be should be acquired that may include pumps, water supplies, maintained with other organizations to allow for sharing of trucks, and training for personnel. personnel and specialized equipment. Medical Services Contact List · The company should provide first aid attendants for the · The company should develop a list of contact information for facility as well as medical equipment suitable for the all internal and external resources and personnel. The list personnel, type of operation, and the degree of treatment should include the name, description, location, and contact likely to be required prior to transportation to hospital. details (telephone, email) for each of the resources, and be Availability of Resources maintained annually. Appropriate measures for managing the availability of resources in Training and Updating case of an emergency include: The emergency preparedness facilities and emergency response · Maintaining a list of external equipment, personnel, facilities, plans require maintenance, review, and updating to account for funding, expert knowledge, and materials that may be changes in equipment, personnel, and facilities. Training required to respond to emergencies. The list should include programs and practice exercises provide for testing systems to personnel with specialized expertise for spill clean-up, flood ensure an adequate level of emergency preparedness. Programs control, engineering, water treatment, environmental science, should: etc., or any of the functions required to adequately respond · Identify training needs based on the roles and to the identified emergency responsibilities, capabilities and requirements of personnel · Providing personnel who can readily call up resources, as in an emergency required · Develop a training plan to address needs, particularly for fire · Tracking and managing the costs associated with emergency fighting, spill response, and evacuation resources
APRIL 30, 2007 87
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Conduct annual training, at least, and perhaps more frequent training when the response includes specialized equipment, procedures, or hazards, or when otherwise mandated · Provide training exercises to allow personnel the opportunity to test emergency preparedness, including:
o Desk top exercises with only a few personnel, where the contact lists are tested and the facilities and communication assessed o Response exercises, typically involving drills that allow for testing of equipment and logistics o Debrief upon completion of a training exercise to assess what worked well and what aspects require improvement o Update the plan, as required, after each exercise. Elements of the plan subject to significant change (such as contact lists) should be replaced o Record training activities and the outcomes of the training
Business Continuity and Contingency Measures to address business continuity and contingency include:
· Identifying replacement supplies or facilities to allow business continuity following an emergency. For example, alternate sources of water, electricity, and fuel are commonly sought. · Using redundant or duplicate supply systems as part of facility operations to increase the likelihood of business continuity. · Maintaining back-ups of critical information in a secure location to expedite the return to normal operations following an emergency.
APRIL 30, 2007 88
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
4.0 Construction and Decommissioning
planned during periods of the day that will result in least 4.1 Environment...... 89 disturbance Noise and Vibration ...... 89 Soil Erosion...... 89 · Using noise control devices, such as temporary noise Air Quality...... 90 barriers and deflectors for impact and blasting activities, and Solid Waste...... 90 exhaust muffling devices for combustion engines. Hazardous Materials...... 91 Wastewater Discharges...... 91 · Avoiding or minimizing project transportation through Contaminated Land ...... 91 community areas 4.2 Occupational Health and Safety...... 92 4.3 Community Health and Safety ...... 94 General Site Hazards ...... 94 Soil Erosion Disease Prevention ...... 94 Soil erosion may be caused by exposure of soil surfaces to rain Traffic Safety...... 95 and wind during site clearing, earth moving, and excavation
activities. The mobilization and transport of soil particles may, in turn, result in sedimentation of surface drainage networks, which Applicability and Approach may result in impacts to the quality of natural water systems and This section provides additional, specific guidance on prevention ultimately the biological systems that use these waters. and control of community health and safety impacts that may Recommended soil erosion and water system management occur during new project development, at the end of the project approaches include: life-cycle, or due to expansion or modification of existing project facilities. Cross referencing is made to various other sections of Sediment mobilization and transport the General EHS Guidelines. · Reducing or preventing erosion by: 4.1 Environment{ TC "4.1 o Scheduling to avoid heavy rainfall periods (i.e., during Environment" \f C \l "2" } the dry season) to the extent practical o Contouring and minimizing length and steepness of Noise and Vibration slopes During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and o Mulching to stabilize exposed areas vibration may be caused by the operation of pile drivers, earth o Re-vegetating areas promptly moving and excavation equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and o Designing channels and ditches for post-construction the transportation of equipment, materials and people. Some flows recommended noise reduction and control strategies to consider o Lining steep channel and slopes (e.g. use jute matting) in areas close to community areas include: · Reducing or preventing off-site sediment transport through · Planning activities in consultation with local communities so use of settlement ponds, silt fences, and water treatment, that activities with the greatest potential to generate noise are and modifying or suspending activities during extreme rainfall and high winds to the extent practical.
APRIL 30, 2007 89
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
Clean runoff management Air Quality · Segregating or diverting clean water runoff to prevent it Construction and decommissioning activities may generate mixing with water containing a high solids content, to emission of fugitive dust caused by a combination of on-site minimize the volume of water to be treated prior to release excavation and movement of earth materials, contact of construction machinery with bare soil, and exposure of bare soil Road design and soil piles to wind. A secondary source of emissions may · Limiting access road gradients to reduce runoff-induced include exhaust from diesel engines of earth moving equipment, erosion as well as from open burning of solid waste on-site. Techniques to · Providing adequate road drainage based on road width, consider for the reduction and control of air emissions from surface material, compaction, and maintenance construction and decommissioning sites include:
· Minimizing dust from material handling sources, such as Disturbance to water bodies conveyors and bins, by using covers and/or control · Depending on the potential for adverse impacts, installing equipment (water suppression, bag house, or cyclone) free-spanning structures (e.g., single span bridges) for road · Minimizing dust from open area sources, including storage watercourse crossings piles, by using control measures such as installing · Restricting the duration and timing of in-stream activities to enclosures and covers, and increasing the moisture content lower low periods, and avoiding periods critical to biological · Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such cycles of valued flora and fauna (e.g., migration, spawning, as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust etc.) from vehicle movements · For in-stream works, using isolation techniques such as · Selectively removing potential hazardous air pollutants, such berming or diversion during construction to limit the exposure as asbestos, from existing infrastructure prior to demolition of disturbed sediments to moving water · Managing emissions from mobile sources according to · Consider using trenchless technology for pipeline crossings Section 1.1 (e.g., suspended crossings) or installation by directional · Avoiding open burning of solid (refer to solid waste drilling management guidance in Section 1.6) Structural (slope) stability Solid Waste · Providing effective short term measures for slope Non-hazardous solid waste generated at construction and stabilization, sediment control and subsidence control until decommissioning sites includes excess fill materials from grading long term measures for the operational phase can be and excavation activities, scrap wood and metals, and small implemented concrete spills. Other non-hazardous solid wastes include office, · Providing adequate drainage systems to minimize and kitchen, and dormitory wastes when these types of operations are control infiltration part of construction project activities. Hazardous solid waste includes contaminated soils, which could potentially be encountered on-site due to previous land use activities, or small
APRIL 30, 2007 90
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
amounts of machinery maintenance materials, such as oily rags, Wastewater Discharges used oil filters, and used oil, as well as spill cleanup materials from Construction and decommissioning activities may include the oil and fuel spills. Techniques for preventing and controlling non- generation of sanitary wastewater discharges in varying quantities hazardous and hazardous construction site solid waste include depending on the number of workers involved. Adequate portable those already discussed in Section 1.6. or permanent sanitation facilities serving all workers should be provided at all construction sites. Sanitary wastewater in Hazardous Materials construction and other sites should be managed as described in Construction and decommissioning activities may pose the Section 1.3. potential for release of petroleum based products, such as lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or fuels during their storage, transfer, Contaminated Land or use in equipment. These materials may also be encountered Land contamination may be encountered in sites under during decommissioning activities in building components or construction or decommissioning due to known or unknown industrial process equipment. Techniques for prevention, historical releases of hazardous materials or oil, or due to the minimization, and control of these impacts include: presence of abandoned infrastructure formerly used to store or
· Providing adequate secondary containment for fuel storage handle these materials, including underground storage tanks. tanks and for the temporary storage of other fluids such as Actions necessary to manage the risk from contaminated land will lubricating oils and hydraulic fluids, depend on factors such as the level and location of contamination, · Using impervious surfaces for refueling areas and other fluid the type and risks of the contaminated media, and the intended transfer areas land use. However, a basic management strategy should include:
· Training workers on the correct transfer and handling of fuels · Managing contaminated media with the objective of and chemicals and the response to spills protecting the safety and health of occupants of the site, the · Providing portable spill containment and cleanup equipment surrounding community, and the environment post on site and training in the equipment deployment construction or post decommissioning · Assessing the contents of hazardous materials and · Understanding the historical use of the land with regard to petroleum-based products in building systems (e.g. PCB the potential presence of hazardous materials or oil prior to containing electrical equipment, asbestos-containing building initiation of construction or decommissioning activities materials) and process equipment and removing them prior · Preparing plans and procedures to respond to the discovery to initiation of decommissioning activities, and managing their of contaminated media to minimize or reduce the risk to treatment and disposal according to Sections 1.5 and 1.6 on health, safety, and the environment consistent with the Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Waste Management, approach for Contaminated Land in Section 1.6 respectively · Preparation of a management plan to manage obsolete, · Assessing the presence of hazardous substances in or on abandoned, hazardous materials or oil consistent with the building materials (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos- approach to hazardous waste management described in containing flooring or insulation) and decontaminating or Section 1.6. properly managing contaminated building materials
APRIL 30, 2007 91
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
Successful implementation of any management strategy may · Implementing good house-keeping practices, such as the require identification and cooperation with whoever is responsible sorting and placing loose construction materials or demolition and liable for the contamination. debris in established areas away from foot paths · Cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills regularly 4.2 Occupational Health and Safety{ · Locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and TC "4.2 Occupational Health and marked corridors Safety" \f C \l "2" } · Use of slip retardant footwear
Over-exertion Work in Heights Over-exertion, and ergonomic injuries and illnesses, such as Falls from elevation associated with working with ladders, repetitive motion, over-exertion, and manual handling, are among scaffolding, and partially built or demolished structures are among the most common causes of injuries in construction and the most common cause of fatal or permanent disabling injury at decommissioning sites. Recommendations for their prevention construction or decommissioning sites. If fall hazards exist, a fall and control include: protection plan should be in place which includes one or more of · Training of workers in lifting and materials handling the following aspects, depending on the nature of the fall hazard95: techniques in construction and decommissioning projects, · Training and use of temporary fall prevention devices, such including the placement of weight limits above which as rails or other barriers able to support a weight of 200 mechanical assists or two-person lifts are necessary pounds, when working at heights equal or greater than two · Planning work site layout to minimize the need for manual meters or at any height if the risk includes falling into transfer of heavy loads operating machinery, into water or other liquid, into · Selecting tools and designing work stations that reduce force hazardous substances, or through an opening in a work requirements and holding times, and which promote surface improved postures, including, where applicable, user · Training and use of personal fall arrest systems, such as full adjustable work stations body harnesses and energy absorbing lanyards able to · Implementing administrative controls into work processes, support 5000 pounds (also described in this section in such as job rotations and rest or stretch breaks Working at Heights above), as well as fall rescue procedures to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully Slips and Falls arrested. The tie in point of the fall arresting system should Slips and falls on the same elevation associated with poor also be able to support 5000 pounds housekeeping, such as excessive waste debris, loose construction · Use of control zones and safety monitoring systems to warn materials, liquid spills, and uncontrolled use of electrical cords and workers of their proximity to fall hazard zones, as well as ropes on the ground, are also among the most frequent cause of lost time accidents at construction and decommissioning sites. Recommended methods for the prevention of slips and falls from, 95 Additional information on identification of fall hazards and design of protection systems can be found in the United States Occupational Health and Safety or on, the same elevation include: Administration’s (US OSHA) web site: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/fallprotection/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007 92
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
securing, marking, and labeling covers for openings in floors, a turn while moving. Techniques for the prevention and control of roofs, or walking surfaces these impacts include:
· Planning and segregating the location of vehicle traffic, Struck By Objects machine operation, and walking areas, and controlling Construction and demolition activities may pose significant vehicle traffic through the use of one-way traffic routes, hazards related to the potential fall of materials or tools, as well as establishment of speed limits, and on-site trained flag-people ejection of solid particles from abrasive or other types of power wearing high-visibility vests or outer clothing covering to tools which can result in injury to the head, eyes, and extremities. direct traffic Techniques for the prevention and control of these hazards · Ensuring the visibility of personnel through their use of high include: visibility vests when working in or walking through heavy · Using a designated and restricted waste drop or discharge equipment operating areas, and training of workers to verify zones, and/or a chute for safe movement of wastes from eye contact with equipment operators before approaching the upper to lower levels operating vehicle · Conducting sawing, cutting, grinding, sanding, chipping or · Ensuring moving equipment is outfitted with audible back-up chiseling with proper guards and anchoring as applicable alarms · Maintaining clear traffic ways to avoid driving of heavy · Using inspected and well-maintained lifting devices that are equipment over loose scrap appropriate for the load, such as cranes, and securing loads · Use of temporary fall protection measures in scaffolds and when lifting them to higher job-site elevations. out edges of elevated work surfaces, such as hand rails and toe boards to prevent materials from being dislodged Dust · Evacuating work areas during blasting operations, and using · Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such blast mats or other means of deflection to minimize fly rock or as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust ejection of demolition debris if work is conducted in proximity from vehicle movements to people or structures · PPE, such as dusk masks, should be used where dust levels · Wearing appropriate PPE, such as safety glasses with side are excessive shields, face shields, hard hats, and safety shoes Confined Spaces and Excavations Moving Machinery Examples of confined spaces that may be present in construction Vehicle traffic and use of lifting equipment in the movement of or demolition sites include: silos, vats, hoppers, utility vaults, machinery and materials on a construction site may pose tanks, sewers, pipes, and access shafts. Ditches and trenches temporary hazards, such as physical contact, spills, dust, may also be considered a confined space when access or egress emissions, and noise. Heavy equipment operators have limited is limited. In addition to the guidance provided in Section 2.8 the fields of view close to their equipment and may not see occupational hazards associated with confined spaces and pedestrians close to the vehicle. Center-articulated vehicles create excavations in construction and decommissioning sites should be a significant impact or crush hazard zone on the outboard side of prevented according to the following recommendations:
APRIL 30, 2007 93
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
· Controlling site-specific factors which may contribute to respirators, clothing/protective suits, gloves and eye excavation slope instability including, for example, the use of protection excavation dewatering, side-walls support, and slope gradient adjustments that eliminate or minimize the risk of 4.3 Community Health and Safety{ TC collapse, entrapment, or drowning "4.3 Community Health and Safety" \f C \l "2" } · Providing safe means of access and egress from excavations, such as graded slopes, graded access route, or General Site Hazards stairs and ladders Projects should implement risk management strategies to protect · Avoiding the operation of combustion equipment for the community from physical, chemical, or other hazards prolonged periods inside excavations areas where other associated with sites under construction and decommissioning. workers are required to enter unless the area is actively Risks may arise from inadvertent or intentional trespassing, ventilated including potential contact with hazardous materials, contaminated soils and other environmental media, buildings that are vacant or Other Site Hazards under construction, or excavations and structures which may pose Construction and decommissioning sites may pose a risk of falling and entrapment hazards. Risk management strategies may exposure to dust, chemicals, hazardous or flammable materials, include: and wastes in a combination of liquid, solid, or gaseous forms, which should be prevented through the implementation of project- · Restricting access to the site, through a combination of specific plans and other applicable management practices, institutional and administrative controls, with a focus on high including: risk structures or areas depending on site-specific situations, including fencing, signage, and communication of risks to the · Use of specially trained personnel to identify and remove local community waste materials from tanks, vessels, processing equipment · Removing hazardous conditions on construction sites that or contaminated land as a first step in decommissioning cannot be controlled affectively with site access restrictions, activities to allow for safe excavation, construction, such as covering openings to small confined spaces, dismantling or demolition ensuring means of escape for larger openings such as · Use of specially trained personnel to identify and selectively trenches or excavations, or locked storage of hazardous remove potentially hazardous materials in building elements materials prior to dismantling or demolition including, for example, insulation or structural elements containing asbestos and Disease Prevention Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), electrical components Increased incidence of communicable and vector-borne diseases containing mercury96 attributable to construction activities represents a potentially · Use of waste-specific PPE based on the results of an serious health threat to project personnel and residents of local occupational health and safety assessment, including communities. Recommendations for the prevention and control of communicable and vector-borne diseases also applicable to 96 Additional information on the management and removal of asbestos containing building materials can be found in ASTM Standard E2356 and E1368
APRIL 30, 2007 94
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING
WORLD BANK GROUP
construction phase activities are provided in Section 3.6 (Disease Prevention).
Traffic Safety Construction activities may result in a significant increase in movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of construction materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related accidents and injuries to workers and local communities. The incidence of road accidents involving project vehicles during construction should be minimized through a combination of education and awareness-raising, and the adoption of procedures described in Section 3.4 (Traffic Safety).
APRIL 30, 2007 95
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
References and Additional Sources
ATSDR (Agency for Toxic Substance and Disease Registry). Quick Reference Chavasse, D.C. and H.H. Yap, eds. 1997. Chemical Methods for the Control of Pocket Guide for Toxicological Profiles. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxguides/ Vectors and Pests of Public Health Importance. Geneva, Switzerland: World (accessed May 19, 2006). Health Organization. ATSDR. 2005. Top 20 Hazardous Substances 2005. Dockrill, Paul and Frank Friedrich. 2001. “Boilers and Heaters: Improving Energy http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/cxcx3.html (accessed May 19, 2006). Efficiency.” NRCAN. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/boilersheaters.pdf Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA). 2000. Air Pollution Engineering Manual, Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, NY. Environment Canada, 2005. Hazardous Waste. http://www.atl.ec.gc.ca/pollution/hazardouswaste.html (accessed May 19, 2006). ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). 2005. Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment. European Commission. 2000. “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” Cincinnati:ACGIH. Directorate-General for Environment. http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Homepage. http://www.ansi.org/ (accessed May 19, 2006). European Council Directive 91/271 of 21 May 1991 concerning urban wastewater treatment (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/water- ADB. 2003. Road Safety Audit for Road Projects: An Operational Tool. Asian urbanwaste/info/docs_en.htm) Development Bank, Manila. EPER (European Pollutant Emission Register). Homepage. American Petroleum Institute, Management of Process Hazards (R.P. 750). http://www.eper.cec.eu.int/eper/default.asp (accessed May 19, 2006). Assum, T. 1998. Road Safety in Africa: Appraisal of Road Safety Initiatives in EREC (European Renewable Energy Council). 2006. Renewable Energy Sources. Five African Countries. Working Paper No. 33. The World Bank and United http://www.erec-renewables.org/sources/default.htm (accessed April 24, 2006). Nations Economic Commission for Africa. EUROPA. Summaries of Legislation: Air Pollution. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1739-95(2002) Standard http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm (accessed March 25, 2006) Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites Fairman, Robyn, Carl D.Mead, and W. Peter Williams. 1999. “Environmental Risk ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at Assessment - Approaches, Experiences and Information Sources”. London: chemical release sites). Monitoring and Assessment Research Centre, King's College,. ASTM E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement http://reports.eea.eu.int/GH-07-97-595-EN-C2/en Projects FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization). 1995. “Guidelines on Good Labeling ASTM E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys Practices for Pesticides.” Rome: FAO. http://ecoport.org/Resources/Refs/Pesticid/Guides/guides.htm ASTM E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products. FAO. 1985. “Guidelines for the Packaging and Storage of Pesticides.” Rome: FAO http://www.fao.org/ag/AGP/AGPP/Pesticid/Code/Download/pacstor.doc Australian Government. NPI Industry Reporting. Department of the Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Francey, R., J. Pickford and R. Reed. 1992. “A Guide to the Development of On- site Sanitation.” Geneva: World Health Organization. Australian Government. 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” Department http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/hygiene/envsan/onsitesan/en/print.html Of Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf GVRD (Greater Vancouver Regional District). 1999. Caring for our Waterways: Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines Liquid Waste Management Plan Stage 2, Discussion Document. 136 pp. available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html GVRD. 2001. “Liquid Waste Management Plan.” Greater Vancouver: Stormwater Bringezu, Stefan and Helmut Schutz. 2001. “Material use indicators for the Management Technical Advisory Task Group. European Union, 1980-1997 – Economy-side material flow accounts and balances http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/sewerage/lwmp_feb2001/lwmp_plan_feb2001.pdf and derived indicators of resource use.” European Commission. http://www.belspo.be/platformisd/Library/Material%20use%20Bringezu.PDF IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America). Homepage. http://www.iesna.org/ (accessed May 18, 2006) BC MOE (BC Ministry of Environment). Guidance on Contaminated Sites. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance/ (accessed May 18, Industry Canada. Eco-efficiency. http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/internet/inee- 2006) ee.nsf/en/Home (accessed May 18, 2006) CIWMB (California Integrated Waste Management Board). “Sustainable Materials”. IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). National Greenhouse Gas State Training Manual. Inventories Program. http://www.ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/ (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/GreenBuilding/Training/StateManual/Materials.doc ILO-OSH (International Labour Organization – Occupational Safety and Health). (accessed May 18, 2006) 2001. “Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems”. CCPS (Center for Chemical Process Safety). Homepage. American Institute of Geneva: International Labour Chemical Engineers. www.aiche.org/ccps (accessed May 18, 2006) Office. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/cops/english/download /e000013.pdf CCPS. 1992. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of Chemical Engineers. ICC (International Code Council). 2006. “International Building Code”. Falls Church, Virginia: ICC.
APRIL 30, 2007 96
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
IATA (International Air Transport Association). 2005. “Dangerous Goods NRCAN. 2004. “EnerGuide for Industry: Your guide to selecting energy-efficient Regulations Manual.” Geneva: IATA. http://www.iata.org/ps/publications/9065.htm industrial equipment”. Office of Energy Efficiency. (accessed May 18, 2006) http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/Energuide-industry/EGI- brochure-e.cfm IAEA (International Atomic Energy Agency). International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources NRCAN. Energy Star® - Heating, Cooling and Ventilation. Office of Energy http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 (accessed May Efficiency. 19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&printvie w=N#AC (accessed April 9, 2006) IHS 1996. ISO 9613 – Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors – Part 2: General method of calculation. NRCAN. Technical Factsheet CanMOST – Canadian Motor Selection Tool. Office http://engineers.ihs.com/document/abstract/XVNLCAAAAAAAAAAA (accessed of Energy Efficiency. May 19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/canadian-motor/index.cfm (accessed May 18, 2006) IMO (International Maritime Organization). International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code. http://www.imo.org/Safety/mainframe.asp?topic_id=158 (accessed NRCAN. 2005a. “Team up for Energy Savings - Compressed Air.” Office of Energy May 18, 2006) Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/compressed-air.pdf ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Quality and Environmental NRCAN. 2005b. Team up for Energy Savings – Lighting.” Office of Energy Management. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html (accessed May Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/light.pdf 18, 2006) NRCAN. 2006a. Model National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB) for the IOMC (Inter-Organization Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals. Commercial Building Incentive Program. 2001. “The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new- Guidelines to Classification 2000-2002.” International Program on Chemical buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20 (accessed March 24, 2006) Safety. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2002/a76526.pdf NRCAN. 2006b. Office of Energy Efficiency General Database. Kates, R., Hohenemser, C., and J. Kasperson, Editors. 1985. Perilous Progress: http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/infosource/PDFs (accessed March 24, 2006) Management the Hazards of Technology. Westview Press, London. NRCAN. 2006c. Office of Energy Efficiency – Industry Projects Database. Knowlton, R. Ellis. 1992. A Manual of Hazard & Operability Studies. Chemetics http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/home/index.cfm?act=category&cate International. gory=07&PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006) LDAR (Leak Detection and Repair Professionals). http://www.ldar.net/ (accessed NRCAN. 2006d. Energy Efficiency Regulations and Standards for Industry – May 18, 2006). Canada’s Energy Efficiency Regulations. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/industrial/regulations-standards/index.cfm?attr=24 Lijzen, J.P.A., A.J. Baars, P.F. Otte, M.G.J. Rikken, F.A. Swartjes, E.M.J. (accessed April 24, 2006) Verbruggen and A.P. van Wezel. 2001. Technical evaluation of the Intervention Values for Soil/sediment and Groundwater - Human and ecotoxicological risk New Zealand Ministry of the Environment. 2004. “Contaminated Land assessment and derivation of risk limits for soil, aquatic sediment and Management Guidelines No.5: Site Investigation and Analysis of Soils.” Federal groundwater. RIVM report 711701 023. Netherlands National Institute of Public Government of New Zealand. Health and the Environment. http://www.mfe.govt.nz/publications/hazardous/contaminated-land-mgmt- http://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/711701023.pdf guidelines-no5/index.html Massachusetts Department of Environment. Cleanup Sites and Spills. North American Energy Working Group. “North American Energy Efficiency http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup (accessed May 19, 2006). Standards and Labeling.” MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration). Homepage. http://www.msha.gov/ Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Database on (accessed May 19, 2006). Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals. http://appli1.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health). Center for Disease OECD. 1999. Safety Strategies for Rural Roads. Organization for Economic Control and Prevention – Department of Health and Human Services. Cooperation and Development, Paris. www.oecd.org/dataoecd/59/2/2351720.pdf http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html (accessed May 18, 2006) OHSAS. 2000. OHSAS 18002:2000. Occupational Health and Safety National Research Council of Canada, 2005. Building Codes. http://www.nrc- Management Systems - Guidelines for the Implementation of OHSAS 18001. cnrc.gc.ca/doingbusiness/codes_e.html (accessed May 18, 2006). OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). Emergency Standards. NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). Electric Motors – Factsheet 6. Office of http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/evacuation/standards_card.html (accessed May Energy Efficiency. 18, 2006) http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/regulations/html/Factsheet6.cfm?text=N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) OSHA. Safety and Health Topics - Toxic Metals. http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/metalsheavy/ (accessed May 19, 2006) NRCAN. Energy-Efficient Motor Systems Assessment Guide. Office of Energy Efficiency. Peden, Margie, David Sleet, Adnan Hyder and Colin Mathers, eds. 2004. “World http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/cipec/ieep/newscentre/motor_system/introduction.cfm?text= Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention.” Geneva: World Health Organization. N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.who.int/world-health-day/2004/infomaterials/world_report/en/ NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). EnerGuide Program. Office of Energy PDEP (Pennsylvania Department of Environment Protection). Official Recycled Efficiency. Product Guide. http://www.dep.state.pa.us/wm_apps/recycledproducts/ (accessed http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N May 18, 2006) (accessed March 24, 2006)
APRIL 30, 2007 97
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
PTCL (Physical and Theoretical Chemistry Lab). Safety (MSDS) data for (US DOE). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Combustion. benzo(a)pyrene. http://www.physchem.ox.ac.uk/MSDS/BE/benzo(a)pyrene.html http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/combustion.html#opp1 (accessed (accessed May 18, 2006) April 30, 2006). Prokop, Gundula. 2002. “Second Technical Workshop on Contaminated Sites - US DOE (US Department of Energy). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Workshop Proceedings and Follow-up.” European Environment Agency. Process Heating Systems. http://reports.eea.europa.eu/technical_report_2002_76/en/Tech76.pdf http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html (accessed April 30, 2006). Ritter, L., K.R. Solomon, J. Forget, M. Stemeroff and C.O’Leary. “An Assessment Report on: DDT-Aldrin-Dieldrin-Endrin-Chlordane, Heptachlor-Hexachlorobenzene, US DOE. Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Steam Boilers. Mirex-Toxaphene, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Dioxins and Furans.” International http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/steam.html (accessed April 30, Programme on Chemical Safety. 2006). http://www.pops.int/documents/background/assessreport/en/ritteren.pdf (accessed May 18, 2006) US DOE. Industrial Technologies Program – Best Practices. http://www1.eere.energy.gov/industry/bestpractices/ (accessed April 30, 2006) Ross A, Baguley C, Hills B, McDonald M, Solcock D.1991. “Towards Safer Roads in Developing Countries: A Guide for Planners and Engineers.” Berkshire: US DOE. “The Big Picture on Process Heating”. Industrial Technologies Program – Transport and Road Research Laboratory. Best Practices. http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/em_proheat_bigpict.pdf Rushbrook, P. and M. Pugh. 1998. “Solid Waste Landfills in Middle- and Lower- (accessed April 30, 2006). Income Countries: A Technical Guide to Planning, Design, and Operation.” World Bank. http://www- US DOE. 2005. “Improve Motor System Efficiency for a Broader Range of Motors wds.worldbank.org/external/default/WDSContentServer/IW3P/IB/2002/12/06/0000 with MotorMaster+ International.” Industrial Technologies Program. 94946_02112104104987/Rendered/PDF/multi0page.pdf http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/mmplus_international.pdf SCPOP (Stockholm Convention on POPs). Guidance Documents. US DOT (US Department of Transportation). HAZMATS Regulations. http://www.pops.int/documents/guidance/ (accessed May 19, 2006) http://hazmat.dot.gov/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Tsunokawa, Koji and Christopher Hoban, eds. 1997. “Roads and the US Energy Star Program. Guidelines for Energy Management. Environment: A Handbook.” Washington, D.C.: World Bank. http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines (accessed http://www.worldbank.org/transport/publicat/reh/toc.htm April 24, 2006) UK Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. http://www.defra.gov.uk/ US Energy Star Program. Tools and Resources. (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=tools_resources.bus_energy_management _tools_resources (accessed April 9, 2006) UK Environment Agency. Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA). http://www.environment- US EPA (US Environmental Protection Agency). Air Compliance Advisor. agency.gov.uk/subjects/landquality/113813/672771/?version=1&lang=_e http://www.epa.gov/ttn/ecas/ACA.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Ambient Air Monitoring QA Program. UN/ECE (United Nations/Economic Commission for Europe). United Nations http://www.epa.gov/airprogm/oar/oaqps/qa/index.html#guidance (accessed May Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations. 19, 2006). http://www.unece.org/trans/ (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines – Product Fact Sheets. UN/ECE. The Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook. http://www.epa.gov/cpg/factshts.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm (accessed May 18, 2006). US EPA. EPA Guidance. Environmentally Preferable Purchasing. UNEP (United Nation Environment Program). Secretariat of the Basel Convention http://www.epa.gov/oppt/epp/pubs/guidance/guidancepage.htm (accessed May on Hazardous Waste Management. http://www.basel.int/index.html (accessed 18, 2006) May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/hazwaste.htm UNEP. Persistant Organic Pollutants. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/ (accessed (accessed May 19, 2006). May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste Identification. UNEP. Country contributions: Information on the regulatory status of POPs; bans, http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/id/id.htm#id (accessed May 19, 2006). restrictions, and/or other legal permitted uses. US EPA. Major Environmental Laws. Laws and Regulations. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/POPs_Inc/INC_3/inf-english/inf3-9/sect5.pdf http://www.epa.gov/epahome/laws.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) (accessed May 18, 2006). US EPA. Performance Track Assistance. National Environmental Performance UNEP. 1993. Cleaner Production Worldwide Volume 1. Track. http://www.epa.gov/performancetrack/ptrackassist.htm (accessed May 18, http://www.uneptie.org/PC/cp/library/catalogue/regional_reports.htm . 2006) UNEP. 1997. The Environmental Management of Industrial Estates. Industry and US EPA 40 CFR Part 133, Secondary Treatment Regulation Environment, United Nations Environment Programme. (http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_02/40cfr133_02.html) US DOE. Building Toolbox – Boilers. Building Technologies Program. US EPA. Persistant Organic Pollutants (POPs). http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/components/hvac/boilers.html http://www.epa.gov/oppfead1/international/pops.htm (accessed May 19, 2006) (accessed April 30, 2006) US EPA. Pollution Prevention Highlights. http://www.epa.gov/p2/ (accessed May US DOE. 2002. Heating and Cooling Equipment Selection. Office of Building 18, 2006) Technology, State and Community Programs – Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/documents/pdfs/26459.pdf
APRIL 30, 2007 98
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES
WORLD BANK GROUP
US EPA. Region 9 Preliminary Remediation Goals. WHO. 2000a. Guidelines for the Purchase of Public Health Pesticides. http://www.epa.gov/region9/waste/sfund/prg/ (accessed May 19, 2006). WHO/CDS/WHOPES/2000.1. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. US EPA. Technology Transfer Network Clearinghouse for Inventories and Emissions Factors. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/ WHO. 2000b. Air Quality Guidelines for Europe. Geneva:WHO. http://www.euro.who.int/document/e71922.pdf US EPA. Waste Minimization. http://www.epa.gov/wastemin/ (accessed May 19, 2006). WHO. 2000. Towards an Assessment of the Socioeconomic Impact of Arsenic Poisoning in Bangladesh. WHO/SDE/WSH/00.4. World Health Organization. US EPA. 1991. Technical support document for water quality-based toxic control. Washington, DC.: Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Office of Water WHO. 2001. Chemistry and Specifications of Pesticides. Technical Report Series Regulations and Standards. 899. Geneva: WHO. US EPA. 2004. National Recommended Water Quality Criteria. Washington. DC: WHO. 2003. “Draft Guidelines for the Management of Public Health Pesticides.” United States Office of Water. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Science Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health and Technology (4304T). Organization. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2003/WHO_CDS_WHOPES_2003.7.pdf US EPA. 2005. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA). Pesticides Re-registration. WHO. 2004. Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality - Volume 1 Recommendations. http://www.epa.gov/oppad001/reregistration/cca/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Geneva: WHO. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/GDWQ2004web.pdf US EPA. 2006. 40CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, section 302.4, Designation of Hazardous Substances. http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/text- WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume idx?c=ecfr&sid=a1d39cb9632558b450b2d09e45b5ca78&rgn=div8&view=text&nod 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture e=40:27.0.1.1.2.0.1.4&idno=40 http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html WHO. 2005. Guidelines for drinking-water quality. USGS (US Geological Survey). 2000. Recycled Aggregates—Profitable Resource http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3/en/ (accessed May 18, Conservation. USGS Fact Sheet FS–181–99. http://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs-0181- 2006) 99/fs-0181-99so.pdf Woolliams, J. 2002. “Planning, Design and Construction Strategies for Green US NFPA (US National Fire Protection Association). 2006. 101- Life Safety Code Buildings.” Eco-City Planning Company. Handbook. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategies_g http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% uide.pdf 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search (accessed May 19, 2006). Yassi, A. et al. 1998. Basic Environmental Health. WHO/EHG/98.19. Office of US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1910.119 App Global and Integrated Environmental Health, World Health Organization, Geneva. A, Threshold Quantities. Zaim, M. 2002. Global Insecticide Use for Vector-Borne Disease Control. US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29CFR Part 1910.120, WHO/CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2002.2. Communicable Disease Control, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard. Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1910.119. WHO. 1987. Technology for Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing Countries. Technical Report Series No. 742. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1989. New Approaches to Improve Road Safety. Technical Report 781b. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1993. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 1: Recommendations. 2nd Edition. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1994. Operation and Maintenance of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation Systems: A Guide for Managers. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1996. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 2: Health Criteria and Other Supporting Information. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1997. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 3: Surveillance and Control of Community Supplies. World Health Organization, Geneva. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq2v1/en/index2.html (accessed May 18, 2006) WHO. 1999. Draft Specifications for Bacterial Larvicides for Public Health Use. WHO/CDS/CPC/WHOPES/99.2. Communicable Diseases Prevention and Control, WHO Pesticide Evaluation Scheme, World Health Organization. WHO. 1999. Prevention and Control of Dengue and Dengue Haemorrhagic Fever: Comprehensive Guidelines. WHO Regional Publication, SEARO No. 29. Regional Office for South-East Asia, World Health Organization, New Delhi. WHO. 1999. Safety of Pyrethroid-Treated Mosquito Nets. WHO/CDS/CPE/WHOPES/99.5. World Health Organization, Geneva.
APRIL 30, 2007 99